From b22baef408c481cea9a3570cdc3912c89a1356cd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karl Berry Date: Fri, 22 Mar 2019 20:49:17 +0000 Subject: glossaries-extra (22mar19) git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@50533 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751 --- .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES | 34 + .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README | 4 +- .../glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf | Bin 1261264 -> 1267552 bytes .../glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html | 11980 +++++++++---------- .../glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.pdf | Bin 769178 -> 769618 bytes .../glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.tex | 67 +- .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf | Bin 512950 -> 512854 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf | Bin 44749 -> 44749 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf | Bin 82614 -> 82614 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf | Bin 50358 -> 50358 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf | Bin 36734 -> 36734 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf | Bin 43863 -> 43863 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf | Bin 35296 -> 35296 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf | Bin 91049 -> 91049 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf | Bin 69519 -> 69519 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf | Bin 54855 -> 54855 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf | Bin 142030 -> 141701 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf | Bin 161462 -> 161131 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf | Bin 41281 -> 41281 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf | Bin 41603 -> 41603 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf | Bin 45245 -> 45245 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf | Bin 54610 -> 54610 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf | Bin 34175 -> 34175 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf | Bin 75256 -> 75256 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf | Bin 63220 -> 63220 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf | Bin 125899 -> 125899 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf | Bin 42711 -> 42711 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf | Bin 81603 -> 81603 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-linkcount.pdf | Bin 38222 -> 38222 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf | Bin 57809 -> 57809 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf | Bin 45141 -> 45141 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf | Bin 159897 -> 159568 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf | Bin 202099 -> 202099 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf | Bin 67724 -> 67724 bytes .../sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf | Bin 47572 -> 47572 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf | Bin 44514 -> 44514 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf | Bin 106058 -> 106058 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf | Bin 19858 -> 19856 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf | Bin 43469 -> 43469 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf | Bin 38788 -> 38788 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf | Bin 37047 -> 37047 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf | Bin 67878 -> 67878 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf | Bin 33107 -> 33107 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.glstex | 2 +- .../glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.pdf | Bin 71304 -> 71302 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex | 2 +- .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf | Bin 50220 -> 50220 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf | Bin 47883 -> 47883 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf | Bin 34931 -> 34931 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf | Bin 46388 -> 46388 bytes .../latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf | Bin 31596 -> 31596 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf | Bin 13411 -> 13411 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf | Bin 49443 -> 49443 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf | Bin 33219 -> 33219 bytes .../glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf | Bin 61040 -> 61040 bytes .../doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf | Bin 45734 -> 45734 bytes 56 files changed, 6002 insertions(+), 6087 deletions(-) (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra') diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES index 1043286d7a3..78362b3c3d1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES @@ -1,3 +1,37 @@ +1.39 (2018-03-22) + + * glossaries-extra.sty: + + - Added example-glossaries-symbolnames.bib + (corresponds to sample example-glossaries-symbolnames.tex + file provided by glossaries.sty) + + - Added starred versions of: + + \GlsXtrIfFieldEqStr + \GlsXtrIfFieldEqXpStr + \GlsXtrIfXpFieldEqXpStr + \GlsXtrIfFieldCmpNum + \GlsXtrIfFieldEqNum + \GlsXtrIfFieldNonZero + + - New command: \glsxtrentryparentname + + - New command: \glsxtrsetglossarylabel and 'label' key + for 'printgloss' family. + + - bug fix: added protection against fragile/non-expandable + commands in location within \@glsxtr@dorecord + + - bug fix: corrected short-nolong-desc, short-sc-nolong-desc, + short-sm-nolong-desc, short-em-desc (and their synonyms) + to behave as advertised in the manual. (That is, + name={short (long)} and description key must be supplied.) + + * glossary-bookindex.sty: + + - added: \glsxtrbookindexlocation, \glsxtrbookindexsublocation + 1.38 (2018-12-01) * glossary-longextra.sty diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README index 1aa6f70b73c..6f4e8de0817 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -LaTeX Package : glossaries-extra v1.38 +LaTeX Package : glossaries-extra v1.39 -Last Modified : 2018-12-01 +Last Modified : 2019-03-22 Author : Nicola Talbot diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf index 25b7d06aafe..83318aae646 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html index 47508f9d546..33d4596cd09 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html @@ -203,22 +203,22 @@ a span.HoLogo-TeX span.HoLogo-e{text-decoration:none;} -

-

+

-

+

-

-

glossaries-extra.sty v1.38: an extension to the +

+

glossaries-extra.sty v1.39: an extension to the glossaries package

@@ -241,22 +241,22 @@ class="td11">http://www.dickimaw-books.com/
-

2018-12-01

+

2019-03-22

-

+

-

-

+

Abstract

-

The

The glossaries-extra package is an extension to the glossaries package, providing additional features. Some of the features provided by this package are only available @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ with glossaries version 4.19 (or above). This document assumes familiarity with the glossaries package. -

The file

The file example-glossaries-xr.tex contains dummy entries with cross-references that may be used for creating minimal working examples for testing the .bib files for use with bib2gls. +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls.

-

Since

Since glossaries-extra internally loads the glossaries package, you also need to have glossaries installed and all the packages that glossaries depends on (including, but not limited to, tracklang, , mfirstuc, , etoolbox, , xkeyval (at least version dated 2006/11/18), + id="dx1-6"> (at least version dated 2006/11/18), textcase, , xfor, , datatool-base and and amsgen. These packages are all available in the + id="dx1-10">. These packages are all available in the current TEX Live and MikTEX distributions. If any of them are missing, please @@ -318,8 +317,8 @@ class="E">EX distribution? or Updating TEX on Linux.)
-

-

Additional resources:

+

+

Additional resources:

  • The glossaries-extra documented code glossaries-extra gallery.
  • glossaries-extra and bib2gls: An Introductory Guide. + id="dx1-11">bib2gls: An Introductory Guide. (bib2gls-begin.pdf). @@ -425,7 +423,8 @@ href="#sec:autoindex" id="QQ2-1-35">Auto-Indexing
    8 On-the-Fly Document Definitions
    9 bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases +href="#sec:bib2gls" id="QQ2-1-37">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases
     9.1 Selection @@ -472,15 +471,15 @@ href="#glossary">Glossary -

    1.

    1. Introduction

    -

    The

    The glossaries package is a flexible package, but it’s also a heavy-weight package that uses a lot of resources. As package developer, I’m caught between those users who complain about the drawbacks of a heavy-weight package with a large user manual and those users who want more features (which necessarily adds to the package weight and manual size). -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package is an attempt to provide a compromise for this conflict. Version 4.22 of the glossaries package is the last version to incorporate new @@ -496,10 +495,10 @@ of package loading time and allocation of resources, but those users who do want extra features available will have more of a chance of getting their feature requests accepted.

    -

    Top

    1.1 Package Defaults

    -

    I’m not happy with some of the default settings assumed by the

    I’m not happy with some of the default settings assumed by the glossaries package, and, judging from code I’ve seen, other users also seem unhappy with them, as certain package options are often used in questions posted on various sites. I can’t @@ -509,7 +508,7 @@ but since glossaries-extra is a separate package, I have decided to implement some of these commonly-used options by default. You can switch them back if they’re not appropriate. -

    The new defaults are:

    +

    The new defaults are:

    -

    This is like: +

    This is like: @@ -610,7 +609,7 @@ Commands and Styles).  
    \usepackage[toc,nopostdot]{glossaries}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-extra}

    -

    +

  • @@ -622,7 +621,7 @@ Commands and Styles).  
    \usepackage{babel}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-extra}
-

This is like: +

This is like: @@ -633,7 +632,7 @@ Commands and Styles).  
\usepackage[toc,nopostdot,translate=babel]{glossaries}  
\usepackage{glossaries-extra} -

+

  • @@ -644,7 +643,7 @@ Commands and Styles). \documentclass{memoir}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-extra} -

    This is like: +

    This is like: @@ -654,7 +653,7 @@ Commands and Styles).  
    \usepackage[toc,nopostdot,noredefwarn]{glossaries}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-extra} -

    However @@ -665,7 +664,7 @@ class="cmti-10">However  
    \usepackage{glossaries}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-extra} -

    This is like: +

    This is like: @@ -675,19 +674,19 @@ class="cmti-10">However  
    \usepackage[toc,nopostdot]{glossaries}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-extra} -

    Since by the time

    Since by the time glossaries-extra has been loaded, glossaries has already redefined memoir’s glossary-related commands.

  • -

    Another noticeable change is that by default

    Another noticeable change is that by default \printglossary will now display information text in the document if the external glossary file doesn’t exist. This is explanatory text to help new users who can’t work out what to do next to complete the document build. Once the document is set up correctly and the external files have been generated, this text will disappear. -

    This change is mostly likely to be noticed by users with one or more +

    This change is mostly likely to be noticed by users with one or more redundant empty glossaries who ignore transcript messages, explicitly use \printglossaries  
    \end{document} -

    The above document will only display the list of acronyms at the place where +

    The above document will only display the list of acronyms at the place where \printglossaries occurs. However it will also attempt to input the .gls file associated with the main glossary. -

    If you use

    If you use makeglossaries, you’ll get the warning message: @@ -738,7 +737,7 @@ Warning: File 'test.glo' is empty.  
    Remember to use package option 'nomain' if you  
    don't want to use the main glossary. -

    (where the original file is called

    (where the original file is called test.tex) but if you simply call No file test.gls. -

    This doesn’t occur with

    This doesn’t occur with makeglossaries as it will create the .gls file containing the single command \null. -

    If you simply change from

    If you simply change from glossaries to glossaries-extra in this document, you’ll find a change in the resulting PDF if you don’t use .acr file with makeindex. -

    The transcript file will still contain the message about the missing

    The transcript file will still contain the message about the missing .gls, but now you’ll also see information in the actual PDF document. The simplest remedy is to follow the advice inserted into the document at that point, which is to add the @@ -796,19 +795,19 @@ class="cmss-10">nomain\printglossaries  
    \end{document} -

    (Note the need to set the acronym style using

    (Note the need to set the acronym style using \setabbreviationstyle before \newacronym. See §3 Abbreviations for further details.) -

    +

    -

    Top

    1.2 New or Modified Package Options

    -

    If you haven’t already loaded

    If you haven’t already loaded glossaries, you can use any of the package options provided by glossaries when you load \setupglossariesglossaries package options may be used in that command. -

    This section only lists options that are either unrecognised by the

    This section only lists options that are either unrecognised by the glossaries package or are a modified version of options of the same name provided by glossaries. See the glossaries user manual for details about the unmodified options.
    -

    -

    The new and modified options provided by

    +

    The new and modified options provided by glossaries-extra are described below: @@ -858,7 +857,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries v4.32, so if you want to use this option with class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra you must make sure that your version of glossaries supports it. -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package extends this option to provide the additional values debug=all. -

    The

    The debug=showwrglossdebug=true and uses -



    \glsxtrwrglossmark  \glsxtrwrglossmark

    -

    +

    to show a mark just before the write operation performed by the indexing commands. If you use =alsoindex.aux file for bib2gls and a mark for +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls and a mark for the write operation to the associated glossary file for makeindex or xindy. -

    The

    The debug=all option implements both option implements both debug=showtargets and + id="dx1-4014"> and debug=showwrgloss. + id="dx1-4015">.

    postdot
    (New to version 1.12.) This option is just a shortcut for nopostdot=false. + id="dx1-4017">.
    postpunc
    (New to version 1.21.) This option sets the post-description punctuation to the given value. For example: postpunc=; does @@ -943,7 +941,7 @@ class="cmss-10">postpunc=; does
    \renewcommand{\glspostdescription}{;}
    -

    The value may also be one of the following keywords: +

    The value may also be one of the following keywords:

    commapostpunc=comma is equivalent to + id="dx1-4019"> is equivalent to
    \renewcommand{\glspostdescription}{,}
    -

    +

    dotpostpunc=dot is equivalent to + id="dx1-4020"> is equivalent to
    \renewcommand{\glspostdescription}{.\spacefactor\sfcode`\. }
    -

    +

    nonepostpunc=none is equivalent to + id="dx1-4021"> is equivalent to
    \renewcommand{\glspostdescription}{}
    -

    -

    The default definition is +

    +

    The default definition is @@ -1002,30 +1000,30 @@ class="cmss-10">=none  \ifglsnopostdot\else.\spacefactor\sfcode`\. \fi  
    }

    -

    where the conditional is determined by the

    where the conditional is determined by the nopostdot package option. + id="dx1-4022"> package option. The postpunc option removes the conditional from the definition of + id="dx1-4023"> option removes the conditional from the definition of \glspostdescription. The package options nopostdot and and postdot will restore + id="dx1-4025"> will restore the original definition of \glspostdescription. -

    The

    The glossaries-extra-stylemods package adjusts the predefined styles + id="dx1-4026"> package adjusts the predefined styles that had a hard-coded \space before the number list so that they use \glsxtrprelocation instead (which is defined to \space). You can therefore redefine this command in combination with postpunc to alter the separator + id="dx1-4028"> to alter the separator before the number list. For example, to have a comma followed by + id="dx1-4029">number list. For example, to have a comma followed by \hfil: @@ -1046,43 +1044,42 @@ class="cmtt-10">\hfil: \usepackage[postpunc=comma,stylemods]{glossaries-extra}  
    \renewcommand{\glsxtrprelocation}{\hfil}

    -

    Be careful with doing this as it will look odd if the

    Be careful with doing this as it will look odd if the number list is missing. (With bib2gls you can instead redefine bib2gls you can instead redefine \glsxtrprelocation to do nothing and set the location prefixes with loc-prefix which will only apply if the entry has a number list.) + id="dx1-4032">number list.)

    accsupp
    Load the glossaries-accsupp package (if not already loaded). -

    If you want to define styles that can interface with the accessibility support + id="dx1-4034"> package (if not already loaded). +

    If you want to define styles that can interface with the accessibility support provided by glossaries-accsupp use the use the \glsaccessxxx⟩ type of commands instead of \glsentryxxx⟩ (for example, \glsaccesstext instead of + id="dx1-4036"> instead of \glsentrytext). If ). If glossaries-accsupp hasn’t been loaded those commands are + id="dx1-4038"> hasn’t been loaded those commands are equivalent (for example, \glsaccesstext just does \glsentrytext) but if it @@ -1094,27 +1091,27 @@ href="#sec:accsupp">§11.2 Accessibility Support for further details.) -

    Note that the

    Note that the accsupp option can only be used as a package option (and can’t + id="dx1-4039"> option can only be used as a package option (and can’t be set with \glossariesextrasetup) since the ) since the glossaries-accsupp package must + id="dx1-4041"> package must be loaded before glossaries-extra if it’s required.

    stylemods
    This is a ⟨key⟩=⟨value⟩ option used to load the glossaries-extra-stylemods + id="dx1-4043"> package. The value may be a comma-separated list of options to pass to that package. (Remember to group ⟨value⟩ if it contains any commas.) The value may @@ -1127,17 +1124,17 @@ href="#sec:glosstylemods">Glossary Style href="#styopt.stylemods">stylemods=default (equivalent to omitting the value) and (equivalent to omitting the value) and stylemods=all, which + id="dx1-4045">, which loads all the predefined styles.
    undefaction
    This is a ⟨key⟩=⟨value⟩ option, which has two allowed values: error. This indicates what to do if an undefined glossary href="#styopt.undefaction">undefaction=error, which produces an error message (the + id="dx1-4047">, which produces an error message (the default for glossaries). You can switch this to a warning message (and ?? appearing in the text) with undefaction=warn. -

    Undefined entries can’t be picked up by any commands that iterate + id="dx1-4048">. +

    Undefined entries can’t be picked up by any commands that iterate over a glossary list. This includes \forglsentries and and \glsaddall. + id="dx1-4050">.
    -

    -

    Note that

    +

    Note that \ifglsused will display ?? in the document text with + id="dx1-4051"> will display ?? in the document text with undefaction=warn if the entry hasn’t been defined, as the underlying boolean + id="dx1-4052"> if the entry hasn’t been defined, as the underlying boolean variable doesn’t exist and so is neither true nor false. (There will also be a warning in the transcript.) See First Use Flag for furt indexcrossrefs

    This is a boolean option. If true, this will automatically index any cross-referenced entries that haven’t been marked as used at the end of the @@ -1194,66 +1191,65 @@ class="cmss-10">true, this will automatically index any class="cmss-10">false, but it will be automatically switched on if you use the see or or seealso keys + id="dx1-4055"> keys in any entries (unless autoseeindex=false). To force it off, even if you + id="dx1-4056">). To force it off, even if you use the see or or seealso key, you need to explicitly set key, you need to explicitly set indexcrossrefs to + id="dx1-4059"> to false. -

    Note that

    Note that bib2gls can automatically find dependent entries when it +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls can automatically find dependent entries when it parses the .bib source file. The record option automatically implements + id="dx1-4061"> option automatically implements indexcrossrefs=false. + id="dx1-4062">.

    autoseeindex
    (New to v1.16.) This is a boolean option. If true (default), this makes the see and and seealso keys automatically index the cross-reference when an entry + id="dx1-4065"> keys automatically index the cross-reference when an entry is defined. If false, the value of those keys will still be stored in their corresponding fields (and can be accessed using commands like \glsxtrusesee and \glsxtruseseealso) but cross-reference won’t be automatically indexed. -

    Note that the

    Note that the record=only option automatically implements option automatically implements autoseeindex=false. -

    For example, if an entry is defined as + id="dx1-4067">. +

    For example, if an entry is defined as @@ -1261,7 +1257,7 @@ class="cmss-10">=false \newglossaryentry{foo}{name={foo},description={},see={bar,baz}} -

    then with

    then with autoseeindex=true, this is equivalent to @@ -1273,7 +1269,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">autoseeindex=true, this is equivalent to  
    \glossariesextrasetup{indexcrossrefs=true}  
    \GlsXtrSetField{foo}{see}{bar,baz} -

    but with

    but with autoseeindex=false, this is equivalent to @@ -1283,19 +1279,19 @@ class="cmtt-10">autoseeindex=false, this is equivalent to \newglossaryentry{foo}{name={foo},description={}}  
    \GlsXtrSetField{foo}{see}{bar,baz} -

    Note that

    Note that indexcrossrefs isn’t automatically implemented by the presence of the + id="dx1-4068"> isn’t automatically implemented by the presence of the see key when key when autoseeindex is false. -

    It’s therefore possible to remove the cross-references from the location lists and + id="dx1-4070"> is false. +

    It’s therefore possible to remove the cross-references from the location lists and set their position within the glossary style. -

    Another method of preventing the automatic indexing is to define the entries +

    Another method of preventing the automatic indexing is to define the entries before the external indexing files have been opened with \makeglossaries. Since the appropriate file isn’t open, the information can’t be written to it. @@ -1307,25 +1303,25 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries) to record

    (New to v1.08.) This is a ⟨key⟩=⟨value⟩ option provided for the benefit of bib2gls (see bib2gls (see §9 bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases). -

    The option may only be set in the preamble and can’t be used after +href="#sec:bib2gls">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases). +

    The option may only be set in the preamble and can’t be used after \GlsXtrLoadResources. If the value is missing record=only is assumed. + id="dx1-4073"> is assumed. Permitted values:

    \makenoidxglossaries. This setting href="#styopt.undefaction">undefaction=error. + id="dx1-4074">.
    only
    The indexing is performed by bib2gls (see bib2gls (see §9 bib2gls: +href="#sec:bib2gls">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases). Neither \makeglossaries nor \makenoidxglossaries is permitted. This setting imp href="#styopt.undefaction">undefaction=warn and automatically loads the supplementary + id="dx1-4076"> and automatically loads the supplementary glossaries-extra-bib2gls package. (There should be no need to explicitly + id="dx1-4077"> package. (There should be no need to explicitly load glossaries-extra-bib2gls.) -

    The glossaries should be displayed using .) +

    The glossaries should be displayed using \printunsrtglossary (or \printunsrtglossaries). -

    The document build process is (assuming the file is called

    The document build process is (assuming the file is called myDoc.tex): @@ -1379,56 +1375,53 @@ class="cmtt-10">myDoc.tex):  
    bib2gls myDoc  
    pdflatex myDoc -

    -

    Note that

    +

    Note that record=only will prevent the will prevent the see from automatically + id="dx1-4080"> from automatically implementing \glssee. (bib2gls deals with the bib2gls deals with the see field.) You + id="dx1-4082"> field.) You may explicitly use \glssee in the document, but bib2gls will + id="dx1-4083">bib2gls will ignore the cross-reference if the see field was already set for that + id="dx1-4084"> field was already set for that entry. -

    The

    The record=only option will automatically set the option will automatically set the glossaries package’s sort=none option if available. (That option value was only introduced to + id="dx1-4086"> option if available. (That option value was only introduced to glossaries v4.30.)

    nameref
    (New to v1.37 and requires bib2gls v1.8+.) This option is like + id="dx1-4087">bib2gls v1.8+.) This option is like record=only but additionally records the current label information given by + id="dx1-4088"> but additionally records the current label information given by \@currentlabel and \@currentHref, and provides a more reliable way of @@ -1437,7 +1430,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\theH⟨counter⟩ for the given location. This option requires hyperref otherwise it will fall back on the usual location records. + id="dx1-4089"> otherwise it will fall back on the usual location records. Remember that \@currentHref is always globally updated whenever \@currentlabel isn’t. This can cause some indexcounter option increments the associated counter every time an entry + id="dx1-4090"> option increments the associated counter every time an entry is indexed, which affects this option. See §9.3.2 Nameref Record for further details. -

    This option is best used with

    This option is best used with counter=chapter or or counter=section if you + id="dx1-4092"> if you want the title included in the location list. If the indexing counter is the default page, only the location number is shown. Similarly for + id="dx1-4093">, only the location number is shown. Similarly for counter=equation (or (or equations=true). + id="dx1-4095">).

    alsoindex
    This is a hybrid setting that uses bib2gls to fetch entry information + id="dx1-4096">bib2gls to fetch entry information from .bib files, but uses makeindex or xindy to create the glossary files. This option should be used with \makeglossaries but not \makenoidxglossaries. You may need to change the transcript file used by bib2gls to avoid a clash with the transcript file used by bib2gls to avoid a clash with the transcript file used by makeindex or xindy. (This can be done with bib2gls’s bib2gls’s --log-file or -t option.) -

    The glossaries should be displayed using

    The glossaries should be displayed using \printglossary (or \printglossaries). This option is expected to be used with bib2gls’s + id="dx1-4103">bib2gls’s sort=none setting and so glossaries-extra-bib2gls is not automatically + id="dx1-4104"> is not automatically loaded. -

    The document build process is (assuming the file is called

    The document build process is (assuming the file is called myDoc.tex): @@ -1538,16 +1527,16 @@ class="cmtt-10">myDoc.tex):  
    makeglossaries myDoc  
    pdflatex myDoc -

    -

    With the recording on (

    +

    With the recording on (record=only or or record=alsoindex), any of the commands + id="dx1-4106">), any of the commands that would typically index the entry (such as \gls, \glstext or \glsadd) will add a \glsxtr@record entry to the .aux file. bib2gls can then +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls can then read these lines to find out which entries have been used. (Remember that commands like \glsentryname don’t index, so any use of these @@ -1568,27 +1556,28 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtr@record entry to the class="cmtt-10">.aux file.) See §9 bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases for further +href="#sec:bib2gls">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases for further details.

    equations
    (New to v1.37.) This option will cause the default location counter to automatically switch to equation when inside a numbered equation + id="dx1-4109"> when inside a numbered equation environment, such as equation or or align. The counter can be explicitly overridden + id="dx1-4112">. The counter can be explicitly overridden with counter in the optional arguments of commands like in the optional arguments of commands like \glslink or \gls as usual. @@ -1596,19 +1585,19 @@ class="cmtt-10">\gls as floats
    (New to v1.37.) This option will cause the default location counter to automatically switch to the corresponding counter when inside a floating environment, such as figure or or table. The counter can be explicitly overridden + id="dx1-4118">. The counter can be explicitly overridden with counter in the optional arguments of commands like in the optional arguments of commands like \glslink or \gls as usual. Remember that within floats it’s the \glsadd after the caption (not before). For  
      \glsadd{foobar}  
    \end{figure} -

    +

    indexcounter
    (New to v1.29.) This option (which doesn’t take a value) is primarily intended for use with bib2gls (v1.4+) and bib2gls (v1.4+) and hyperref. It can be used + id="dx1-4123">. It can be used with makeindex or xindy but it will interfere with the number list collation, so you won’t have ranges and you’ll have duplicate page numbers present (but each page number will link to the relevant part of the page @@ -1667,26 +1655,26 @@ href="#glo:numberlist">number list href="#styopt.counter">counter=wrglossary. -

    This option works by incrementing . +

    This option works by incrementing wrglossary and adding and adding \label. This can + id="dx1-4129">. This can cause a problem if the indexing occurs in an equation environment as environment as amsmath + id="dx1-4132"> forbids multiple occurrences of \label (resulting in the “Multiple \label’s” error). It’s best to change the counter to page or or equation when in maths mode + id="dx1-4134"> when in maths mode with this option. For example: @@ -1698,22 +1686,22 @@ class="cmss-10">equation\renewcommand{\glsaddpresetkeys}{%  
     \ifmmode \setkeys{glossadd}{counter=equation}\fi}
    -

    -

    -

    By default (with

    +

    +

    By default (with hyperref), the page numbers in ), the page numbers in number lists link back to the top of the relevant page (provided the format uses \glshypernumber). The indexcounter option is designed to link back to the place within the page where + id="dx1-4137"> option is designed to link back to the place within the page where the indexing occurred. It does this by creating a new counter (called wrglossary) + id="dx1-4138">) that’s incremented with \refstepcounter every time an entry is indexed (but not via cross-referencing commands, such as \label is placed class="cmtt-10">\pageref. The location, as seen by the indexing application, is the value of the wrglossary counter but this value is substituted with the page + id="dx1-4139"> counter but this value is substituted with the page reference when number list is typeset. Since the counter is used by all + id="dx1-4140">number list is typeset. Since the counter is used by all entries and is incremented every time any indexing occurs, neither makeindex nor xindy can correctly collate the lists. For example, if the first term to be referenced is indexed three times on page 5 without any intervening terms then the actual locations obtained from wrglossary + id="dx1-4143"> will be 1, 2 and 3, which xindy and makeindex will try to form into the range 1–3, but they should actually all simply appear as page 5, whereas it can actually end up with 5–5. Conversely, a range may not be formed where it would naturally occur if just the page counter was + id="dx1-4146"> counter was used. -

    Since

    Since bib2gls is designed specifically to work with bib2gls is designed specifically to work with glossaries-extra, bib2gls (v1.4+) will check for bib2gls (v1.4+) will check for wrglossary locations. If the default + id="dx1-4149"> locations. If the default --merge-wrglossary-records is on, then any records for the same page for a given entry will be merged. In the above example with three references on page 5, only a single record for page 5 for that entry will be added to the number list and it will link back to the first instance on + id="dx1-4150">number list and it will link back to the first instance on that page. Whereas if you use the --no-merge-wrglossary-records switch, the number list will contain three instance of page 5, with + id="dx1-4151">number list will contain three instance of page 5, with each linking to the corresponding place on that page. In both cases, consecutive pages can form ranges, but it may look strange in the second case. -

    See the bib2gls documentation for the

    See the bib2gls documentation for the save-index-counter resource option for more details. @@ -1788,7 +1773,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">save-index-counter resource option docdef

    This option governs the use of \newglossaryentry. It was originally a boolean option, but as from version 1.06, it can now take one of the following @@ -1797,10 +1782,10 @@ class="cmss-10">true is assumed): -

    The

    The glossaries package allows \newglossaryentry within the document + id="dx1-4178"> environment (when used with makeindex or xindy) but the user manual warns against this usage. By default the prohibits this, only allowing definitions within the preamble. If you are really determined to define entries in the document environment, despite all the associated drawbacks, you + id="dx1-4182"> environment, despite all the associated drawbacks, you can restore this with docdef=true. Note that this doesn’t change the + id="dx1-4184">. Note that this doesn’t change the prohibitions that the glossaries package has in certain circumstances (for example, when using “option 1”). See the glossaries user manual for href="#styopt.docdef">docdef=restricted. Only use . Only use docdef=true if document definitions + id="dx1-4186"> if document definitions are necessary and one or more of the glossaries occurs in the front matter. -

    This option affects commands that internally use

    This option affects commands that internally use \newglossaryentry, such as \newabbreviation, but not the “on-the-fly” commands described in On-the-Fly Document Definitions



    \printabbreviations  \printabbreviations[options]

    -

    +

    which is equivalent to

    ]
    The title of the new glossary is given by -



    \abbreviationsname  \abbreviationsname

    -

    +

    If this command is already defined, it’s left unchanged. Otherwise it’s defined to “Abbreviations” if babel hasn’t been loaded or hasn’t been loaded or \acronymname if babel has been loaded. However, if you’re using has been loaded. However, if you’re using babel it’s likely you + id="dx1-4193"> it’s likely you will need to change this. (See §13 Multi-Lingual Support for further details.) -

    If you don’t use the

    If you don’t use the abbreviations package option, the package option, the \abbreviationsname command won’t be defined (unless it’s defined by an included language file).
    -

    -

    If the

    +

    If the abbreviations option is used and the option is used and the acronym option provided by the + id="dx1-4196"> option provided by the glossaries package hasn’t been used, then \acronymtype will be set to + id="dx1-4197"> will be set to \glsxtrabbrvtype so that acronyms defined with so that acronyms defined with \newacronym can be added + id="dx1-4199"> can be added to the list of abbreviations. If you want acronyms in the main glossary and other abbreviations in the main:

    \renewcommand*{\acronymtype}{main}
    -

    -

    Note that there are no analogous options to the

    +

    Note that there are no analogous options to the glossaries package’s acronymlists + id="dx1-4200"> option (or associated commands) as the abbreviation mechanism is handled differently with glossaries-extra. @@ -2073,13 +2058,13 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra. symbols

    This is passed to glossaries but will additionally define -



    \glsxtrnewsymbol  \glsxtrnewsymbol[options]{}{symbol}

    -

    +

    which is equivalent to

    }
    Note that the sort key is set to the ⟨ key is set to the ⟨label⟩ not the ⟨symbol⟩ as the symbol will likely contain commands. @@ -2116,19 +2101,19 @@ class="cmti-10">symbol⟩ as the symbol will numbers
    This is passed to glossaries but will additionally define -



    \glsxtrnewnumber  \glsxtrnewnumber[options]{number}

    -

    +

    which is equivalent to

    } shortcuts
    Unlike the glossaries package option of the same name, this option isn’t boolean but has multiple values: @@ -2163,11 +2148,11 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries package option of the same name, this option i href="#styopt.shortcuts">shortcuts=acronyms (or (or shortcuts=acro): set the shortcuts provided + id="dx1-4208">): set the shortcuts provided by the glossaries package for acronyms (such as \ac). Note that the @@ -2183,13 +2168,13 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra href="#styopt.shortcuts">shortcuts=ac. + id="dx1-4209">.
  • shortcuts=ac: set the shortcuts provided by the : set the shortcuts provided by the glossaries package for acronyms (such as \ac) but uses the \gls. href="#styopt.shortcuts">shortcuts=abbreviations (or (or shortcuts=abbr): + id="dx1-4212">): set the abbreviation shortcuts provided by glossaries-extra. (See glossaries package. href="#styopt.shortcuts">shortcuts=other: set the “other” shortcut commands, but not the shortcut + id="dx1-4213">: set the “other” shortcut commands, but not the shortcut commands for abbreviations or the acronym shortcuts provided by glossaries. The “other” shortcuts are:
    • \newentry equivalent to equivalent to \newglossaryentry + id="dx1-4215">
    • \newsym equivalent to equivalent to \glsxtrnewsymbol (see the (see the symbols + id="dx1-4218"> option).
    • \newnum equivalent to equivalent to \glsxtrnewnumber (see the (see the numbers + id="dx1-4221"> option).
  • shortcuts=all (or (or shortcuts=true): implements ): implements shortcuts=ac, + id="dx1-4224">, shortcuts=abbreviations and and shortcuts=other. + id="dx1-4226">.
  • shortcuts=none (or (or shortcuts=false): don’t define any of the shortcut + id="dx1-4228">): don’t define any of the shortcut commands (default).
  • -

    Note that multiple invocations of the

    Note that multiple invocations of the shortcuts option option within the same option list will override each other.

    -

    After the

    After the glossaries-extra package has been loaded, you can set available options using -



    \glossariesextrasetup  \glossariesextrasetup{options}

    -

    +

    The abbreviations and and docdef options may only be used in the preamble. Additionally, + id="dx1-4232"> options may only be used in the preamble. Additionally, docdef can’t be used after can’t be used after \makenoidxglossaries. + id="dx1-4234">.

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    2. Modifications to Existing Commands and Styles

    -

    The

    The glossaries package provides \nopostdesc which may be used in the descriptionglossaries-extra package provides another command -



    \glsxtrnopostpunc  \glsxtrnopostpunc

    -

    +

    which has a similar function but only suppresses the post-description punctuation. It doesn’t suppress the use of \glsxtrpostdescription which allows the use of @@ -2353,12 +2338,12 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostdescription not before.) The post-description hook can counter-act the effect of \glsxtrnopostpunc using -



    \glsxtrrestorepostpunc  \glsxtrrestorepostpunc

    -

    +

    These commands have no effect outside of the glossary (except with standalone entries that use \glsxtractivatenopost and §10.3 Standalone Entry Items). -

    The

    The glossaries package provides -



    \glsseeitemformat  \glsseeitemformat{label}

    -

    +

    to format items in a cross-reference list (identified with the see key or  \ifglshasshort{\glslabel}{\glsaccesstext{#1}}{\glsaccessname{#1}}%  
    }

    -

    If you want to restore the

    If you want to restore the glossaries v3.0+ definition just do: @@ -2424,7 +2409,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries v3.0+ definition just do:

    \renewcommand*{\glsseeitemformat}[1]{\glsentrytext{#1}}
    -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package provides \glsxtrhiername§2.2 Cross-References (“see” and “see also”) for further details. -

    The commands used by

    The commands used by glossaries to automatically produce an error if an entry is undefined (such as \glsdoifexistsundefaction option into account. -

    The

    The \newignoredglossary{Categories for furt check that the glossary doesn’t already exist. (The glossaries package omits this check.) -

    You can now provide an ignored glossary with: -


    You can now provide an ignored glossary with: +


    \provideignoredglossary  \provideignoredglossary{type}

    -

    +

    which will only define the glossary if it doesn’t already exist. This also has a starred version that doesn’t automatically switch off hyperlinks. -

    The individual glossary displaying commands

    The individual glossary displaying commands \printglossary, \printnoidxglossaryprefixprefix key in commands like \gls. -

    The \newglossaryentry command has three new keys:

    +class="cmtt-10">\gls
    . + +
  • label={label}. Labels the glossary with \label{label} and also defines + \@currentlabelname to the glossary’s TOC title (to provide text for + \nameref). You can also set the label before the glossary using: +


    \glsxtrsetglossarylabel  \glsxtrsetglossarylabel{label}

    +

    + but take care of duplicate labels if it’s not scoped.

  • +

    The \newglossaryentry command has three new keys:

    -

    The test file

    The test file example-glossaries-xr.tex contains dummy entries with a mixture of see, , alias and and seealso keys for use with minimal working examples. There are also + id="dx1-5033"> keys for use with minimal working examples. There are also example-glossaries-*.bib files that correspond to each example-glossaries-*.tex file for testing bib2gls. -

    The bib2gls. +

    The \longnewglossaryentry command now has a starred version (as from v1.12) that doesn’t automatically insert @@ -2578,11 +2585,11 @@ that doesn’t automatically insert

    \leavevmode\unskip\nopostdesc
    -

    at the end of the description field. -


    at the end of the description field. +


    \longnewglossaryentry  \longnewglossaryentry*{label}{} class="cmtt-10">{description}

    -

    +

    The descriptionplural key is left unset unless explicitly set in ⟨ key is left unset unless explicitly set in ⟨options⟩. -

    The unstarred version no longer hard-codes the above code (which removes +

    The unstarred version no longer hard-codes the above code (which removes trailing space and suppresses the post-description hook) but instead uses: -



    \glsxtrpostlongdescription  \glsxtrpostlongdescription

    -

    +

    This can be redefined to allow the post-description hook to work but retain the \unskip part if required. For example: @@ -2615,57 +2622,57 @@ class="cmtt-10">\unskip part if required. For example:

    \renewcommand*{\glsxtrpostlongdescription}{\leavevmode\unskip}
    -

    This will discarded unwanted trailing space at the end of the description but won’t +

    This will discarded unwanted trailing space at the end of the description but won’t suppress the post-description hook. -

    The unstarred version also alters the base

    The unstarred version also alters the base glossaries package’s treatment of the + id="dx1-5038"> package’s treatment of the descriptionplural key. Since a plural description doesn’t make much sense for + id="dx1-5039"> key. Since a plural description doesn’t make much sense for multi-paragraph descriptions, the default behaviour with glossaries-extra’s + id="dx1-5040">’s \longnewglossaryentry is to simply leave the plural description unset unless explicitly set using the descriptionplural key. The key. The glossaries.sty version of this command sets the description’s plural form to the same as the singular.2.1 -

    Note that this modified unstarred version doesn’t append +

    Note that this modified unstarred version doesn’t append \glsxtrpostlongdescription to the description’s plural form. -

    The

    The \newterm command (defined through the command (defined through the index package option) is modified + id="dx1-5049"> package option) is modified so that the category defaults to index. The . The \newacronym command is modified + id="dx1-5051"> command is modified to use the new abbreviation interface provided by glossaries-extra. (See §3 Abbreviations.) -

    The

    The \makeglossaries command now has an optional argument. -



    \makeglossaries  \makeglossaries[list]

    -

    +

    If ⟨list⟩ is empty, \makeglossaries behaves as per its original definition in the @@ -2673,44 +2680,44 @@ class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries behaves as per its original definition in class="cmss-10">glossaries package, otherwise ⟨list⟩ can be a comma-separated list of glossaries that need processing with an external indexing application. -

    This command is not permitted with the

    This command is not permitted with the record=only package option. Without + id="dx1-5053"> package option. Without the optional argument, it’s permitted with record=alsoindex. With the optional + id="dx1-5054">. With the optional argument, it’s only permitted with the default record=off. -

    It should then be possible to use . +

    It should then be possible to use \printglossary for those glossaries listed in ⟨list⟩ and \printnoidxglossary for the other glossaries. (See the accompanying file sample-mixedsort.tex for an example.) -

    If you use the optional argument ⟨

    If you use the optional argument ⟨list⟩, you can’t define entries in the document (even with the docdef option).
    -

    -

    You will need at least version 2.20 of option).

    +

    +

    You will need at least version 2.20 of makeglossaries or at least version 1.3 of the Lua alternative makeglossaries-lite (both distributed with (both distributed with glossaries v4.27) to allow for this use of \makeglossaries[list]. Alternatively, use the automake + id="dx1-5060"> option.

    -

    Top

    2.1 Entry Indexing

    -

    As from version 1.31, there is a new command like

    As from version 1.31, there is a new command like \glsadd where the mandatory argument is a comma-separated list of labels: -



    \glsaddeach  options]{list}

    -

    +

    This simply iterates over ⟨list⟩ and does \glsadd[]{label} for each entry in the list. -

    As from version 1.37, you can make commands like

    As from version 1.37, you can make commands like \gls or \glslink automatically use } in the optional argument of the corresponding \gls, \glslink etc). -



    \GlsXtrAutoAddOnFormat  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨glsadd options}

    -

    +

    The optional argument ⟨label⟩ defaults to \glslabel and indicates the label to use in @@ -2788,7 +2795,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">format={⟨format} prepended to the list. -

    For example, with: +

    For example, with: @@ -2796,7 +2803,7 @@ list.

    \GlsXtrAutoAddOnFormat{hyperbf}{counter=chapter}
    -

    then

    then \gls[format=hyperbf]{sample} will be equivalent to @@ -2805,11 +2812,11 @@ class="cmtt-10">\gls[format=hyperbf]{sample} will be equiva

    \glsadd[format=hyperbf,counter=chapter]{sample}\gls[format=hyperbf]{sample}
    -

    Note that the explicit range markers will prevent a match unless you include +

    Note that the explicit range markers will prevent a match unless you include them in ⟨format list⟩ (in which case, be sure to add both the start and end formats). -

    Here’s another example: +

    Here’s another example: @@ -2817,7 +2824,7 @@ formats).

    \GlsXtrAutoAddOnFormat[dual.\glslabel]{hyperbf}{}
    -

    In this case

    In this case \gls[format=hyperbf]{sample} will now be equivalent to: @@ -2826,12 +2833,12 @@ class="cmtt-10">\gls[format=hyperbf]{sample} will now be eq

    \glsadd[format=hyperbf]{dual.sample}\gls[format=hyperbf]{sample}
    -

    -

    +

    \GlsXtrAutoAddOnFormat is not applied to \glsadd as it could cause an infinite loop.
    -

    +

    The glossaries-extra package provides extra keys for commands like \gls and @@ -2892,13 +2899,13 @@ class="cmtt-10">wrgloss=after for specific instances. Note that this opti settings (such as noindex). -

    The default value is set up using -


    The default value is set up using +


    \glsxtrinitwrgloss  \glsxtrinitwrgloss

    -

    +

    which is defined as: @@ -2915,15 +2922,15 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrinitwrgloss


     
     }%  
    }
    -

    This sets the conditional -


    This sets the conditional +


    \ifglsxtrinitwrglossbefore  \ifglsxtrinitwrgloss

    -

    +

    which is used to determine where to perform the indexing. -

    This means you can set the

    This means you can set the wrgloss attribute to \hyperlink. For

    \glssetcategoryattribute{mathrelation}{hyperoutside}{false}
    -

    will set

    will set hyperoutside=false for all entries that are assigned to the category mathrelation and @@ -3005,7 +3012,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">mathrelation and

    \glssetcategoryattribute{mathrelation}{textformat}{mathrel}
    -

    will use

    will use \mathrel instead of \glstextformat resulting in:

    @@ -3062,31 +3069,31 @@ class="cmssbx-10">theHvalue
    Set the corresponding hyperlink location (see below).
    -

    There is a new hook that’s used each time indexing information is written to the +

    There is a new hook that’s used each time indexing information is written to the external glossary files: -



    \glsxtrdowrglossaryhook  \glsxtrdowrglossaryhook{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. This does nothing by default but may be redefined. (See, for example, the accompanying sample file sample-indexhook.tex, which uses this hook to determine which entries haven’t been indexed.) -

    There’s also a new hook (from v1.26) that’s used immediately before the options +

    There’s also a new hook (from v1.26) that’s used immediately before the options are set by the \gls-like and \glstext-like commands: -



    \glslinkpresetkeys  \glslinkpresetkeys

    -

    +

    (The base package provides \glslinkpostsetkeys that’s used immediately after the @@ -3094,21 +3101,21 @@ options are set.) -

    As from version 1.30 there are also similar hooks for

    As from version 1.30 there are also similar hooks for \glsadd: -



    \glsaddpresetkeys  \glsaddpresetkeys

    -

    +

    and -



    \glsaddpostsetkeys  \glsaddpostsetkeys

    -

    +

    For example, to default to using the equation counter in maths mode: @@ -3122,7 +3129,7 @@ class="cmss-10">equation\renewcommand{\glsaddpresetkeys}{%  
     \ifmmode \setkeys{glossadd}{counter=equation}\fi}

    -

    In this case, the counter can be overridden with an explicit use of

    In this case, the counter can be overridden with an explicit use of counter in the optional argument of equations package option.) -

    Alternatively, to enforce this (overriding the option argument): +

    Alternatively, to enforce this (overriding the option argument): @@ -3143,8 +3150,8 @@ class="cmss-10">equations\renewcommand{\glsaddpostsetkeys}{%  
     \ifmmode \setkeys{glossadd}{counter=equation}\fi}

    -

    -

    As from version 1.14, there are two new keys for

    +

    As from version 1.14, there are two new keys for \glsadd: thevalue and thevalue keys is intended primarily for adding locations in supplementary material that can’t be obtained from a counter. -

    The principle key

    The principle key thevalue is for the location value. The other key theHvalueprefix⟩⟨location⟩. In general, there’s little need for this key as the prefix is typically associated with a counter that can be used to form hypertargets. -

    If you use

    If you use thevalue, you must make sure that you use an indexing application that will accept the given value.
    -

    -

    For example,

    +

    For example, makeindex will only accept locations in the form [⟨num⟩⟨ \glsadd[thevalue={Supplementary Material}]{sample}

    -

    This location value will be accepted by

    This location value will be accepted by bib2gls, since it will allow any location and +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls, since it will allow any location and will only try forming ranges if the location matches any of its numerical patterns. In the case of xindy, you’ll need to add a rule that can match the value. + id="dx1-6047">, you’ll need to add a rule that can match the value. If you’re using hyperref, you may need to use the , you may need to use the format key to prevent a + id="dx1-6049"> key to prevent a hyperlink if one can’t naturally be formed from the prefix, counter and location value. -

    For example, suppose the file

    For example, suppose the file suppl.tex contains: @@ -3234,10 +3240,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">suppl.tex contains:  
    \gls{sample}.  
    \end{document}

    -

    This has an entry on page S.2. Suppose another document wants to include this +

    This has an entry on page S.2. Suppose another document wants to include this location in the glossary. Then this can be done by setting thevalue to to S.2. For example: @@ -3255,17 +3261,17 @@ example:  
    \glsadd[thevalue={S.2}]{sample}  
    \end{document}

    -

    This location value will be accepted by

    This location value will be accepted by makeindex as it’s in the form ⟨ as it’s in the form ⟨num⟩⟨sep⟩⟨num⟩. -

    If you want hyperlinks, things are more complicated. First you need to set the +

    If you want hyperlinks, things are more complicated. First you need to set the externallocation attribute to the location of the PDF file. For example: + id="dx1-6052"> attribute to the location of the PDF file. For example: @@ -3275,7 +3281,7 @@ class="cmss-10">externallocation\newglossaryentry{sample}{category=supplemental,  
     name={sample},description={an example}}

    -

    Next you need to add

    Next you need to add glsxtrsupphypernumber as the format: @@ -3284,30 +3290,30 @@ class="cmtt-10">glsxtrsupphypernumber as the format:

    \glsadd[thevalue={S.2},format=glsxtrsupphypernumber]{sample}
    -

    Both documents will need to use the

    Both documents will need to use the hyperref package. Remember that the counter + id="dx1-6053"> package. Remember that the counter used for the location also needs to match. If \theHcounter⟩ is defined in the other document and doesn’t match in the referencing document, then you need to use theHvalue to set the appropriate value. See the accompanying sample files + id="dx1-6054"> to set the appropriate value. See the accompanying sample files sample-suppl-hyp.tex and sample-suppl-main-hyp.tex for an example that uses hyperref. -

    The hyperlink for the supplementary location may or . +

    The hyperlink for the supplementary location may or may not take you to the relevant place in the external PDF file depending on your PDF viewer. Some may not support external links, and some may take you to the first page or last visited page.
    -

    -

    For example, if both

    +

    For example, if both sample-suppl-hyp.pdf and sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf are in the same directory, then viewing sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf in Evince will take you to the correct location in the linked document (when you click on the S.2 external link), but Okular will take you to the top of the first page of the linked document. -

    This method can only be used where there is one external source for the +

    This method can only be used where there is one external source for the designated category (identified by the externallocation attribute). For multiple + id="dx1-6056"> attribute). For multiple sources, you need to use bib2gls version 1.7+, which is the better method in +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls version 1.7+, which is the better method in general as it can automatically fetch the relevant locations from the .aux files of the designated external documents without the need to explicitly use \glsadd. -

    +

    -

    Top

    2.2 Cross-References (“see” and “see also”)

    -

    The value of the

    The value of the see key is now saved as a field. This isn’t the case with glossaries, @@ -3362,9 +3367,9 @@ class="cmss-10">document environment on the next run. -

    This modification allows

    This modification allows glossaries-extra to provide -



    \glsxtraddallcrossrefs  \glsxtraddallcrossrefs

    -

    +

    which is used at the end of the document to automatically add any unused cross-references unless the package option indexcrossrefs was set to false. -

    As a by-product of this enhancement, the

    As a by-product of this enhancement, the see key will now work for entries defined in the see value to be stored even though it may not be possible to index it at that point. -

    As from version 1.06, you can display the cross-referenced information for a given +

    As from version 1.06, you can display the cross-referenced information for a given entry using -



    \glsxtrusesee  \glsxtrusesee{label}

    -

    +

    This internally uses -



    \glsxtruseseeformat  tag}{xr list}

    -

    +

    where ⟨tag⟩ and ⟨xr list⟩ are obtained from the value of the entry’s see field hasn’t been set for the entry given by ⟨label⟩. -

    As with the base

    As with the base glossaries package, \glsseeformat is defined to do }. The third argument is always ignored and is present fo class="cmtt-10">makeindex, which always requires a final argument to encapsulate the associated location. The command -



    \glsseelist{xr list}

    -

    +

    used to iterate over the list of cross-reference labels is also unchanged from the base glossaries package, with each item in the list formatted according to: -



    \glsseeitem{label}

    -

    +

    This is defined by the glossaries package to:

    @@ -3525,16 +3530,16 @@ have sub-entries. For example:
    \renewcommand*{\glsseeitemformat}[1]{\glsxtrhiername{#1}}
    -

    -

    The command: -


    +

    The command: +


    \glsxtrhiername  \glsxtrhiername{label}

    -

    +

    performs a recursive action:

    1. short\glsaccessshort) otherwise the name is displayed (using \glsaccessname).
    -

    The first step above is skipped if the entry doesn’t have a parent. Each level is separated +

    The first step above is skipped if the entry doesn’t have a parent. Each level is separated by: -



    \glsxtrhiernamesep  \glsxtrhiernamesep

    -

    +

    which defaults to “ ”. This can be redefined as appropriate. -

    There are some case-changing variants: -


    There are some case-changing variants: +


    \Glsxtrhiername  \Glsxtrhiername{label}

    -

    +

    The top-level has the first letter changed to upper case (either \Glsaccessshort or \Glsaccessname). There’s no case-change for sub-entries. -



    \GlsXtrhiername  \GlsXtrhiername{label}

    -

    +

    All levels have the first letter changed to upper case (either \Glsaccessshort or \Glsaccessname). -



    \GLSxtrhiername  \GLSxtrhiername{label}

    -

    +

    The top-level is converted to upper case (either \GLSaccessshort or \GLSaccessname). There’s no case-change for sub-entries. -


    -

    Now the cross-references can appear even though the

    Now the cross-references can appear even though the number list has been suppressed. -

    As from v1.16, there’s a separate

    As from v1.16, there’s a separate seealso key. Unlike see\seealsoname or \glsxtruseseealsoformat, described below). -

    You can display the formatted list of cross-references stored in the

    You can display the formatted list of cross-references stored in the seealso key using: -



    \glsxtruseseealso  \glsxtruseseealso{label}

    -

    +

    This works in much the same way as \glsxtrusesee but it internally uses -



    \glsxtruseseeformat  \glsxtruseseealsoformat{xr list}

    -

    +

    For example: @@ -3709,20 +3714,20 @@ For example:  
     {}%  
    }

    -

    -

    The actual unformatted comma-separated list ⟨

    +

    The actual unformatted comma-separated list ⟨xr-list⟩ stored in the seealso field can be accessed with: -



    \glsxtrseealsolabels  \glsxtrseealsolabels{label}

    -

    +

    This will just expand to the ⟨xr-labels⟩ provided in the value of the seealso[⟨tag], so it can’t be automatically treated as a simple comma-separated list. -

    As mentioned above, the base

    As mentioned above, the base glossaries package provides \glsseelist, which @@ -3748,20 +3753,20 @@ class="cmti-10">label⟩} as the argument. For convenience, glossaries-extra provides -



    \glsxtrseelist  \glsxtrseelist{xr list}

    -

    +

    which fully expands its argument and passes it to \glsseelist. -

    The

    The seealso key implements the automatic indexing using -



    \glsxtrindexseealso  label}{xr list}

    -

    +

    which just does

    glossaries v4.30+, in which case a distinct seealso cross-reference class is used instead. -

    +

    -

    Top

    2.3 Entry Display Style Modifications

    -

    Recall from the

    Recall from the glossaries package that commands such as \gls display text at that point in the document (optionally with a hyperlink to the relevant @@ -3808,7 +3813,7 @@ whether or not it actually has a hyperlink. The actual text and the way it’s displayed depends on the command used (such as \gls) and the entry format. -

    The default entry format (

    The default entry format (\glsentryfmt) used in the §3.2 Abbreviation Styles). -

    This means that entries with a short form can be treated as regular entries rather +

    This means that entries with a short form can be treated as regular entries rather than abbreviations if it’s more appropriate for the desired style. -

    As from version 1.04,

    As from version 1.04, \glsentryfmt now puts \glsgenentry in the argument of the new command -



    \glsxtrregularfont  \glsxtrregularfont{text}

    -

    +

    This just does its argument ⟨text⟩ by default. This means that if you want regular entries in a different font but don’t want that font to apply to abbreviations, then @@ -3919,7 +3924,7 @@ overridden by the textformat attribute. -

    For example: +

    For example: @@ -3927,7 +3932,7 @@ class="cmss-10">textformat \renewcommand*{\glsxtrregularfont}[1]{\textsf{#1}}

    -

    You can access the label through

    You can access the label through \glslabel. For example, you can query the category: @@ -3938,7 +3943,7 @@ category: \renewcommand*{\glsxtrregularfont}[1]{%  
     \glsifcategory{\glslabel}{general}{\textsf{#1}}{#1}}

    -

    or query the category attribute, for example, provide a custom attribute called +

    or query the category attribute, for example, provide a custom attribute called font: @@ -3950,7 +3955,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">font:  
    \renewcommand*{\glsxtrregularfont}[1]{%  
     \glsifattribute{\glslabel}{font}{sf}{\textsf{#1}}{#1}}

    -

    As from version 1.21, it’s simpler to just do, for example: +

    As from version 1.21, it’s simpler to just do, for example: @@ -3958,23 +3963,23 @@ class="cmtt-10">font:

    \glssetcategoryattribute{general}{textformat}{textsf}
    -

    without redefining

    without redefining \glsxtrregularfont. -

    As from version 1.30, there is also a command for abbreviations that encapsulates +

    As from version 1.30, there is also a command for abbreviations that encapsulates \glsxtrgenabbrvfmt: -



    \glsxtrabbreviationfont  \glsxtrabbreviationfont{text}

    -

    +

    This also just does its argument by default. Font changes made by abbreviation styles are within ⟨text⟩. -

    The

    The \glspostlinkhook provided by the glossaries package to insert information after the link-text produced by commands like \gls and \glstext is redefined to -



    \glsxtrpostlinkhook  \glsxtrpostlinkhook

    -

    +

    This command will discard a following full stop (period) if the discardperiod attribute is set to “true” for the current entry’s category. It will also do -



    \glsxtrpostlink  \glsxtrpostlink

    -

    +

    if a full stop hasn’t be discarded and -



    \glsxtrpostlinkendsentence  \glsxtrpostlinkendsentence

    -

    +

    if a full stop has been discarded. -

    It may be that you want to check some other setting (rather than a category +

    It may be that you want to check some other setting (rather than a category attribute) to determine whether or not to discard a following full stop. In which case you can redefine: -



    \glsxtrifcustomdiscardperiod  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨false}

    -

    +

    You can access the field’s label using \glslabel. This command should do ⟨true⟩ if the @@ -4036,9 +4041,9 @@ definition is simply:

    \newcommand*{\glsxtrifcustomdiscardperiod}[2]{#2}
    -

    which means that no additional checks are performed. (Only the recognised category +

    which means that no additional checks are performed. (Only the recognised category attributes will be checked.) -

    Avoid the use of

    Avoid the use of \gls-like and \glstext-like commands within the post-link hook as they will cause interference. Consider using commands like @@ -4050,8 +4055,8 @@ href="#sec:nested">§2.7 Nested Links) instead.
    -

    -

    By default

    +

    By default \glsxtrpostlink just does \glsxtrpostlinkcategorygeneral category, \glsxtrpostlinkgeneral if it has been defined.) -

    You can define the post-link hook command using

    You can define the post-link hook command using \newcommand, for example: @@ -4075,8 +4080,8 @@ example:  
     \glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse  
    }

    -

    or, as from v1.31, you can use -


    or, as from v1.31, you can use +


    \glsdefpostlink  category}{definition}

    -

    +

    This is simply a shortcut for:

    definition}
    Note that it doesn’t check if the command has already been defined. -

    The sentence-ending hook is slightly more complicated. If the command +

    The sentence-ending hook is slightly more complicated. If the command \glsxtrpostlinkcategory

    There are some convenient commands you might want to use when customizing +

    There are some convenient commands you might want to use when customizing the post-link-text category hooks: -



    \glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse  \glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse

    -

    +

    This will add the description in parentheses on first use. -

    For example, suppose you want to append the description in parentheses on

    For example, suppose you want to append the description in parentheses on first use for entries in the symbolsymbol  \glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse  
    }

    -

    -


    +


    \glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolOnFirstUse  \glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolOnFirstUse

    -

    +

    This will append the symbol (if defined) in parentheses on first use. (Does nothing if the symbol hasn’t been set.) -



    \glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolDescOnFirstUse  \glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolDescOnFirstUse

    -

    +

    (New to v1.31.) On first use, this will append \space(⟨description⟩) if the symbol is defined otherwise it just appends \space(⟨description⟩). -

    If you want to provide your own custom format be aware that you can’t use +

    If you want to provide your own custom format be aware that you can’t use \ifglsused within the post-link-text hook as by this point the first use flag will have been unset. Instead you can use -



    \glsxtrifwasfirstuse  true}{false}

    -

    +

    This will do ⟨true⟩ if the last used entry was the first use for that entry, otherwise it @@ -4198,7 +4203,7 @@ locally set by commands like \gls, so don’t rely on it outside of the post-link-text hook. -

    Note that commands like

    Note that commands like \glsfirst and \glsxtrfull\glsxtrfull so that it fakes non-first use otherwise the inline full format would include the footnote, which is inappropriate.
    -

    -

    For example, if you want to place the description in a footnote after the

    +

    For example, if you want to place the description in a footnote after the link-text on first use for the general  \glsxtrifwasfirstuse{\footnote{\glsentrydesc{\glslabel}}}{}%  
    }

    -

    -

    The

    +

    The short-postfootnote abbreviation style uses the post-link-text hook to place the footnote after trailing punctuation characters. -

    You can set the default options used by

    You can set the default options used by \glslink, \gls etc with: -



    \GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts  \GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts{options}

    -

    +

    For example, if you mostly don’t want to index entries then you can do: @@ -4266,7 +4271,7 @@ For example, if you mostly don’t want to index entries then you can do:

    \GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts{noindex}
    -

    and then use, for example,

    and then use, for example, \gls[noindex=false]{sample} when you actually want the location added to the \glslink and \gls. -

    Note that if you don’t want

    Note that if you don’t want any indexing, just omit \makeglossaries and wrgloss\glsxtrinitwrgloss instead. -

    \GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts doesn’t affect \glsadd.
    -

    -

    If you want to change the default value of

    +

    If you want to change the default value of format, you can instead use: -



    \GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{format}

    -

    +

    This has the advantage of also working for \glsadd. For example, if you want all locations in the back matter to appear in italic (unless explicitly @@ -4310,8 +4315,8 @@ overridden): \backmatter  
    \GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{hyperit}

    -

    -

    Commands like

    +

    Commands like \gls have star (*) and plus (hyper=false and hyper=true. The glossaries-extra package provides a way to add a third modifier, if required, using -



    \GlsXtrSetAltModifier  }{options}

    -

    +

    where ⟨char⟩ is the character used as the modifier and ⟨options⟩ is the default set of options (which may be overridden). Note that ⟨char⟩ must be a single character (not a UTF-8 character, unless you are using XƎLATEX or LuaLATEX). -

    When choosing the character ⟨

    When choosing the character ⟨char⟩ take care of any changes in category code.
    -

    -

    Example: +

    +

    Example: @@ -4350,7 +4355,7 @@ class="cmti-10">char⟩ take care of any changes in category code.

    \GlsXtrSetAltModifier{!}{noindex}
    -

    This means that

    This means that \gls!{sample} will be equivalent to \gls[noindex]{sample}. It’s not possible to mix modifiers. For example, if you want to do @@ -4361,17 +4366,17 @@ not possible to mix modifiers. For example, if you want to do

    \gls[noindex,hyper=false]{sample}
    -

    you can use

    you can use \gls*[noindex]{sample} or \gls![hyper=false]{sample} but you can’t combine the * and ! modifiers. -

    Location lists displayed with \printnoidxglossary internally use -



    \glsnoidxdisplayloc  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨location}

    -

    +

    This command is provided by glossaries, but is modified by glossaries-extra to check @@ -4395,8 +4400,8 @@ class="cmtt-10">( and ) which are discarded to obtain the actual control sequence name that forms the location formatting command. -

    If the range identifiers aren’t present, this just uses -


    If the range identifiers aren’t present, this just uses +


    \glsxtrdisplaysingleloc  }{location}

    -

    +

    otherwise it uses -



    \glsxtrdisplaystartloc  }{location}

    -

    +

    for the start of a range (where the identifier has been stripped from ⟨format⟩) or -



    \glsxtrdisplayendloc  }{location}

    -

    +

    for the end of a range (where the identifier has been stripped from ⟨format⟩). -

    By default the start range command saves the format in -


    By default the start range command saves the format in +


    \glsxtrlocrangefmt  \glsxtrlocrangefmt

    -

    +

    and does
    \glsxtrdisplaysingleloc{}
    (If the format is empty, it will be replaced with glsnumberformat.) -

    The end command checks that the format matches the start of the range, +

    The end command checks that the format matches the start of the range, does -



    \glsxtrdisplayendlochook  }{location}

    -

    +

    (which does nothing by default), followed by
    \glsxtrdisplaysingleloc{\glsxtrlocrangefmt to empty. -

    This means that the list +

    This means that the list @@ -4488,7 +4493,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlocrangefmt to empty.  
    \glsnoidxdisplayloc{}{page}{textbf}{1},  
    \glsnoidxdisplayloc{}{page}{)textbf}{1}.

    -

    doesn’t display any differently from +

    doesn’t display any differently from @@ -4498,29 +4503,29 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlocrangefmt to empty.  
    \glsnoidxdisplayloc{}{page}{textbf}{1},  
    \glsnoidxdisplayloc{}{page}{textbf}{1}.

    -

    but it does make it easier to define your own custom list handler that can +

    but it does make it easier to define your own custom list handler that can accommodate the ranges. -

    +

    -

    Top

    2.4 Entry Counting Modifications

    -

    If you are using

    If you are using bib2gls you may find it more convenient to use the record +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls you may find it more convenient to use the record count commands described in §9 bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases +href="#sec:bib2gls">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases instead. -

    The

    The \glsenableentrycount command is modified to allow for the command is modified to allow for the entrycount + id="dx1-9003"> attribute. This means that you not only need to enable entry counting with \glsenableentrycount, but you also need to set the appropriate attribute (see §5 Categories). -

    For example, instead of just doing: +

    For example, instead of just doing: @@ -4536,7 +4541,7 @@ href="#sec:categories">Categories).

    \glsenableentrycount
    -

    you now need to do: +

    you now need to do: @@ -4545,23 +4550,23 @@ href="#sec:categories">Categories). \glsenableentrycount  
    \glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{entrycount}{1}

    -

    This will enable the entry counting for entries in the

    This will enable the entry counting for entries in the abbreviation category, but any + id="dx1-9004"> category, but any entries assigned to other categories will be unchanged. -

    Further information about entry counting, including the new per-unit feature, is +

    Further information about entry counting, including the new per-unit feature, is described in §6.1 Entry Counting (First Use Flag). -

    +

    -

    Top

    2.5 First Use Flag

    -

    The

    The glossaries package provides -



    \ifglsused{true}{false}

    -

    +

    to determine whether or not an entry has been used. This requires the entry to have been defined. If the entry is undefined, then the underlying boolean variable doesn’t exist and so is neither true nor false. This command will produce an error with the @@ -4590,7 +4595,7 @@ class="cmti-10">true⟩ nor ⟨false⟩ will be performed if ⟨label⟩ doesn’t exist. -

    The

    The record option automatically implements =warnbib2gls. In this case, you may prefer +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls. In this case, you may prefer to use: -



    \GlsXtrIfUnusedOrUndefined  \GlsXtrIfUnusedOrUndefined{label}{} class="cmtt-10">{false}

    -

    +

    (new to v1.34) which does ⟨true⟩ if the entry given by ⟨label⟩ is undefined or if @@ -4626,33 +4630,33 @@ class="cmtt-10">\ifglsused nor \GlsXtrIfUnusedOrUndefined should be used in the post-link hook as the first use flag will have already been unset before the hook is performed. (Instead, \glsxtrifwasfirstuse should be used, see should be used, see §2.3 Entry Display Style Modifications.) -

    There are two new commands provided with version 1.31+: -


    There are two new commands provided with version 1.31+: +


    \glslocalreseteach  \glslocalreseteach{list}

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslocalunseteach  \glslocalunseteach{list}

    -

    +

    These behave like \glslocalreset and \glslocalunset but the argument is a @@ -4660,7 +4664,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glslocalunset but the argument is a comma-separated list of labels. -

    The internal command used by

    The internal command used by \glsunset is modified first to allow for the changing in entry counting, described above, but also to allow for buffering pending unsets when commands like \gls are used in a context where changing a boolean variable can cause things to go wrong. One example of this is using \gls in one of the commands provided with the package. For example: + id="dx1-10012">package. For example: @@ -4676,7 +4680,7 @@ the commands provided with the \ul{Some text about \gls{html}.}

    -

    This causes the confusing error: +

    This causes the confusing error: @@ -4684,7 +4688,7 @@ the commands provided with the Glossary entry `{html}' has not been defined.

    -

    The simplest workaround is to put

    The simplest workaround is to put \gls{html} inside the argument of \mbox. For example: @@ -4695,7 +4699,7 @@ example:

    \ul{Some text about \mbox{\gls{html}}.}
    -

    This can work provided it’s not the first use of this entry. It if is, then unsetting the +

    This can work provided it’s not the first use of this entry. It if is, then unsetting the first use flag causes a problem and results in the error: @@ -4704,17 +4708,17 @@ first use flag causes a problem and results in the error:

    ! Package soul Error: Reconstruction failed.
    -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package provides a way of temporarily switching off \glsunset so that it just makes a note of the entry’s label but doesn’t actually perform the change: -



    \GlsXtrStartUnsetBuffering  \GlsXtrStartUnsetBuffering

    -

    +

    The unstarred version doesn’t check for duplicates, so the internal list may end up with multiple occurrences of the same label. The starred version only adds a label to the internal list if it’s not already in it. Note that this @@ -4722,14 +4726,14 @@ buffering only applies to the global \glsunset and does not affect the local \glslocalunset. -

    Later you can restore

    Later you can restore \glsunset and unset all buffered labels using: -



    \GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering  \GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering

    -

    +

    The starred form \GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering* uses \glslocalunset instead. For @@ -4751,33 +4755,33 @@ example:  
    Next use: \gls{html}.  
    \end{document}

    -

    Before you stop the unset buffering, you can iterate over the current buffer +

    Before you stop the unset buffering, you can iterate over the current buffer using -



    \GlsXtrForUnsetBufferedList  \GlsXtrForUnsetBufferedList{cs}

    -

    +

    where ⟨cs⟩ is a control sequence that takes a single argument (which is the entry label). This is best used with the starred version \GlsXtrStartUnsetBuffering* to avoid duplicates. -

    Note that since the change in the first use flag now doesn’t occur until +

    Note that since the change in the first use flag now doesn’t occur until \GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering, multiple references of the same term within the buffering zone will always be treated as first use (if the term wasn’t used before the buffering started).
    -

    -

    There can still be a problem here as content within

    +

    There can still be a problem here as content within \mbox can’t break across a line so you may end up with an overfull line or excessive white space within the paragraph. -

    An alternative is to use

    An alternative is to use \protect: @@ -4788,7 +4792,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\protect:  
    \ul{Some text about \protect\gls{html}.}  
    \GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering

    -

    but the formatting (underlining in this example) won’t be applied. Another +

    but the formatting (underlining in this example) won’t be applied. Another possibility is: @@ -4811,31 +4815,31 @@ possibility is:  
    Next use: \gls{html}.  
    \end{document}

    -

    This moves

    This moves \gls outside of \ul and uses textformat to locally change the formatting + id="dx1-10016"> to locally change the formatting command used by \gls (which is normally given by \glstextformat or the textformat attribute) to a custom command attribute) to a custom command \gul, which locally changes the regular font and the default abbreviation font to use \ul. It then uses -



    \GlsXtrExpandedFmt  \GlsXtrExpandedFmt{cs}{text}

    -

    +

    which (protected) fully expands ⟨text⟩ before applying ⟨cs⟩, which must be a control @@ -4847,12 +4851,12 @@ something that \ul can’t deal with. For example, if an abbreviation style is used that contains complex formatting or if the field value contains problematic content. -

    +

    -

    Top

    2.6 Plurals

    -

    Some languages, such as English, have a general rule that plurals are formed from +

    Some languages, such as English, have a general rule that plurals are formed from the singular with a suffix appended. This isn’t an absolute rule. There are plenty of exceptions (for example, geese, children, churches, elves, fairies, sheep). The

    To make life easier for languages where the majority of plurals can simply be +

    To make life easier for languages where the majority of plurals can simply be formed by appending a suffix to the singular, the glossaries package lets the plural supplied as well, and you only need to use it for the exceptions. -

    For languages that don’t have this general rule, the

    For languages that don’t have this general rule, the plural field will always need to be supplied, where needed. -

    There are other plural fields, such as

    There are other plural fields, such as firstplural, longpluralshortplural

    If these fields are omitted, the

    If these fields are omitted, the glossaries package follows these rules:

      @@ -4957,7 +4961,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\acrpluralsuffixshort field.
    -

    This

    This last case is changed with glossaries-extra. With this extension package, the \abbrvpluralsuffix is redefined. In most cases its redefined to use -



    \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix  \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix

    -

    +

    which defaults to just \glspluralsuffix. Some of the abbreviation styles have their own command for the plural suffix, such as

    If you require a mixture (for example, in a multilingual document), there are two +

    If you require a mixture (for example, in a multilingual document), there are two attributes that affect the short plural suffix formation. The first is aposplural '\abbrvpluralsuffix

    -

    That is, an apostrophe followed by

    That is, an apostrophe followed by \abbrvpluralsuffix is appended. The second attribute is shortpluralshort. -

    +

    -

    Top

    2.7 Nested Links

    -

    Complications arise when you use

    Complications arise when you use \gls in the value of the name

    Things can go wrong if we try the following with the

    Things can go wrong if we try the following with the glossaries package: @@ -5046,8 +5050,8 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries package:  
    \newacronym{html}{HTML}{Hypertext Markup Language}  
    \newacronym{shtml}{S\gls{html}}{\gls{ssi} enabled \gls{html}}

    -

    -

    The main problems are: +

    +

    The main problems are:

    1. first use if the long form is displayed before the shor
      \gls{\uppercase ssi} enabled \gls{html}
      -

      which just doesn’t work. Grouping the

      which just doesn’t work. Grouping the \gls{ssi} doesn’t work either as this will effectively try to do @@ -5076,7 +5080,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\gls{ssi} doesn’t work either as this

      \uppercase{\gls{ssi}} enabled \gls{html}
      -

      This will upper case the label

      This will upper case the label ssi so the entry won’t be recognised. This problem will also occur if you use the all capitals version, such as shtml. For example:

      This section discusses \gls{ssi}, \gls{html} and \gls{shtml}.
      -

      This produces: +

      This produces:

      -

      This section discusses server side includes (SSI), hypertext +

      This section discusses server side includes (SSI), hypertext markup language (HTML) and SSI enabled HTML (SHTML).

      -

      So the

      So the first use of the shtml entry produces “SSI enabled HTML (SHTML)”. -

      Now let’s suppose the

      Now let’s suppose the html entry is used before the shtml but the ssi entry is @@ -5139,17 +5143,17 @@ class="cmtt-10">shtml entry, for example: The sample files are either \gls{html} or \gls{shtml}, but let's  
      first discuss \gls{ssi}.

    -

    This produces: +

    This produces:

    -

    The sample files are either hypertext markup language (HTML) +

    The sample files are either hypertext markup language (HTML) or server side includes (SSI) enabled HTML (SHTML), but let’s first discuss SSI.

    -

    So the

    So the first use of the shtml entry now produces “server side includes (SSI) enabled HTML (SHTML)”, which looks a bit strange. -

    Now let’s suppose the

    Now let’s suppose the shtml entry is used before (or without) the other two entries: @@ -5159,17 +5163,17 @@ class="cmtt-10">shtml entry is used before (or without) the other two

    This article is an introduction to \gls{shtml}.
    -

    This produces: +

    This produces:

    -

    This article is an introduction to server side includes (SSI) +

    This article is an introduction to server side includes (SSI) enabled hypertext markup language (HTML) (SHTML).

    -

    So the

    So the first use of the shtml entry now produces “server side includes (SSI) enabled hypertext markup language (HTML) (SHTML)”, which is even more strange. -

    This is all aggravated by setting the style using the

    This is all aggravated by setting the style using the glossaries package’s \setacronymstyle. For example: @@ -5180,7 +5184,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\setacronymstyle. For example:

    \setacronymstyle{long-short}
    -

    as this references the label through the use of

    as this references the label through the use of \glslabel when displaying the long and short forms, but this value changes with each use of \gls, so @@ -5192,7 +5196,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glslabel has been changed to html by \gls{html}. -

    Another oddity occurs if you reset the

    Another oddity occurs if you reset the html entry between uses of the shtml entry. For example: @@ -5203,10 +5207,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">shtml

    \gls{shtml} ... \glsreset{html}\gls{shtml}
    -

    The next use of

    The next use of shtml produces “Shypertext markup language (HTML)”, which is downright weird. -

    Even without this, the short form has nested formatting commands, which +

    Even without this, the short form has nested formatting commands, which amount to \acronymfont{S\acronymfont{HTML}}. This may not be a problem for some styles, but if you use one of the “sm” styles (that use hyperref -

    For these reasons it’s better to use the simple expandable commands +

    For these reasons it’s better to use the simple expandable commands like \glsentrytext or  [description={\acrshort{ssi} enabled \acrshort{html}}]  
     {shtml}{SHTML}{SSI enabled HTML}

    -

    with

    with glossaries or: @@ -5267,7 +5271,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries or:  
     [description={\glsxtrshort{ssi} enabled \glsxtrshort{html}}]  
     {shtml}{SHTML}{SSI enabled HTML}

    -

    with

    with glossaries-extra. This fixes all the above listed problems (as long as you don’t use \glsdescfirst use issue, but it doesn’t fix any of the other problems listed above. -

    If it’s simply that you want to use the abbreviation font, you can use +

    If it’s simply that you want to use the abbreviation font, you can use \glsabbrvfont: @@ -5292,10 +5296,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont:  
    \newabbreviation{shtml}{shtml}{\glsabbrvfont{ssi} enabled  
    \glsabbrvfont{html}}

    -

    This will pick up the font style setting of the outer entry (shtml, in the above case). +

    This will pick up the font style setting of the outer entry (shtml, in the above case). This isn’t a problem in the above example as all the abbreviations use the same style. -

    However if you’re really determined to use

    However if you’re really determined to use \gls in a field that may be included within some \gls{ssi} enabled \gls{html}

    -

    is treated as +

    is treated as @@ -5328,7 +5332,7 @@ form {\glstext[hyper=false,noindex]{ssi}} enabled  
    {\glstext[hyper=false,noindex]{html}}

    -

    This overcomes problems 

    This overcomes problems 4, 5 and 6 listed above, but still doesn’t fix problems long-noshort-desc). -

    Additionally, any instance of the long form commands, such as

    Additionally, any instance of the long form commands, such as \glsxtrlong or shtml entry had instead been defined as:

    \newacronym{shtml}{SHTML}{\acrshort{ssi} enabled \acrshort{html}}
    -

    then (using the

    then (using the long-short style) the first use will be like {\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{ssi}}} enabled  
    {\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{html}}} (SHTML)

    -

    whereas if the entry is defined as: +

    whereas if the entry is defined as: @@ -5405,7 +5409,7 @@ href="#glo:firstuse">first use will be like \newabbreviation{shtml}{SHTML}{\glsxtrshort{ssi} enabled  
    \glsxtrshort{html}}

    -

    then the

    then the first use will be like: @@ -5416,7 +5420,7 @@ href="#glo:firstuse">first use will be like: {\glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{ssi}}} enabled  
    {\glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{html}}} (SHTML)

    -

    Note that the first optional argument of

    Note that the first optional argument of \acrshort or \glsxtrshort is ignored in this context. (The final optional argument will be inserted, if present.) The @@ -5427,8 +5431,8 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort. Note that \acrshort doesn’t set the abbreviation style. -

    Alternatively you can use: -


    Alternatively you can use: +


    \glsxtrp  field}{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨field⟩ is the field label and corresponds to a command in the form \gls\glstext) or in the form \glsxtrfield⟩ (e.g. \glsxtrshort). -

    There’s a shortcut command for the most common fields: -


    There’s a shortcut command for the most common fields: +


    \glsps  \glsps{label}

    -

    +

    which is equivalent to \glsxtrp{short}{label}, and -



    \glspt  \glspt{label}

    -

    +

    which is equivalent to \glsxtrp{text}{label}. -

    The

    The \glsxtrp command behaves much like the \glsfmtfield⟩ commands described @@ -5491,14 +5495,14 @@ class="cmss-10">noindex to true. If you want to change this, you can use -



    \glsxtrsetpopts  \glsxtrsetpopts{options}

    -

    +

    For example: @@ -5507,17 +5511,17 @@ For example:

    \glsxtrsetpopts{hyper=false}
    -

    will just switch off the hyperlinks but not the indexing. Be careful using +

    will just switch off the hyperlinks but not the indexing. Be careful using this command or you can end up back to the original problem of nested links. -

    The hyper link is re-enabled within glossaries. This is done through the +

    The hyper link is re-enabled within glossaries. This is done through the command: -



    \glossxtrsetpopts  \glossxtrsetpopts

    -

    +

    which by default just does @@ -5526,7 +5530,7 @@ which by default just does

    \glsxtrsetpopts{noindex}
    -

    You can redefine this if you want to adjust the setting when

    You can redefine this if you want to adjust the setting when \glsxtrp is used in the glossary. For example: @@ -5536,8 +5540,8 @@ glossary. For example:

    \renewcommand{\glossxtrsetpopts}{\glsxtrsetpopts{noindex=false}}
    -

    -

    For example, +

    +

    For example, @@ -5545,7 +5549,7 @@ glossary. For example:

    \glsxtrp{short}{ssi}
    -

    is equivalent to +

    is equivalent to @@ -5555,7 +5559,7 @@ glossary. For example:  
     \glsxtrshort[hyper=false,noindex]{ssi}[]%  
    }

    -

    in the main body of the document or +

    in the main body of the document or @@ -5565,8 +5569,8 @@ glossary. For example:  
     \glsxtrshort[noindex]{ssi}[]%  
    }

    -

    inside the glossary. (Note the post-link hook is locally disabled.) -

    If

    inside the glossary. (Note the post-link hook is locally disabled.) +

    If \glsxtrp{short}{ssi} occurs in a sectioning mark, it’s equivalent to @@ -5576,19 +5580,19 @@ to

    {\glsxtrheadshort{ssi}}
    -

    (which recognises the

    (which recognises the headuc attribute.) -

    If

    If hyperref has been loaded, then the bookmark will use \glsentryfield⟩ (\glsentryshort{ssi} in the above example). -

    There are similar commands -


    There are similar commands +


    \Glsxtrp  field}{label}

    -

    +

    for first letter upper case and -



    \GLSxtrp  field}{label}

    -

    +

    for all upper case. -

    If you use any of the case-changing commands, such as

    If you use any of the case-changing commands, such as \Gls or \Glstext\gls\glstext, in the definition of entries for any of the fields that may be used by those case-changing commands.
    -

    -

    You can, with care, protect against issue 

    +

    You can, with care, protect against issue 1 by inserting an empty group at the start if the long form starts with a command that breaks the first letter uppercasing commands like \Gls, but you still won’t be able to use the all caps commands, such as \GLS. -

    If you

    If you really need nested commands, the safest method is @@ -5640,8 +5644,8 @@ class="cmti-10">really need nested commands, the safest method is \newabbreviation{shtml}{shtml}{{}\glsxtrp{short}{ssi} enabled  
    \glsxtrp{short}{html}}

    -

    but be aware that it may have some unexpected results occasionally. -

    Example document: +

    but be aware that it may have some unexpected results occasionally. +

    Example document: @@ -5671,16 +5675,16 @@ class="cmti-10">really need nested commands, the safest method is  
    \printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    -

    +

    +

    -

    Top

    2.8 Acronym Style Modifications

    -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package provides a new way of dealing with abbreviations and redefines \newacronymglossaries-extra is do just add

    -

    before you define any entries. For example, the following document using just +

    before you define any entries. For example, the following document using just glossaries @@ -5719,7 +5723,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries  
    \printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    can be easily adapted to use

    can be easily adapted to use glossaries-extra: @@ -5736,7 +5740,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra:  
    \printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    Table 

    Table 2.1 lists the nearest equivalent glossaries-extra abbreviation styles for the predefined acronym styles provided by


    @@ -5775,34 +5779,34 @@ cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" id="TBL-2-1" />

    Old Style Name

    New Style Name

    long-sc-short

    long-short-sc

    long-sm-short

    long-short-sm

    long-sp-short

    long-short
    #1}}

    short-long

    short-long

    sc-short-long

    short-sc-long

    sm-short-long

    short-sm-long

    long-short-desc

    long-short-desc

    long-sc-short-desc

    long-short-sc-desc

    long-sm-short-desc

    long-short-sm-desc

    long-sp-short-desc

    long-short-desc
    #1}}

    short-long-desc

    short-long-desc

    sc-short-long-desc

    short-sc-long-desc

    sm-short-long-desc

    short-sm-long-desc

    dua

    long-noshort

    dua-desc

    long-noshort-desc

    footnote

    short-footnote

    footnote-sc

    short-sc-footnote

    footnote-sm

    short-sm-footnote

    footnote-desc

    short-footnote-desc

    footnote-sc-desc

    short-sc-footnote-desc

    footnote-sm-desc

    short-sm-footnote-desc

    @@ -5995,7 +5999,7 @@ class="cmss-10">short-sm-footnote-desc

    -

    The reason for introducing the new style of abbreviation commands provided by +

    The reason for introducing the new style of abbreviation commands provided by glossaries-extra is because the original acronym commands provided by glossaries are @@ -6004,15 +6008,15 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra. However, if you really want to restore the generic acronym function provided by glossaries you can use -



    \RestoreAcronyms  \RestoreAcronyms

    -

    +

    (before any use of \newacronym). -

    \RestoreAcronyms should not be used in combination with the newer glossaries-extra abbreviations. Don’t combine old and new style entries with the same @@ -6022,7 +6026,7 @@ class="cmss-10">typeglossaries acronym mechanism doesn’t work well with the newer glossaries-extra commands. -

    If you use

    -

    -

    In general, there’s rarely any need for

    +

    In general, there’s rarely any need for \RestoreAcronyms. If you have a document that uses \newacronymstyle§3.5 Defining New Abbreviation Styles for further details.) -



    \glsacspace  \glsacspace{label}

    -

    +

    The space command \glsacspace used by the long-sp-short acronym style provided by glossaries is modified so that it uses -



    \glsacspacemax  \glsacspacemax

    -

    +

    instead of the hard-coded 3em. This is a command not a length and so can be changed using \renewcommand. -

    Any of the new abbreviation styles that use

    Any of the new abbreviation styles that use \glsxtrfullsep (such as \glsacspace with

    -

    -

    The

    +

    The first use acronym font command -



    \firstacronymfont{text}

    -

    +

    is redefined to use the first use abbreviation font command \glsfirstabbrvfont. This will be reset if you use \RestoreAcronyms. -

    The subsequent use acronym font command -


    The subsequent use acronym font command +


    \acronymfont{text}

    -

    +

    is redefined to use the subsequent use abbreviation font command \glsabbrvfont. This will be reset if you use \RestoreAcronyms.

    -

    Top

    2.9 glossary-bookindex package

    -

    As from v1.21,

    As from v1.21, glossaries-extra has a new supplementary package glossary-bookindex @@ -6139,7 +6143,7 @@ style:  
    \usepackage{glossary-bookindex}  
    \setglossarystyle{bookindex}

    -

    or use both the

    or use both the stylemods and style \usepackage[stylemods=bookindex,style=bookindex]{glossaries-extra}

    -

    The

    The bookindex style only supports a maximum hierarchical level of 2 (top-level, level 1 and level 2). It’s primarily designed for use with bib2gls. It may be used +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls. It may be used with other indexing options, but some features may not be present and UTF-8 characters may cause a problem with non-Unicode engines in letter group headings or PDF bookmarks. (bib2gls uses numeric identifies by default to + id="dx1-14008">bib2gls uses numeric identifies by default to avoid these problems. If numbers show up in the group headings instead of the appropriate characters, check that you have used the record package + id="dx1-14009"> package option.) -

    The number of columns is given by -


    The number of columns is given by +


    \glsxtrbookindexcols  \glsxtrbookindexcols

    -

    +

    which defaults to 2. -

    This style uses the

    This style uses the multicols environment. If the command -


    environment. If the command +


    \glsxtrbookindexcolspread  \glsxtrbookindexcolspread

    -

    +

    isn’t empty then it’s supplied as the optional argument following \begin{multicols} {n}. You can switch from multicols to to multicols* by redefining -


    by redefining +


    \glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv  \glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv

    -

    +

    For example @@ -6216,16 +6218,16 @@ For example

    \renewcommand{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}{multicols*}
    -

    -

    Each top-level entry is displayed using -


    +

    Each top-level entry is displayed using +


    \glsxtrbookindexname  \glsxtrbookindexname{label}

    -

    +

    where the entry is identified by ⟨label⟩. This just does \glossentryname{ \ifglshassymbol{#1}{\space (\glossentrysymbol{#1})}{}%  
    }

    -

    or if you want the description (if set): +

    or if you want the description (if set): @@ -6253,35 +6255,35 @@ default. For example, if you want the symbol to be included:  
     \ifglshasdesc{#1}{\space \glossentrydesc{#1}\glspostdescription}{}%  
    }

    -

    (which picks up the post-description hook). -

    Alternatively you can use the

    (which picks up the post-description hook). +

    Alternatively you can use the \glsxtrpostnamecategory⟩ hook to append information after the name according to the entry’s category. -

    Sub-entries are displayed using -


    Sub-entries are displayed using +


    \glsxtrbookindexsubname  \glsxtrbookindexsubname{label}

    -

    +

    which just defaults to \glsxtrbookindexname{label}. -

    The separator used before the location list for top-level entries is given +

    The separator used before the location list for top-level entries is given by -



    \glsxtrbookindexprelocation  \glsxtrbookindexprelocation{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. This checks if the location field has been set. If it @@ -6293,87 +6295,117 @@ has, it does

    ,\glsxtrprelocation
    -

    otherwise it just does

    otherwise it just does \glsxtrprelocation (which defaults to \space). If you’re not using bib2gls, the bib2gls, the location field won’t be set. -

    The separator used before the location list for sub-entries is given by -


    field won’t be set. +

    The separator used before the location list for sub-entries is given by +


    \glsxtrbookindexsubprelocation  \glsxtrbookindexsubprelocation{label}

    -

    +

    which defaults to \glsxtrbookindexprelocation{label}. -

    The separator used between a top-level parent and child entry is given +

    The actual location list is encapsulated with: +


    \glsxtrbookindexlocation  \glsxtrbookindexlocation{label}{location +list}

    +

    +for top-level entries and +


    \glsxtrbookindexsublocation  \glsxtrbookindexsublocation{label} +{location list}

    +

    +for sub-entries. These both just do ⟨location list⟩ by default. +

    The separator used between a top-level parent and child entry is given by -



    \glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep  \glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep

    -

    +

    This defaults to \nopagebreak. -

    The separator used between a sub-level parent and child entry is given +

    The separator used between a sub-level parent and child entry is given by -



    \glsxtrbookindexparentsubchildsep  \glsxtrbookindexparentsubchildsep

    -

    +

    This defaults to \glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep. -

    The separator between top-level entries is given by -


    The separator between top-level entries is given by +


    \glsxtrbookindexbetween  \glsxtrbookindexbetween{label1}{label2}

    -

    +

    This comes after the entry given by ⟨label1⟩, if the entry has no children, or after the last descendent otherwise, so it always comes immediately before the entry given by ⟨label2⟩ unless the entry occurs at the start of a group. This does nothing by default. -

    The separator between two level 1 entries is given by -


    The separator between two level 1 entries is given by +


    \glsxtrbookindexsubbetween  \glsxtrbookindexsubbetween{label1}{label2}

    -

    -

    The separator between two level 2 entries is given by -


    +

    The separator between two level 2 entries is given by +


    \glsxtrbookindexsubsubbetween  \glsxtrbookindexsubsubbetween{label1} @@ -6381,50 +6413,46 @@ class="cmtt-10">} class="cmtt-10">{⟨label2}

    -

    +

    At the end of each letter group, the following hooks are done in order: -



    \glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup  \glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup {sub-sub-label}

    - - - -

    -


    +


    \glsxtrbookindexsubatendgroup  \glsxtrbookindexsubatendgroup{sub-label}

    -

    -


    +


    \glsxtrbookindexatendgroup  \glsxtrbookindexatendgroup{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨sub-sub-label⟩ is the label of the last level 2 entry, ⟨sub-label⟩ is the label of the last level 1 entry and ⟨label⟩ is the label of the last level 0 entry. -

    For example, the resource option

    For example, the resource option seealso=omit instructs bib2gls to omit the +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls to omit the seealso cross-reference from the location list. (The see cross-reference will still be @@ -6457,7 +6485,7 @@ appended after the child entries using:  
      \glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup{#1}%  
    }

    -

    This uses

    This uses \glstreesubitem and \glstreesubsubitem to indent the cross-reference according to the next level down, so the cross-reference for a top-level entry is aligned @@ -6465,45 +6493,44 @@ with the sub-entries, and a level 1 entry has its cross-reference aligned sub-sub-entries. In the event that a level 2 entry has a cross-reference, this is indented a bit further (but it won’t be aligned with any deeper level as the bookindex + id="dx1-14036"> style only supports a maximum of two sub-levels). -

    The

    The bookindex style uses group headings. (If you use style uses group headings. (If you use bib2gls remember to invoke +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls remember to invoke it with the --group or -g switch.) The heading will use -



    \glsxtrbookindexbookmark  \glsxtrbookindexbookmark{group title}{name}

    -

    +

    If \pdfbookmark has been defined, this will use that command to bookmark the group title. If section=chapter is set (default if chapters are defined) then this + id="dx1-14040"> is set (default if chapters are defined) then this uses level 1 otherwise it uses level 2. You can redefine this command if this isn’t appropriate. If \pdfbookmark hasn’t been defined, this command does nothin. -

    The group heading is formatted according to -


    The group heading is formatted according to +


    \glsxtrbookindexformatheader  \glsxtrbookindexformatheader{group title} @@ -6511,7 +6538,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">} -

    +

    which is defined as @@ -6522,70 +6549,70 @@ which is defined as  
      \par{\centering\glstreegroupheaderfmt{#1}\par}%  
    }

    -

    where

    where \glstreegroupheaderfmt is provided by the glossary-tree package, which is + id="dx1-14042"> package, which is automatically loaded. Note that the entry names aren’t encapsulated with \glstreenamefmt. -

    The

    The glossary-bookindex package provides some supplementary commands that + id="dx1-14043"> package provides some supplementary commands that aren’t used by default, but may be used when adjusting the style. These commands should only be used within one of the \print…glossary commands. (That is, they should only be used in glossary styles.) -



    \glsxtrbookindexmarkentry  \glsxtrbookindexmarkentry{label}

    -

    +

    This writes information to the .aux file that can be read on the next run to obtain the first and last entry on each page of the glossary. -

    You can display the first entry associated with the current page using: -


    You can display the first entry associated with the current page using: +


    \glsxtrbookindexfirstmark  \glsxtrbookindexfirstmark

    -

    +

    and the last entry associated with the current page using: -



    \glsxtrbookindexlastmark  \glsxtrbookindexlastmark

    -

    +

    These do nothing if there are no entries marked on the current page (or if the document build isn’t up to date). -

    The entry is formatted using: -


    The entry is formatted using: +


    \glsxtrbookindexfirstmarkfmt  \glsxtrbookindexfirstmarkfmt{label}

    -

    +

    for the first instance and -



    \glsxtrbookindexlastmarkfmt  \glsxtrbookindexlastmarkfmt{label}

    -

    +

    for the last. -

    These commands are designed for use in page headers or footers where the page +

    These commands are designed for use in page headers or footers where the page number is stable. For example, \glsxtrbookindexname can be redefined to mark the current entry: @@ -6599,7 +6626,7 @@ current entry:  
      \glossentryname{#1}%  
    }

    -

    If you only want to mark the top-level entries, remember to redefine +

    If you only want to mark the top-level entries, remember to redefine \glsxtrbookindexsubname as it defaults to \glsxtrbookindexname: @@ -6612,10 +6639,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexname:  
      \glossentryname{#1}%  
    }

    -

    -

    Then if you’re using

    +

    Then if you’re using fancyhdr you can set the page style to show the first and last + id="dx1-14049"> you can set the page style to show the first and last entry for the current page with: @@ -6628,14 +6655,14 @@ entry for the current page with:  
      \cfoot{}%  
      \rfoot{\glsxtrbookindexlastmark}%

    -

    -

    +

    +

    -

    Top

    2.10 glossary-longextra package

    -

    As from version 1.37, the

    As from version 1.37, the glossaries-extra package comes with the supplementary package glossary-longextratabular instead. In order to do this you must use -



    \GlsLongExtraUseTabulartrue  \GlsLongExtraUseTabulartrue

    -

    +

    before the style is set. For example: @@ -6669,7 +6696,7 @@ class="cmti-10">before the style is set. For example: \GlsLongExtraUseTabulartrue  
    \setglossarystyle{long-name-desc}

    -

    or +

    or @@ -6678,62 +6705,62 @@ class="cmti-10">before the style is set. For example: \GlsLongExtraUseTabulartrue  
    \printunsrtglossary[style={long-name-desc}]

    -

    If you use this setting, you can change the default vertical alignment with: -


    If you use this setting, you can change the default vertical alignment with: +


    \glslongextraTabularVAlign  \glslongextraTabularVAlign

    -

    +

    The default definition is c. -

    The column titles are formatted according to: -


    The column titles are formatted according to: +


    \glslongextraHeaderFmt  \glslongextraHeaderFmt{text}

    -

    +

    which simply does \textbf{text} by default. -

    The name column has the title given by

    The name column has the title given by \entryname and the column alignment is given by: -



    \glslongextraNameAlign  \glslongextraNameAlign

    -

    +

    which expands to l (left) by default. -

    The symbol column (where applicable) has the title given by

    The symbol column (where applicable) has the title given by \symbolname and the column alignment is given by: -



    \glslongextraSymbolAlign  \glslongextraSymbolAlign

    -

    +

    which expands to c (centred) by default. -

    The location list column (where applicable) has the title given by

    The location list column (where applicable) has the title given by \pagelistname and the column alignment is given by: -



    \glslongextraLocationAlign  \glslongextraLocationAlign

    -

    +

    which expands to @@ -6742,22 +6769,22 @@ which expands to

    >{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}
    -

    by default. (Ragged-right paragraph,

    by default. (Ragged-right paragraph, \glspagelistwidth is defined in glossary-long, which is automatically loaded.) -

    The description column has the title given by

    The description column has the title given by \descriptionname and the column alignment is given by: -



    \glslongextraDescAlign  \glslongextraDescAlign

    -

    +

    which expands to @@ -6766,24 +6793,24 @@ which expands to

    >{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}
    -

    by default. (Ragged-right paragraph,

    by default. (Ragged-right paragraph, \glsdescwidth is defined in glossary-long, which is automatically loaded.) -

    Unlike the long styles provided by the base

    Unlike the long styles provided by the base glossaries package, these new styles try to determine the value of \glsdescwidth at the start of the glossary according to the number of columns provided by the style. The calculations are performed by the following commands: -



    \glslongextraSetDescWidth  \glslongextraSetDescWidth

    -

    +

    This is used by the styles that have a name and description column. The value of \glsdescwidth is computed as: @@ -6792,7 +6819,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth is computed as: \glsdescwidth = \linewidth- 4\tabcolsep- W
 -

    where

    where W is a guess at the width of the name column. This is first set to the width of the name column header:

    @@ -6806,23 +6833,23 @@ class="cmsy-10">}
    If any names in that column are larger than this, then you need to specify the widest name using: -



    \glslongextraSetWidest  \glslongextraSetWidest{widest name}

    -

    +

    or -



    \glslongextraUpdateWidest  \glslongextraUpdateWidest{text}

    -

    +

    These work like the analogous commands \glssetwidest and \glsupdatewidest @@ -6835,28 +6862,25 @@ class="cmss-10">alttreebib2gls’s bib2gls’s set-widest option. If you have the entry counter enabled, you will need to include this with the name for the extra material to be taken into account. -

    The name isn’t shown for child entries by default, but if you change this and you +

    The name isn’t shown for child entries by default, but if you change this and you want to use bib2gls’s bib2gls’s set-widest option (for bib2gls v1.8+) then you need to + id="dx1-15030">bib2gls v1.8+) then you need to redefine: -



    \glslongextraUpdateWidestChild  \glslongextraUpdateWidestChild{level} @@ -6864,7 +6888,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">} class="cmtt-10">{⟨text}

    -

    +

    This does nothing by default, but if you are including the child names then you need to redefine this command: @@ -6876,8 +6900,8 @@ to redefine this command:  
     \glslongextraUpdateWidest{#2}%  
    }

    -

    -

    If you prefer to set an explicit width for the description column then you need to +

    +

    If you prefer to set an explicit width for the description column then you need to redefine \glslongextraSetDescWidth. For example: @@ -6889,16 +6913,16 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSetDescWidth. For example:  
      \setlength{\glsdescwidth}{0.6\linewidth}%  
    }

    -

    -

    The styles that have a name, symbol and description,

    +

    The styles that have a name, symbol and description, \glsdescwidth is set with: -



    \glslongextraSymSetDescWidth  \glslongextraSymSetDescWidth

    -

    +

    This first uses \glslongextraSetDescWidth and then subtracts 2\tabcolsep and @@ -6916,7 +6940,7 @@ you can redefine this command. For example:  
      \addtolength{\glsdescwidth}{-3cm}%  
    }

    -

    or +

    or @@ -6926,16 +6950,16 @@ you can redefine this command. For example:  
      \setlength{\glsdescwidth}{.5\linewidth}%  
    }

    -

    -

    For the styles that have a name, description and location column,

    +

    For the styles that have a name, description and location column, \glsdescwidth is set using: -



    \glslongextraLocSetDescWidth  \glslongextraLocSetDescWidth

    -

    +

    This uses \glslongextraSetDescWidth and then subtracts 2\tabcolsep and @@ -6945,16 +6969,16 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth. You can redefine this command to set both \glsdescwidth and \glspagelistwidth if appropriate. -

    For the styles that have a name, description, symbol and location column, +

    For the styles that have a name, description, symbol and location column, \glsdescwidth is set using: -



    \glslongextraSymLocSetDescWidth  \glslongextraSymLocSetDescWidth

    -

    +

    This uses \glslongextraSymSetDescWidth and then subtracts 2\tabcolsep and @@ -6962,15 +6986,15 @@ class="cmtt-10">\tabcolsep and class="cmtt-10">\glspagelistwidth from \glsdescwidth. Again, you can redefine this command to explicitly set both lengths. -

    In all cases, the top-level name is formatted according to: -


    In all cases, the top-level name is formatted according to: +


    \glslongextraNameFmt  \glslongextraNameFmt{label}

    -

    +

    This does

    }
    which includes the entry counter (if enabled), the target and the post-name link. -

    The top-level description is formatted according to: -


    The top-level description is formatted according to: +


    \glslongextraDescFmt  \glslongextraDescFmt{label}

    -

    +

    This does \glossentrydesc{label} followed by the post-description hook. -

    The styles that have a symbol column format the symbol using: -


    The styles that have a symbol column format the symbol using: +


    \glslongextraSymbolFmt  \glslongextraSymbolFmt{label}

    -

    +

    This just does \glossentrysymbol{label}. -

    The styles that have a location list column format the list using: -


    The styles that have a location list column format the list using: +


    \glslongextraLocationFmt  \glslongextraLocationFmt{label}{} -

    +

    This just does ⟨locations⟩ and ignores the label. -

    The child entries have their name formatted according to: -


    The child entries have their name formatted according to: +


    \glslongextraSubNameFmt  \glslongextraSubNameFmt{level}{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨level⟩ is the hierarchical level. This defaults to:

    @@ -7057,43 +7081,43 @@ class="cmsy-10">}
    This includes the sub-entry counter (if enabled) and the target but doesn’t show the name. The child description is formatted according to: -



    \glslongextraSubDescFmt  \glslongextraSubDescFmt{level}{label}

    -

    +

    which defaults to just \glslongextraDescFmt{label} -

    The child symbol is formatted (where appropriate) according to: -


    The child symbol is formatted (where appropriate) according to: +


    \glslongextraSubSymbolFmt  \glslongextraSubSymbolFmt{level}{label}

    -

    +

    This just does \glslongextraSymbolFmt{label} by default. -

    The styles that have a location list column format the list for child entries +

    The styles that have a location list column format the list for child entries using: -



    \glslongextraLocationFmt  \glslongextraSubLocationFmtlevel{} class="cmtt-10">{locations}

    -

    +

    This just does ⟨locations⟩ and ignores the level and label. -

    The letter group headings are formatted according to: -


    The letter group headings are formatted according to: +


    \glslongextraGroupHeading  \glslongextraGroupHeading{n}{label}

    -

    +

    which does nothing by default. The first argument ⟨n⟩ is the number of columns in the table. The second argument ⟨label⟩ is the group label (not the title, although they may happen to be the same). -

    This can be redefined to show the group heading. For example: +

    This can be redefined to show the group heading. For example: @@ -7136,11 +7160,11 @@ happen to be the same).  
      \noalign{\vskip\normalbaselineskip}%  
    }

    -

    This ignores the first argument and just puts the group title in the first column +

    This ignores the first argument and just puts the group title in the first column formatted according to \glslongextraHeaderFmt (to match the column header). -

    Remember that you can also adjust the styles through category attributes. The +

    Remember that you can also adjust the styles through category attributes. The name column’s title is given by \entryname, the description column’s title is given by \symbolname, as for the other long styles that have heade

    long-name-desc This is like the This is like the longragged-booktabs style but doesn’t show the + id="dx1-15045"> style but doesn’t show the location list (regardless of the nonumberlist option). The name is shown in + id="dx1-15046"> option). The name is shown in the first column and the description in the second. -

    The symbol is not displayed. The header row is produced with: -


    The symbol is not displayed. The header row is produced with: +


    \glslongextraNameDescHeader  \glslongextraNameDescHeader

    -

    +

    This essentially uses the same code as for longragged-booktabs but makes it + id="dx1-15048"> but makes it easier to adjust the header without having to define a new style. This is defined as: @@ -7179,36 +7203,36 @@ class="cmss-10">longragged-booktabs\glslongextraNameDescTabularFooter\endfoot

    -

    where: -


    where: +


    \glslongextraNameDescTabularHeader  \glslongextraNameDescTabularHeader

    -

    +

    sets up the header and -



    \glslongextraNameDescTabularFooter  \glslongextraNameDescTabularFooter

    -

    +

    sets up the footer. If you have setup the tabular version of this style then the + id="dx1-15051"> version of this style then the above two commands are used at the start and end of the tabular environment + id="dx1-15053"> environment (and \glslongextraNameDescHeader isn’t used). -

    For example, to simply remove the header and footer (for the default

    For example, to simply remove the header and footer (for the default longtable + id="dx1-15055"> version of the style): @@ -7217,7 +7241,7 @@ class="cmss-10">longtable \renewcommand{\glslongextraNameDescHeader}{}

    -

    Or to change the name alignment to centred: +

    Or to change the name alignment to centred: @@ -7225,84 +7249,84 @@ class="cmss-10">longtable \renewcommand{\glslongextraNameAlign}{c}

    -

    +

    long-name-desc-loc This is like the This is like the long-name-desc style but has a third column for + id="dx1-15058"> style but has a third column for the location list. The longtable header is given by: -


    header is given by: +


    \glslongextraNameDescLocationHeader  \glslongextraNameDescLocationHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15062"> version: -



    \glslongextraNameDescLocationTabularHeader  \glslongextraNameDescLocationTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraNameDescLocationTabularFooter  \glslongextraNameDescLocationTabularFooter

    -

    +

    long-desc-name This is like the This is like the long-name-desc style but swaps the columns. Note + id="dx1-15067"> style but swaps the columns. Note that if the entry counter is displayed it will appear at the start of the second column by default. The longtable header is formatted according + id="dx1-15068"> header is formatted according to: -



    \glslongextraDescNameHeader  \glslongextraDescNameHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15071"> version: -



    \glslongextraDescNameTabularHeader  \glslongextraDescNameTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraDescNameTabularFooter  \glslongextraDescNameTabularFooter

    -

    +

    @@ -7310,270 +7334,270 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescNameTabularFooter

    long-loc-desc-name This has three columns containing the location list, + id="dx1-15075"> This has three columns containing the location list, description and name. The longtable header is formatted according + id="dx1-15076"> header is formatted according to: -



    \glslongextraLocationDescNameHeader  \glslongextraLocationDescNameHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15079"> version: -



    \glslongextraLocationDescNameTabularHeader  \glslongextraLocationDescNameTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraLocationDescNameTabularFooter  \glslongextraLocationDescNameTabularFooter

    -

    +

    long-name-desc-sym This is has three columns, with the name in the first, the + id="dx1-15083"> This is has three columns, with the name in the first, the description in the second and the symbol in the third. -

    The

    The longtable header row is produced with: -


    header row is produced with: +


    \glslongextraNameDescSymHeader  \glslongextraNameDescSymHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15087"> version: -



    \glslongextraNameDescSymTabularHeader  \glslongextraNameDescSymTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraNameDescSymTabularFooter  \glslongextraNameDescSymTabularFooter

    -

    +

    long-name-desc-sym-loc This is has four columns, with the name in the first, the + id="dx1-15091"> This is has four columns, with the name in the first, the description in the second, the symbol in the third and the location list in the fourth. -

    The

    The longtable header row is produced with: + id="dx1-15092"> header row is produced with: -



    \glslongextraNameDescSymLocationHeader  \glslongextraNameDescSymLocationHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15095"> version: -



    \glslongextraNameDescSymLocationTabularHeader  + id="dx1-15097"> \glslongextraNameDescSymLocationTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraNameDescSymLocationTabularFooter  + id="dx1-15098"> \glslongextraNameDescSymLocationTabularFooter

    -

    +

    long-name-sym-desc This is like the This is like the long-name-desc-sym but the second and third + id="dx1-15100"> but the second and third column are swapped. The longtable header row is given by: -


    header row is given by: +


    \glslongextraNameSymDescHeader  \glslongextraNameSymDescHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15104"> version: -



    \glslongextraNameSymDescTabularHeader  \glslongextraNameSymDescTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraNameSymDescTabularFooter  \glslongextraNameSymDescTabularFooter

    -

    +

    long-name-sym-desc-loc This is like the This is like the long-name-desc-sym-loc but the second and + id="dx1-15109"> but the second and third column are swapped. The longtable header row is given by: -


    header row is given by: +


    \glslongextraNameSymDescLocationHeader  \glslongextraNameSymDescLocationHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15113"> version: -



    \glslongextraNameSymDescLocationTabularHeader  + id="dx1-15115"> \glslongextraNameSymDescLocationTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraNameSymDescLocationTabularFooter  + id="dx1-15116"> \glslongextraNameSymDescLocationTabularFooter

    -

    +

    long-sym-desc-name This has the symbol in the first column, the description in the + id="dx1-15117"> This has the symbol in the first column, the description in the second and the name in the third. The longtable header row is given + id="dx1-15118"> header row is given by: -



    \glslongextraSymDescNameHeader  \glslongextraSymDescNameHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15121"> version: -



    \glslongextraSymDescNameTabularHeader  \glslongextraSymDescNameTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraSymDescNameTabularFooter  \glslongextraSymDescNameTabularFooter

    -

    +

    long-loc-sym-desc-name This has the location list in the first column, symbol in the + id="dx1-15125"> This has the location list in the first column, symbol in the second column, the description in the third and the name in the fourth. The longtable header row is given by: -


    header row is given by: +


    \glslongextraLocationSymDescNameHeader  \glslongextraLocationSymDescNameHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15129"> version: -



    \glslongextraLocationSymDescNameTabularHeader  + id="dx1-15131"> \glslongextraLocationSymDescNameTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraLocationSymDescNameTabularFooter  + id="dx1-15132"> \glslongextraLocationSymDescNameTabularFooter

    -

    +

    @@ -7581,87 +7605,87 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationSymDescNameTabularFooter


    long-desc-sym-name This has the description in the first column, the symbol in the + id="dx1-15133"> This has the description in the first column, the symbol in the second and the name in the third. The longtable header row is given + id="dx1-15134"> header row is given by: -



    \glslongextraDescSymNameHeader  \glslongextraDescSymNameHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15137"> version: -



    \glslongextraDescSymNameTabularHeader  \glslongextraDescSymNameTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraDescSymNameTabularFooter  \glslongextraDescSymNameTabularFooter

    -

    +

    long-loc-desc-sym-name This has the location list in the first column, the description + id="dx1-15141"> This has the location list in the first column, the description in the second column, the symbol in the third and the name in the fourth. The longtable header row is given by: -


    header row is given by: +


    \glslongextraLocationDescSymNameHeader  \glslongextraLocationDescSymNameHeader

    -

    +

    which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the tabular + id="dx1-15145"> version: -



    \glslongextraLocationDescSymNameTabularHeader  + id="dx1-15147"> \glslongextraLocationDescSymNameTabularHeader

    -

    +

    and -



    \glslongextraLocationDescSymNameTabularFooter  + id="dx1-15148"> \glslongextraLocationDescSymNameTabularFooter

    -

    +

    -

    +

    -

    Top

    2.11 Glossary Style Modifications

    -

    The

    The glossaries-extra-stylemods package (more conveniently loaded through the §2.11.3 The glossaries-extra-stylemods Package. -

    The

    The glossaries package tries to determine the group title from its label by first checking if \glsxtr@grouptitle@label⟩ which shouldn’t clash with another package. You can set the group title using -



    \glsxtrsetgrouptitle  label}{title}

    -

    +

    For example: @@ -7715,9 +7739,9 @@ For example:

    \glsxtrsetgrouptitle{A}{A (a)}
    -

    This uses a global assignment. If you need to scope the change you can +

    This uses a global assignment. If you need to scope the change you can use -



    \glsxtrlocalsetgrouptitle  }{title}

    -

    -

    +

    +

    -

    Top

    2.11.1 Style Hooks

    -

    The commands

    The commands \glossentryname and \glossentrydesc§5 Categories). This means you can make simple case-changing modifications to the name and description without defining a new glossary style. -

    If you want to adapt a style to use another field instead of

    If you want to adapt a style to use another field instead of name, you can use -



    \glossentrynameother  label}{field}

    -

    +

    This behaves just like \glossentryname (that is, it obeys description). See the key to field mappings table in the glossaries user manual. -

    There is a hook after

    There is a hook after \glossentryname and \Glossentryname: -



    \glsxtrpostnamehook  \glsxtrpostnamehook{label}

    -

    +

    By default this checks the indexname attribute. If the attribute exists for the category to which the label belongs, then the name is automatically indexed using -



    \glsxtrdoautoindexname{}{indexname}

    -

    +

    See §7 Auto-Indexing for further details. -

    As from version 1.04, the post-name hook

    As from version 1.04, the post-name hook \glsxtrpostnamehook will also use \glsxtrpostname (\glsentrysymbol{\glscurrententrylabel})}

    -

    For convenience, as from v1.31, you can use -


    For convenience, as from v1.31, you can use +


    \glsdefpostname  category}{definition}

    -

    +

    This is simply a shortcut for:

    definition}
    Note that it doesn’t check if the command has already been defined. -

    As from version 1.25, the post-name hook also does -


    As from version 1.25, the post-name hook also does +


    \glsextrapostnamehook  \glsextrapostnamehook{label}

    -

    +

    (before \glsxtrpostnamecategory⟩) to allow for additional non-category related code. This does nothing by default. -

    The post-description code used within the glossary is modified so that it also +

    The post-description code used within the glossary is modified so that it also does -



    \glsxtrpostdescription  \glsxtrpostdescription

    -

    +

    This occurs before the original \glspostdescription, so if the nopostdot=false option is used, it will be inserted before the terminating full stop. -

    This new command will do

    This new command will do \glsxtrpostdesccategory⟩ if it exists, where ⟨\glsxtrpostdescacronym for entries with the category set class="cmss-10">acronym. For convenience, as from v1.31, you can use -



    \glsdefpostdesc  category}{definition}

    -

    +

    This is simply a shortcut for:

    definition}
    Note that it doesn’t check if the command has already been defined. -

    Since both

    Since both \glossentry and \subglossentry set -



    \glscurrententrylabel  \glscurrententrylabel

    -

    +

    to the label for the current entry, you can use this within the definition of these post-description hooks if you need to reference the label. -

    For example, suppose you want to insert the plural form in brackets after the +

    For example, suppose you want to insert the plural form in brackets after the description in the glossary, but only for entries in the general category, then you could @@ -7955,10 +7979,10 @@ do: \renewcommand{\glsxtrpostdescgeneral}{\space  
     (plural: \glsentryplural{\glscurrententrylabel})}

    -

    This means you don’t have to define a custom glossary style, which you may find +

    This means you don’t have to define a custom glossary style, which you may find more complicated. (It also allows more flexibility if you decide to change the underlying glossary style.) -

    This feature can’t be used for glossary styles that ignore

    This feature can’t be used for glossary styles that ignore \glspostdescription or if you redefine \glspostdescription without including glossaries-extra-stylemods Package

    -

    +

    +

    -

    Top

    2.11.2 Number List

    -

    The

    The number list is now placed inside the argument of -



    \GlsXtrFormatLocationList  \GlsXtrFormatLocationList{number list}

    -

    +

    This is internally used by \glossaryentrynumbers. The \glossaryentrynumbers so that it doesn’t display th id="dx1-18004">number list, but it still saves the number list in case it’s required. -

    If you want to suppress the

    If you want to suppress the number list always use the nonumberlist option instead of redefining \glossaryentrynumbers to do nothing.
    -

    -

    If you want to, for example, change the font for the entire

    +

    If you want to, for example, change the font for the entire number list then redefine \GlsXtrFormatLocationList as appropriate. Don’t modify \glossaryentrynumbers. -

    Sometimes users like to insert “page” or “pages” in front of the

    Sometimes users like to insert “page” or “pages” in front of the number list. This is quite fiddly to do with the base glossaries package, but glossaries-extra provides a way of doing this. First you need to enable this option and specify the text to display using: -



    \GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag  }{pages}

    -

    +

    where ⟨page⟩ is the text to display if the number list only contains a single location and @@ -8049,28 +8073,27 @@ class="cmti-10">pages⟩ is the text to display otherwise. For examp

    \GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag{Page: }{Pages: }
    -

    An extra run is required when using this command. -

    Use

    An extra run is required when using this command. +

    Use glsignore not @gobble as the format if you want to suppress the page number (and only index the entry once).
    -

    -

    See the accompanying sample file

    +

    See the accompanying sample file sample-pages.tex. -

    Note that

    Note that bib2gls can be instructed to insert a prefix at the start of non-empty +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls can be instructed to insert a prefix at the start of non-empty location lists, which can be used as an alternative to \GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag. -

    +

    -

    Top

    2.11.3 The glossaries-extra-stylemods Package

    -

    As from v1.02,

    As from v1.02, glossaries-extra now includes the package glossaries-extra-stylemods that @@ -8087,7 +8110,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra. For example:  
    \usepackage{glossary-longragged}  
    \usepackage{glossaries-extra-stylemods}

    -

    Alternatively you can load

    Alternatively you can load glossary-name.sty at the same time by passing ⟨glossaries-extra-stylemods\usepackage[longragged]{glossaries-extra-stylemods}

    -

    Another option is to use the

    Another option is to use the stylemods key when you load long3col \usepackage[style=long3col,stylemods]{glossaries-extra}

    -

    Or the value of

    Or the value of stylemods may be a comma-separated list of the style package @@ -8132,7 +8155,7 @@ identifiers. For example:

    \usepackage[style=mcoltree,stylemods=mcols]{glossaries-extra}
    -

    Remember to group the value if it contains any commas: +

    Remember to group the value if it contains any commas: @@ -8140,8 +8163,8 @@ identifiers. For example:

    \usepackage[stylemods={mcols,longbooktabs}]{glossaries-extra}
    -

    -

    Note that the

    +

    Note that the inline style is dealt with slightly differently. The original definition provided by the nopostdot option, but the post-description category hook can still be used. -

    The

    The tabular-like styles, such as \printglossary, \printnoidxglossary or \printunsrtglossary, you must also reset the glossary style. -

    As from version 1.21, the hard-coded

    As from version 1.21, the hard-coded \space before the number list in many of the predefined styles is replaced with -



    \glsxtrprelocation  \glsxtrprelocation

    -

    +

    This just defaults to \space but may be redefined as required. For example: @@ -8213,36 +8236,36 @@ class="cmtt-10">\space but may be redefined as required. For example:

    \renewcommand{\glsxtrprelocation}{\dotfill}
    -

    -

    The

    +

    The list styles use -



    \glslistprelocation  \glslistprelocation

    -

    +

    (which defaults to \glsxtrprelocation) for top-level items and -



    \glslistchildprelocation  \glslistchildprelocation

    -

    +

    (which defaults to \glslistprelocation) for child items. -

    As from v1.31, the description (including the post-description hook) is governed +

    As from v1.31, the description (including the post-description hook) is governed by: -



    \glslistdesc  \glslistdesc{label}

    -

    +

    for the list and altlist styles (but not the listdotted variations). -

    For just the

    For just the list style and its letter group variations (not the altlistlistdottednumber list for child entries is followed by -



    \glslistchildpostlocation  \glslistchildpostlocation

    -

    +

    which defaults to a full stop. -

    The default value of

    The default value of \glslistdottedwidth is changed so that it’s set at the start of the document (if it hasn’t been changed in the preamble). This should take into account situations where \hsize isn’t set until the start of the document. -

    The

    The glossary-tree package introduced two new commands in glossaries\glstreenamefmt has been defined, as from v1.31 glossaries-extra-stylemods defines: -



    \glstreedefaultnamefmt  \glstreedefaultnamefmt{text}

    -

    +

    which simply does \textbf{text\glstreenamefmt without affecting the other two commands, you now can. -

    The

    The index-like and tree-like styles insert the pre-number list space with -



    \glstreeprelocation  \glstreeprelocation

    -

    +

    (which defaults to \glsxtrprelocation) for top-level items and -



    \glstreechildprelocation  \glstreechildprelocation

    -

    +

    (which defaults to \glstreeprelocation) for child items. -

    As from version 1.31, the

    As from version 1.31, the glossaries-extra-stylemods package also provides: -



    \glstreenonamedesc  \glstreenonamedesc{label}

    -

    +

    which is used by the treenoname styles to display the pre-description separator, the description and the post-description hook. Similarly for the symbol: -



    \glstreenonamesymbol  \glstreenonamesymbol{label}

    -

    +

    The above are just used for top-level entries. Child entries don’t have the name or symbol displayed for the treenoname styles, so there’s only a command for the child description: -



    \glstreenonamechilddesc  \glstreenonamechilddesc{label}

    -

    -

    For the

    +

    For the tree styles (but not the treenonametreenonamealttree styles), the description is displayed using: -



    \glstreedesc  \glstreedesc{label}

    -

    +

    and the symbol with: -



    \glstreesymbol  \glstreesymbol{label}

    -

    +

    Again the above two commands are just for top-level entries. The child entries use: -



    \glstreechilddesc  \glstreechilddesc{label}

    -

    +

    for the description and -



    \glstreechildsymbol  \glstreechildsymbol{label}

    -

    +

    for the symbol. -

    As from version 1.05, the

    As from version 1.05, the glossaries-extra-stylemods package provides some additional commands for use with the alttreenotree option has been used when loading glossaries. -



    \gglssetwidest  level]{name}

    -

    +

    (New to version 1.21.) This is like \glssetwidest (provided by glossary-tree) but performs a global assignment. -



    \eglssetwidest  }

    -

    +

    This is like \glssetwidest but performs a protected expansion on ⟨name⟩. This has a localised effect. For a global setting, use -



    \xglssetwidest  level]{name}

    -

    +

    The following only set the value if ⟨name⟩ is wider than the current value (new to version 1.23). Local update: -



    \glsupdatewidest  level]{name}

    -

    +

    Global update: -



    \gglsupdatewidest  level]{name}

    -

    +

    Locale update (expands ⟨name⟩): -



    \eglsupdatewidest  level]{name}

    -

    +

    Global update (expands ⟨name⟩): -



    \xglsupdatewidest  level]{name}

    -

    -

    The widest entry value can later be retrieved using -


    +

    The widest entry value can later be retrieved using +


    \glsgetwidestname  \glsgetwidestname

    -

    +

    for the top-level entries and -



    \glsgetwidestsubname  \glsgetwidestsubname{level}

    -

    +

    for sub-entries, where ⟨level⟩ is the level number. -

    Note that if you are using

    Note that if you are using bib2gls, you can use the resource option bib2gls, you can use the resource option set-widest which will try to determine the widest name of all the selected entries. This isn’t guaranteed to work as it may depend on fonts or commands that bib2gls + id="dx1-19069">bib2gls can’t replicate, but it should be suitable for names that just consist of text, and can be more efficient than iterating over all the defined entries using TEX. -

    The command

    The command \glsfindwidesttoplevelname provided by glossary-tree has a + id="dx1-19070"> has a CamelCase synonym: -



    \glsFindWidestTopLevelName  \glsFindWidestTopLevelName[glossary list]

    -

    +

    Similar commands are also provided: -



    \glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName  \glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName[glossary list]

    -

    +

    This has an additional check that the entry has been used. Naturally this is only useful if the glossaries that use the alttree style occur at the end of the document. + id="dx1-19073"> style occur at the end of the document. This command should be placed just before the start of the glossary. (Alternatively, place it at the end of the document and save the value in the auxiliary file for the next run.) -



    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyName  \glsFindWidestUsedAnyName[glossary list]

    -

    +

    This is like the previous command but if doesn’t check the parent key. This is useful if + id="dx1-19075"> key. This is useful if all levels should have the same width for the name. -



    \glsFindWidestAnyName  \glsFindWidestAnyName[glossary list]

    -

    +

    This is like the previous command but doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -



    \glsFindWidestUsedLevelTwo  \glsFindWidestUsedLevelTwo[glossary list]

    -

    +

    This is like \glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName but also sets the first two sub-levels as well. Any entry that has a great-grandparent is ignored. -



    \glsFindWidestLevelTwo  \glsFindWidestLevelTwo[glossary list]

    -

    +

    This is like the previous command but doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -



    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbol  \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbol [glossary list]{register}

    -

    +

    This is like \glsFindWidestUsedAnyName but also measures the symbol. The length of the widest symbol is stored in ⟨register⟩. -



    \glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbol  \glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbol[glossary list]{register}

    -

    +

    This is like the previous command but it doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -



    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbolLocation  \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbolLocation [symbol register}{location register}

    -

    +

    This is like \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbol but also measures the number list. This requires \glsentrynumberlist (see the (see the glossaries user manual). The length of the widest symbol is stored in ⟨symbol register⟩ and the length of the widest number + id="dx1-19084">number list is stored in ⟨location register⟩. -



    \glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbolLocation  \glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbolLocation [symbol register}{location register}

    -

    +

    This is like the previous command but it doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -



    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameLocation  \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameLocation [glossary list]{register}

    -

    +

    This is like \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbolLocation but doesn’t measure the symbol. The length of the widest number list is stored in ⟨number list is stored in ⟨register⟩. -



    \glsFindWidestAnyNameLocation  \glsFindWidestAnyNameLocation[glossary list]{register}

    -

    +

    This is like the previous command but doesn’t check if the entry has been used. -

    The layout of the symbol, description and

    The layout of the symbol, description and number list is governed by -



    \glsxtralttreeSymbolDescLocation  \glsxtralttreeSymbolDescLocation {label}{number list}

    -

    +

    for top-level entries and -



    \glsxtralttreeSubSymbolDescLocation  \glsxtralttreeSubSymbolDescLocation {label}{number list}

    -

    +

    for sub-entries. -

    There is now a user level command that performs the initialisation for the

    There is now a user level command that performs the initialisation for the alttree + id="dx1-19092"> style: -



    \glsxtralttreeInit  \glsxtralttreeInit

    -

    -

    The paragraph indent for subsequent paragraphs in multi-paragraph descriptions +

    +

    The paragraph indent for subsequent paragraphs in multi-paragraph descriptions is provided by the length -



    \glsxtrAltTreeIndent  \glsxtrAltTreeIndent

    -

    -

    For additional commands that are available with the

    +

    For additional commands that are available with the alttree style, see the + id="dx1-19095"> style, see the documented code (glossaries-extra-code.pdf). For examples, see the accompanying sample files sample-alttree-marginpar.tex.

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    3. Abbreviations

    -

    Abbreviations include acronyms (words formed from initial letters, such as +

    Abbreviations include acronyms (words formed from initial letters, such as “laser”), initialisms (initial letters of a phrase, such as “html”, that aren’t pronounced as words) and contractions (where parts of words are omitted, often replaced by an apostrophe, such as “don’t”). The “acronym” code provided by the @@ -8832,10 +8853,10 @@ to be described for readers unfamiliar with the term). They are therefore more like a regular term, which may or may not require a description in the glossary. -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package corrects this misnomer, and provides better abbreviation handling, with -



    \newabbreviation  }{long}

    -

    -

    This sets the

    +

    This sets the category key to abbreviation by default, but that value may be @@ -8873,7 +8894,7 @@ href="#sec:categories">§5 Categories for further details. -

    See

    See §2.7 Nested Links regarding the pitfalls of using commands like \glsxtrshort within ⟨short⟩ or ⟨long⟩. -

    Make sure that you set the category attributes before defining new abbreviations +

    Make sure that you set the category attributes before defining new abbreviations or they may not be correctly applied.
    -

    -

    The

    +

    The \newacronym command provided by the glossaries package is redefined by @@ -8901,7 +8922,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">acronym (see also href="#sec:acronymmods">§2.8 Acronym Style Modifications) so -



    \newacronym  short}{long}

    -

    +

    is now equivalent @@ -8940,7 +8961,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">}
    -

    The

    The \newabbreviation command is superficially similar to the glossaries package’s abbreviationglossaries package, although they may produce similar results.) -

    The way the abbreviations are displayed by commands like

    The way the abbreviations are displayed by commands like \gls varies according to the abbreviation style. The styles are set according to the entry’s category so, unlike the base glossaries package, you can have different abbreviation styles within the same glossary. -

    There are two types of full forms. The display full form, which is used on +

    There are two types of full forms. The display full form, which is used on first use by commands like short-footnote, the display and inline full forms are different. -

    These formatting commands aren’t stored in the

    These formatting commands aren’t stored in the short, shortplural\glsxtrlong and the case-changing variants don’t use \glsfirstlongfont. -

    You can apply the formatting command used for the short form to some arbitrary +

    You can apply the formatting command used for the short form to some arbitrary text using -



    \glsuseabbrvfont  text}{category}

    -

    +

    where ⟨category⟩ is the category label that identifies the abbreviation style. Similarly for the formatting command use by the long form: -



    \glsuselongfont  text}{category}

    -

    +

    -

    Top

    3.1 Tagging Initials

    -

    If you would like to tag the initial letters in the long form such that those letters are +

    If you would like to tag the initial letters in the long form such that those letters are underlined in the glossary but not in the main part of the document, you can use -



    \GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨cs}

    -

    +

    before you define your abbreviations. -

    This command (robustly) defines ⟨

    This command (robustly) defines ⟨cs⟩ (a control sequence) to accept a single argument, which is the letter (or letters) that needs to be tagged. The normal behaviour of this command within the document is to simply do its argument, but in @@ -9063,21 +9084,21 @@ href="#catattr.tagging">tagging attribute set to “true”. For those cases it will use -



    \glsxtrtagfont  \glsxtrtagfont{text}

    -

    +

    This command defaults to \underline{text} but may be redefined as required. -

    The control sequence ⟨

    The control sequence ⟨cs⟩ can’t already be defined when used with the unstarred version of \GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging for safety reasons. The starred @@ -9086,7 +9107,7 @@ class="cmti-10">cs⟩. As with redefining any commands, ensure that you don’t redefine something important. In fact, just forget the existence of the starred version and let’s pretend I didn’t mention it. -

    The first argument of

    The first argument of \GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging is a comma-separated list of category names. The §5 Categories) but this must be done before the glossary is displayed. -

    The accompanying sample file

    The accompanying sample file sample-mixtures.tex uses initial tagging for both the acronymabbreviation \GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging{acronym,abbreviation}{\itag}

    -

    This defines the command

    This defines the command \itag which can be used in the definitions. For example: @@ -9130,18 +9151,18 @@ example:  
    \newabbreviation{xml}{XML}  
     {e\itag{x}tensible \itag{m}arkup \itag{l}anguage}

    -

    The underlining of the tagged letters only occurs in the glossary and then only for +

    The underlining of the tagged letters only occurs in the glossary and then only for entries with the tagging attribute set. -

    +

    -

    Top

    3.2 Abbreviation Styles

    -

    The abbreviation style must be set before abbreviations are defined using: -


    The abbreviation style must be set before abbreviations are defined using: +


    \setabbreviationstyle  ]{style-name}

    -

    +

    where ⟨style-name⟩ is the name of the style and ⟨category⟩ is the category label @@ -9173,11 +9194,11 @@ class="cmss-10">regular attribute to true. -

    If you want to apply different styles to groups of abbreviations, assign a +

    If you want to apply different styles to groups of abbreviations, assign a different category to each group and set the style for the given category.
    -

    -

    Note that

    +

    Note that \setacronymstyle is disabled by glossaries-extra. Use

    @@ -9198,7 +9219,7 @@ href="#sec:acronymmods">§2.8 Acronym Style Modifications). However the original acronym interface is incompatible with all the commands described here. -

    Abbreviations can be used with the standard

    Abbreviations can be used with the standard glossaries commands, such as \gls, @@ -9208,7 +9229,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\acrshort\acronymfont). The short form can be produced with: -



    \glsxtrshort  label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (Use this instead of \acrshort.) -

    The long form can be produced with -


    The long form can be produced with +


    \glsxtrlong  label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (Use this instead of \acrlong.) -

    The

    The inline full form can be produced with -



    \glsxtrfull  label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (This this instead of \acrfull.) -

    In general, it’s best not to use commands like

    In general, it’s best not to use commands like \glsfirst for abbreviations, especially if you use the ⟨insert⟩ optional argument. Use either \gls (possibly with a reset) or \glsxtrfull.
    -

    -

    As mentioned earlier, the inline full form may not necessarily match the format +

    +

    As mentioned earlier, the inline full form may not necessarily match the format used on first use with short-nolongfirst use, but the full form will display the long form followed by the short form in parentheses. -

    If you want to use an abbreviation in a chapter or section title, use the +

    If you want to use an abbreviation in a chapter or section title, use the commands described in §4 Entries in Sectioning Titles, Headers, Captions and Contents instead.
    -

    -

    The arguments ⟨

    +

    The arguments ⟨options⟩, ⟨label⟩ and ⟨insert⟩ are the same as for commands such as \glstext. There are also analogous case-changing commands: -

    First letter upper case short form: -


    First letter upper case short form: +


    \Glsxtrshort  label}[insert]

    -

    -

    First letter upper case long form: -


    +

    First letter upper case long form: +


    \Glsxtrlong  label}[insert]

    -

    -

    First letter upper case inline full form: -


    +

    First letter upper case inline full form: +


    \Glsxtrfull  label}[insert]

    -

    -

    All upper case short form: +

    +

    All upper case short form: -



    \Glsxtrshort  label}[insert]

    -

    -

    All upper case long form: -


    +

    All upper case long form: +


    \Glsxtrlong  label}[insert]

    -

    -

    All upper case inline full form: -


    +

    All upper case inline full form: +


    \GLSxtrfull  label}[insert]

    -

    -

    Plural forms are also available. -

    Short form plurals: -


    +

    Plural forms are also available. +

    Short form plurals: +


    \glsxtrshortpl  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \Glsxtrshortpl  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \GLSxtrshortpl  label}[insert]

    -

    -

    Long form plurals: -


    +

    Long form plurals: +


    \glsxtrlongpl  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \Glsxtrlongpl  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \GLSxtrlongpl  label}[insert]

    -

    -

    Full form plurals: -


    +

    Full form plurals: +


    \glsxtrfullpl  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \Glsxtrfullpl  label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \GLSxtrfullpl  label}[insert]

    -

    -

    Be careful about using

    +

    Be careful about using \glsentryfull, \Glsentryfull, \glsentryfullpl and @@ -9497,13 +9518,13 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsentryshort etc.
    -

    -

    +

    +

    -

    Top

    3.3 Shortcut Commands

    -

    The abbreviation shortcut commands can be enabled using the package option +

    The abbreviation shortcut commands can be enabled using the package option shortcutstable 3.1. -


    @@ -9843,10 +9864,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation
    -

    Top

    3.4 Predefined Abbreviation Styles

    -

    There are two types of abbreviation styles: those that treat the abbreviation as a +

    There are two types of abbreviation styles: those that treat the abbreviation as a regular entry (so that \gls uses \gls uses \glsxtrgenabbrvfmt). -

    The regular entry abbreviation styles set the

    The regular entry abbreviation styles set the regular attribute to “true” for the @@ -9882,7 +9903,7 @@ class="cmss-10">long\glsxtrshort. -

    The other abbreviation styles don’t modify the

    The other abbreviation styles don’t modify the regular attribute. The \glsxtrfullformat that are defined by the style). -

    In both cases, the

    In both cases, the first use of \gls may not match the text produced by \glsfirst (and likewise for the plural and case-changing versions). -

    The sample file

    The sample file sample-abbr-styles.tex demonstrates all predefined styles described here. -

    For the “sc” styles that use

    For the “sc” styles that use \textsc, be careful about your choice of fonts as some only have limited support. For example, you may not be able to combine bold @@ -9921,52 +9942,52 @@ class="cmss-10">fontenc package with the T1 option or something similar.
    -

    -

    The parenthetical styles, such as

    +

    The parenthetical styles, such as long-short, use -



    \glsxtrparen  \glsxtrparen{text}

    -

    +

    to set the parenthetical material. This just puts parentheses around the text: (⟨text⟩). -

    The basic abbreviation styles, such as

    The basic abbreviation styles, such as long-short and short-long use -



    \glsabbrvdefaultfont  \glsabbrvdefaultfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the short form. This just does ⟨text⟩ by default. (That is, no font change is applied.) On first use, -



    \glsfirstabbrvdefaultfont  \glsfirstabbrvdefaultfont{text}

    -

    +

    is used instead. By default, this just does \glsabbrvdefaultfont. The long form is formatted according to -



    \glslongdefaultfont  }

    -

    +

    which again just does ⟨text⟩ (no font change). On first use, -



    \glsfirstlongdefaultfont  \glsfirstlongdefaultfont{text}

    -

    +

    is used instead. This just does \glslongdefaultfont. The plural suffix used for the short form is given by -



    \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix  \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix

    -

    +

    which defaults to \glspluralsuffix. -

    The small-cap styles, such as

    The small-cap styles, such as long-short-sc and short-sc-long, use -



    \glsabbrvscfont  \glsabbrvscfont{text}

    -

    +

    which uses \textsc.3.1 On first use -



    \glsabbrvdefaultfont  \glsfirstabbrvscfont{text}

    -

    +

    is used instead. This uses \glsabbrvscfont by default. So redefine, \glsabbrvscfont to change first and subsequent uses or \glsfirstabbrvscfont to change just the first use. -

    The long form for the small-cap styles uses

    The long form for the small-cap styles uses \glslongdefaultfont or \glsfirstlongdefaultfont, as with the basic style. The suffix is given by -



    \glsxtrscsuffix  \glsxtrscsuffix

    -

    +

    This is defined as @@ -10052,7 +10073,7 @@ This is defined as

    \newcommand*{\glsxtrscsuffix}{\glstextup{\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix}}
    -

    The

    The \glstextup command is provided by glossaries and is used to switch off the @@ -10072,51 +10093,51 @@ attributes. See §5 Categories for further details.) -

    The small styles, such as

    The small styles, such as long-short-sm and short-sm-long, use -



    \glsabbrvsmfont  \glsabbrvsmfont{text}

    -

    +

    which uses \textsmaller. (This requires the relsizes package, which isn’t loaded by glossaries-extra, so must be loaded explicitly.) On first use -



    \glsfirstabbrvsmfont  \glsfirstabbrvsmfont{text}

    -

    +

    is used instead. This uses \glsabbrvsmfont by default. -

    The long form for the smaller styles uses

    The long form for the smaller styles uses \glslongdefaultfont or \glsfirstlongdefaultfont, as with the basic style. The suffix is given by -



    \glsxtrsmsuffix  \glsxtrsmsuffix

    -

    +

    which defaults to just \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix. -

    The “short-em” (emphasize short) styles, such as

    The “short-em” (emphasize short) styles, such as long-short-em or short-em-long, use -



    \glsabbrvemfont  \glsabbrvemfont{text}

    -

    +

    On first use -



    \glsfirstabbrvemfont  \glsfirstabbrvemfont{text}

    -

    +

    is used instead. This uses \glsabbrvemfont by default. The suffix is given by -



    \glsxtremsuffix  \glsxtremsuffix

    -

    +

    which defaults to just \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix. The long form is as for the basic style unless the style is a “long-em” style. -

    The “long-em” (emphasize long) styles, such as

    The “long-em” (emphasize long) styles, such as long-em-short-em or short-em-long-em, use -



    \glsfirstlongemfont  \glsfirstlongemfont{long-form}

    -

    +

    instead of \glsfirstlongdefaultfont{long-form} and -



    \glslongemfont  }

    -

    +

    instead of \glslongdefaultfont{long-form}. The first form \glsfirstlongemfont is initialised to use \glslongemfont. -

    The user styles have similar commands: -


    The user styles have similar commands: +


    \glsabbrvuserfont  \glsabbrvuserfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the short form, -



    \glsfirstabbrvuserfont  \glsfirstabbrvuserfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the first use short form, -



    \glslonguserfont  \glslonguserfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the long form, -



    \glsfirstlonguserfont  \glsfirstlonguserfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the first use long form, and -



    \glsxtrusersuffix  \glsxtrusersuffix

    -

    +

    for the short plural suffix. -

    Similarly for the hyphen styles: -


    Similarly for the hyphen styles: +


    \glsabbrvhyphenfont  \glsabbrvhyphenfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the short form, -



    \glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont  \glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the first use short form, -



    \glslonghyphenfont  \glslonghyphenfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the long form, -



    \glsfirstlonghyphenfont  \glsfirstlonghyphenfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the first use long form, and -



    \glsxtrhyphensuffix  \glsxtrhyphensuffix

    -

    +

    for the short plural suffix. -

    Similarly for the “only” styles, such as

    Similarly for the “only” styles, such as long-only-short-only: -



    \glsabbrvonlyfont  \glsabbrvonlyfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the short form, -



    \glsfirstabbrvonlyfont  \glsfirstabbrvonlyfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the first use short form, -



    \glslongonlyfont  \glslongonlyfont{text}

    -

    +

    for the long form, -



    \glsfirstlongonlyfont  }

    -

    +

    for the first use long form, and -



    \glsxtronlysuffix  \glsxtronlysuffix

    -

    +

    for the short plural suffix. -

    Note that by default inserted material (provided in the final optional argument of +

    Note that by default inserted material (provided in the final optional argument of commands like \gls), is placed outside the font command in the predefined styles. To move it inside, use: -



    \glsxtrinsertinsidetrue  \glsxtrinsertinsidetrue

    -

    +

    This applies to all the predefined styles. For example: @@ -10349,17 +10370,17 @@ This applies to all the predefined styles. For example:  
    \renewcommand*{\glsfirstlongdefaultfont}[1]{\emph{#1}}  
    \glsxtrinsertinsidetrue

    -

    This will make the long form and the inserted text emphasized, whereas the default +

    This will make the long form and the inserted text emphasized, whereas the default (without \glsxtrinsertinsidetrue) would place the inserted text outside of the emphasized font. -

    Note that for some styles, such as the

    Note that for some styles, such as the short-long, the inserted text would be placed inside the font command for the short form (rather than the long form in the above example). -

    Remember that

    Remember that \textsc renders lowercase letters as small capitals. Uppercase letters are rendered as normal uppercase letters, so if you specify the short form in @@ -10373,8 +10394,8 @@ convert its argument to lowercase. For example:

    \renewcommand*{\glsabbrvscfont}[1]{\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}
    -

    -

    If you want to easily switch between the “sc” and “sm” styles, you may find it +

    +

    If you want to easily switch between the “sc” and “sm” styles, you may find it easier to redefine this command to convert case: @@ -10384,16 +10405,16 @@ easier to redefine this command to convert case: \renewcommand*{\glsabbrvscfont}[1]{\textsc{\MakeTextLowercase{#1}}}  
    \renewcommand*{\glsabbrvsmfont}[1]{\textsmaller{\MakeTextUppercase{#1}}}

    -

    -

    Some of the styles use -


    +

    Some of the styles use +


    \glsxtrfullsep  \glsxtrfullsep{label}

    -

    +

    as a separator between the long and short forms. This is defined as a space by default, but may be changed as required. For example: @@ -10403,7 +10424,7 @@ default, but may be changed as required. For example:

    \renewcommand*{\glsxtrfullsep}[1]{~}
    -

    or +

    or @@ -10411,8 +10432,8 @@ default, but may be changed as required. For example:

    \renewcommand*{\glsxtrfullsep}[1]{\glsacspace{#1}}
    -

    -

    The new naming scheme for abbreviation styles is as follows:

    +

    +

    The new naming scheme for abbreviation styles is as follows:

    • field1⟩[field2⟩[-modifier2⟩][-user] -

      This is for the parenthetical styles. The

      This is for the parenthetical styles. The -modifier⟩ parts may be omitted. These styles display ⟨field1⟩ or ⟨field2⟩ starts with “no” then that element is omitted from the display style (no parenthetical part) but is included in the inline style. -

      If the

      If the -modifier⟩ part is present, then the field has a font changing command applied to it. The special modifier -only indicates that field is only present according to whether or not the entry has been used. -

      If

      If post is present then ⟨field2⟩ is placed after the link-text using the post-link hook. -

      If the

      If the -user part is present, then the user1 value, if provided, is inserted into the parenthetical material . (The field used for the inserted material may be changed.) -

      Examples:

      +

      Examples:

      • \glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont on first
      • style-noreg -

        Some styles set the

        Some styles set the regular attribute. In some cases, there’s a version of the @@ -10523,7 +10544,7 @@ href="#abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em-noreg">long-em-noshort-em-noreg style is a minor variation that style that doesn’t set the attribute. -

        There are a few “noshort” styles, such as

        There are a few “noshort” styles, such as long-hyphen-noshort-noreg, that have @@ -10541,7 +10562,7 @@ class="cmti-10">modifier1⟩]-[post]footnote -

        The display style uses ⟨

        The display style uses ⟨field1⟩ followed by a footnote with the other field in it. If post is present then the footnote is placed after the link-text using the post-link hook. The inline style does ⟨field1⟩ followed by the other field in parentheses. -

        If

        If -modifier1⟩ is present, ⟨field1⟩ has a font-changing command applied to it. -

        Examples:

        +

        Examples:

        • short-sc-postfootnote: short form in smallcaps with the long form in the footnote outside of the link-text.
        -

        Take care with the footnote styles. Remember that there are some situations +

        Take care with the footnote styles. Remember that there are some situations where \footnote doesn’t work.
        -

        +

      • style-desc -

        Like ⟨

        Like ⟨style⟩ but the description key must be provided when defining abbreviations with this style. -

        Examples:

        +

        Examples:

        -

        Not all combinations that fit the above syntax are provided. Pre-version 1.04 +

        Not all combinations that fit the above syntax are provided. Pre-version 1.04 styles that didn’t fit this naming scheme are either provided with a synonym (where the former name wasn’t ambiguous) or provided with a deprecated synonym (where the former name was confusing). The deprecated style names generate a warning using: -



        \GlsXtrWarnDeprecatedAbbrStyle  old-name}{new-name}

        -

        +

        where ⟨old-name⟩ is the deprecated name and ⟨new-name⟩ is the preferred name. You can suppress these warnings by redefining this command to do nothing. -

        +

        -

        Top

        3.4.1 Predefined Abbreviation Styles that Set the Regular Attribute

        -

        The following abbreviation styles set the

        The following abbreviation styles set the regular attribute to “true” for all categories @@ -10647,12 +10668,12 @@ href="#glo:firstuse">first use. The name is set to the short form through the command -



        \glsxtrshortnolongname  \glsxtrshortnolongname

        -

        +

        (Similarly for the other shortmodifier\newacronym) for it to take effect. Make sure to \protect any formatting commands (or anything else that shouldn’t be expanded). -

        The

        The description is set to the long form. The inline full form displays ⟨short⟩ @@ -10820,12 +10841,12 @@ class="cmss-10">short-nolongname is set to the full form obtained by expanding -



        \glsxtrshortdescname  \glsxtrshortdescname

        -

        +

        (Similarly for the other shortmodifier\protect fragile and formatting commands and only redefin before \newabbreviation (or \newacronym). -

        The

        The description must be supplied by the user. You may prefer to use the \glsxtrshortlong⟩ (⟨short⟩). -

        The

        The sort key are set to the long form. The name key is also set to the long form, but this is done by expanding -



        \glsxtrlongnoshortdescname  \glsxtrlongnoshortdescname

        -

        +

        (Similarly for the other longmodifier-desc styles, unless indicated otherwise.) This command should only be redefined before abbreviations are defined, and any fragile or formatting commands within it need protecting. -

        The

        The description must be provided by the user. The predefined glossary styles won’t display the short form. You can use the post-description hook to @@ -11073,12 +11094,12 @@ class="cmss-10">sortname key is also set to the short form, but this is done by expanding -



        \glsxtrlongnoshortname  \glsxtrlongnoshortname

        -

        +

        (Similarly for other longmodifier-noshortmodifier⟩ styles, unless indicated otherwise.) This command should only be redefined before abbreviations are defined, and fragile or formatting commands should be protected. -

        The

        The description is set to the long form.

        @@ -11185,12 +11206,12 @@ href="#catattr.regular">regular attribute. -

        +

        -

        Top

        3.4.2 Predefined Abbreviation Styles that Don’t Set the Regular Attribute

        -

        The following abbreviation styles will set the

        The following abbreviation styles will set the regular attribute to “false” if it has @@ -11212,12 +11233,12 @@ class="cmss-10">sortname is also set to the short form through -



        \glsxtrlongshortname  \glsxtrlongshortname

        -

        +

        (Similarly for other longmodifiermodifier⟩ styles, unless indicated class="cmtt-10">\the\glslongtok and the short form can be referenced with \the\glsshorttok. -

        The

        The description is set to the long form. The long and short forms are separated by \glsxtrfull shows the long form followed by the short for The name field is obtained from -



        \glsxtronlyname  \glsxtronlyname

        -

        +

        Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect any commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced @@ -11329,12 +11350,12 @@ class="cmss-10">long-only-short-onlyname field is obtained from -



        \glsxtronlydescname  \glsxtronlydescname

        -

        +

        Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect any commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced @@ -11366,12 +11387,12 @@ class="cmss-10">long-short style but additional information can be inserted into the parenthetical material. This checks the value of the field given by -



        \glsxtruserfield  \glsxtruserfield

        -

        +

        (which defaults to useri) using \ifglshasfieldlong⟩ (⟨short⟩, ⟨field-value⟩). The format is governed by -



        \glsxtruserparen  text}{label}

        -

        +

        where ⟨text⟩ is the short form (for the \glsxtrparendescription is set to -



        \glsuserdescription  long}{label}

        -

        +

        The default definition ignores the ⟨label⟩ and encapsulates ⟨long⟩ with \glslonguserfont. -

        The

        The name is obtained by expanding \glsxtrlongshortname (see above). The @@ -11454,7 +11475,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">} href="#abbrstyle.short-long-user">short-long-user style. -

        For example: +

        For example: @@ -11466,35 +11487,35 @@ class="cmss-10">short-long-user [user1={German Speaking \TeX\ User Group}]  
         {dante}{DANTE}{Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ e.V}

        -

        On first use,

        On first use, \gls{tug} will appear as:

        -

        T

        TEX User Group (TUG)

        -

        whereas

        whereas \gls{dante} will appear as:

        -

        Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung T

        Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung TEX e.V (DANTE, German Speaking TEX User Group)

        -

        The short form is formatted according to -


        The short form is formatted according to +


        \glsabbrvuserfont  \glsabbrvuserfont{text}

        -

        +

        and the plural suffix is given by -



        \glsxtrusersuffix  \glsxtrusersuffix

        -

        -

        These may be redefined as appropriate. For example, if you want a smallcaps +

        +

        These may be redefined as appropriate. For example, if you want a smallcaps style, you can just set these commands to those used by the long-short-sclong-short-sc\renewcommand{\glsxtrusersuffix}{\glsxtrscsuffix}

        -

        +

        long⟩ (⟨short⟩). Before version 1.04, this was incorrectly set to the short form. If you want to revert back to this you can redefine -



        \glsxtrlongshortdescsort  \glsxtrlongshortdescsort

        -

        +

        For example: @@ -11569,7 +11590,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortdescsort


        \renewcommand*{\glsxtrlongshortdescsort}{\the\glsshorttok}
        -

        The

        The description must be supplied by the user. The long and short forms are separated by \glsxtrfullsep. The name field is obtained from -



        \glsxtrlongshortdescname  \glsxtrlongshortdescname

        -

        +

        (Similarly for other longmodifierlong-short-username key is obtained from -



        \glsxtrlongshortuserdescname  \glsxtrlongshortuserdescname

        -

        +

        Again, this should only be redefined before \newabbreviation (or \newacronym), and fragile and formatting commands need protecting. -

        The

        The description key must be supplied in the optional argument of short-long-user style. -

        The

        The name field is obtained from -



        \glsxtrshortlongname  \glsxtrshortlongname

        -

        +

        (Similarly for other shortmodifier\glsxtruserparenname field is obtained by expanding -



        \glsxtrshortlongname  \glsxtrshortlongname

        -

        +

        Again, this should only be redefined before \newabbreviation (or \glsxtrfullsep. The name field is obtained from -



        \glsxtrshortlongdescname  \glsxtrshortlongdescname

        -

        +

        (Similarly for other shortmodifiername



        \glsxtrshortlonguserdescname  \glsxtrshortlonguserdescname

        -

        +

        Again, this should only be redefined before \newabbreviation (or \newacronym), and fragile and formatting commands need protecting. -

        The

        The description key must be supplied in the optional argument of nohyperfirsthyperref package is used). -

        The inline full form uses the ⟨

        The inline full form uses the ⟨short⟩ (⟨long⟩) style. The namedescriptionname key is obtained by expanding -



        \glsxtrfootnotename  \glsxtrfootnotename

        -

        +

        (Similarly for other shortmodifierfootnote styles, unless class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation (or \newacronym), and fragile or formatting commands should be protected from expansion. -

        As from version 1.05, all the footnote styles use: -


        As from version 1.05, all the footnote styles use: +


        \glsfirstlongfootnotefont  \glsfirstlongfootnotefont{text}

        -

        +

        to format the long form on first use or for the full form and -



        \glslongfootnotefont  \glslongfootnotefont{text}

        -

        +

        to format the long form elsewhere (for example, when used with \glsxtrlong). -

        As from version 1.07, all the footnote styles use: -


        As from version 1.07, all the footnote styles use: +


        \glsxtrabbrvfootnote  label}{long}

        -

        +

        By default, this just does \footnote} (the first argument is ignored). For  
          \footnote{\glshyperlink[#2]{#1}}%  
        }

        -

        or to include the short form with a hyperlink: +

        or to include the short form with a hyperlink: @@ -12114,7 +12135,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">} (the first argument is ignored). For  
          \footnote{\glshyperlink[\glsfmtshort{#1}]{#1}: #2}%  
        }

        -

        Note that I haven’t used commands like

        Note that I haven’t used commands like \glsxtrshort to avoid interference (see first use. This will also defer the footnote \glsxtrifnextpunc. -

        The inline full form uses the ⟨

        The inline full form uses the ⟨short⟩ (⟨long⟩) style. The namemarkwords category attribute. The full form is formatted using -



        \glsxtrlonghyphenshort  }

        -

        +

        where ⟨insert⟩ is the inserted material provided in the final optional argument of commands like name key is obtained from \glsxtrlongshortname. -

        Unlike the other ⟨

        Unlike the other ⟨long⟩ (⟨short⟩) type of styles, such as long-short

        -

        The space before the parenthetical material is actually given by +

        The space before the parenthetical material is actually given by \glsxtrfullsep{labelinsert⟩ may be moved into the formatting commands according to the conditional \ifglsxtrinsertinside. -

        For example, if

        For example, if ip is defined using: @@ -12431,7 +12452,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">ip is defined using:  
        \setabbreviationstyle[english]{long-hyphen-short-hyphen}  
        \newabbreviation[category=english]{ip}{IP}{Internet Protocol}

        -

        then +

        then @@ -12439,10 +12460,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">ip is defined using:

        \gls{ip}[-Adressen]
        -

        will do +

        will do

        -

        Internet-Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)

        -

        on first use, whereas +

        Internet-Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)

        +

        on first use, whereas @@ -12450,11 +12471,11 @@ class="cmtt-10">ip is defined using:

        \gls{ip}[ Address]
        -

        will do +

        will do

        -

        Internet Protocol Address (IP Address)

        -

        on first use. -

        Note that the hyphenation isn’t applied when using commands like +

        Internet Protocol Address (IP Address)

        +

        on first use. +

        Note that the hyphenation isn’t applied when using commands like \glsxtrlong. This means that @@ -12464,12 +12485,12 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong. This means that
        \glsxtrlong{ip}[-Adressen]
        -

        will do +

        will do

        -

        Internet Protocol-Adressen

        +

        Internet Protocol-Adressen

        -

        -

        If the

        +

        If the markwords attribute hadn’t been set, then the first use of @@ -12480,11 +12501,11 @@ class="cmss-10">markwords \gls{ip}[-Adressen]

        -

        would do +

        would do

        -

        Internet Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)

        -

        instead. -

        If the inserted material ⟨

        Internet Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)

        +

        instead. +

        -

        -

        If you want the short version in small-caps, you can just redefine +

        +

        If you want the short version in small-caps, you can just redefine \glsabbrvhyphenfont and \glsxtrhyphensuffix to use the small-caps @@ -12506,7 +12527,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhyphensuffix to use the small-caps \renewcommand{\glsabbrvhyphenfont}{\glsabbrvscfont}  
        \renewcommand{\glsxtrhyphensuffix}{\glsxtrscsuffix}

        -

        Similarly for other font-changing variations. +

        Similarly for other font-changing variations.

        long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreglong-hyphen-short-hyphen-desc
        -

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to long-hyphen-short-hyphen but the user @@ -12557,7 +12578,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortdescname. class="cmssbx-10">long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen

        -

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to long-hyphen-short-hyphen but the @@ -12583,7 +12604,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">}⟨insert
        where -



        \glsxtrposthyphenshort  label}insert

        -

        +

        is in the post-link hook. This uses the format:
        insert⟩ (isnert⟩) -

        The singular short form is always used here, even with

        The singular short form is always used here, even with \glspl. (Unlike long-hyphen-long-hyphen.)
        -

        -

        The part in the link-text on first use: -


        +

        The part in the link-text on first use: +


        \glsxtrlonghyphen  }{insert}

        -

        +

        checks if ⟨insert⟩ starts with a hyphen. If it does, then \glsxtrwordsep is locally @@ -12637,15 +12658,15 @@ class="cmti-10">insert⟩ for this style without causing nested hyperlinks, but only for commands like \gls. -

        Don’t use

        Don’t use \gls in the ⟨insert⟩ part for commands like \glsxtrfull, \glsxtrshort or \glsxtrlong.
        -

        -

        The inline full display format used by commands like

        +

        The inline full display format used by commands like \glsxtrfull behaves differently to the first use of \gls with this style. It’s better @@ -12662,7 +12683,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">} if you want to ensure the full class="cmssbx-10">long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen-desc

        -

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen @@ -12682,7 +12703,7 @@ class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-short-hyphen, except that the short form is displayed first followed by the long form in parentheses. The full form is formatted using -



        \glsxtrshorthyphenlong  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨insert}

        -

        +

        which behaves in an analogous way to \glsxtrlonghyphenshort. The name\glsxtrshortlongname. class="cmssbx-10">short-hyphen-long-hyphen-desc

        -

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to short-hyphen-long-hyphen but the user @@ -12753,7 +12774,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">}⟨insert
        where -



        \glsxtrposthyphenlong  label}insert

        -

        +

        is in the post-link hook. These commands behave in an analogous manner to those used with name is obtained from \glsxtrshortlongname. -

        Don’t use

        Don’t use \gls in the ⟨insert⟩ part for commands like \glsxtrfull, \glsxtrshort or \glsxtrlong.
        -

        -

        The inline full display format used by commands like

        +

        The inline full display format used by commands like \glsxtrfull behaves differently to the first use of \gls with this style. It’s better @@ -12797,7 +12818,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">} if you want to ensure the full class="cmssbx-10">short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen-desc

        -

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to

        New to version 1.17. This is similar to short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen @@ -12808,13 +12829,13 @@ class="cmss-10">name\glsxtrshortlongdescname.

        -

        +

        -

        Top

        3.5 Defining New Abbreviation Styles

        -

        New abbreviation styles may be defined using: -


        New abbreviation styles may be defined using: +


        \newabbreviationstyle  }{fmts}

        -

        +

        -

        where ⟨

        where ⟨name⟩ is the name of the new style (as used in the mandatory argument of \setabbreviationstyleglossaries package’s \newacronymstyle command. -

        You can’t use styles defined by

        You can’t use styles defined by \newacronymstyle with glossaries-extra unless you have reverted glossaries package can’t be used with abbreviations defined with \newabbreviation.
        -

        -

        The ⟨

        +

        The ⟨setup⟩ argument deals with the way the entry is defined and may set attributes for the given abbreviation category. This argument should redefine -



        \CustomAbbreviationFields  \CustomAbbreviationFields

        -

        +

        to set the entry fields including the name (defaults to the short form if omitted), @@ -12881,12 +12902,12 @@ class="cmss-10">pluraldescription. -

        \CustomAbbreviationFields is expanded by \newabbreviation so take care to protect commands that shouldn’t be expanded.
        -

        -

        For example, the

        +

        For example, the long-short style has the following in ⟨setup⟩:  
            plural={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshortpltok}},%  
            description={\the\glslongtok}}%

        -

        Note that the

        Note that the first and firstplural are set even though they’re not used by \gls. -

        The basic styles, such as

        The basic styles, such as long-short, use commands like fmts⟩ argument even if they’re not used within \CustomAbbreviationFields. -

        The ⟨

        The ⟨setup⟩ argument may also redefine -



        \GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation  \GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation

        -

        +

        which can be used to assign attributes. (This will automatically be initialised to do nothing.) -

        For example, the

        For example, the short-footnote includes the following in ⟨setup⟩:  
            {}%  
          }%

        -

        This sets the

        This sets the nohyperfirst attribute to “true”. It also unsets the nohyperfirst attribute doesn’t get unset by other styles, so take care not to switch styles for the same category. -

        You can access the short, long, short plural and long plural values through the +

        You can access the short, long, short plural and long plural values through the following token registers. -

        Short value (defined by

        Short value (defined by glossaries): -



        \glsshorttok  \glsshorttok

        -

        -

        Short plural value (defined by

        +

        Short plural value (defined by glossaries-extra): -



        \glsshortpltok  \glsshortpltok

        -

        +

        (This may be the default value or, if provided, the value provided by the user through the shortplural key in the optional argument of \newabbreviation.) -

        Long value (defined by

        Long value (defined by glossaries): -



        \glslongtok  \glslongtok

        -

        -

        Long plural value (defined by

        +

        Long plural value (defined by glossaries-extra): -



        \glslongpltok  \glslongpltok

        -

        +

        (This may be the default value or, if provided, the value provided by the user through the longplural key in the optional argument of \newabbreviation.) -

        The short or long values may be modified by attributes (such as

        The short or long values may be modified by attributes (such as markwords). The @@ -13028,19 +13049,19 @@ above registers reflect the modification. If you want to access the original (unmodified) short or long form (as provided in the final two arguments of \newabbreviation), then use the commands: -



        \glsxtrorgshort  \glsxtrorgshort

        -

        +

        for the short form and -



        \glsxtrorglong  \glsxtrorglong

        -

        +

        for the long form. (These may be useful for the sort key to avoid any formatting that @@ -13048,44 +13069,44 @@ class="cmss-10">sort

        There are two other registers available that are defined by

        There are two other registers available that are defined by glossaries: -



        \glslabeltok  \glslabeltok

        -

        +

        which contains the entry’s label and -



        \glskeylisttok  \glskeylisttok

        -

        +

        which contains the values provided in the optional argument of \newabbreviation. -

        Remember put

        Remember put \the in front of the register command as in the examples above. The category label can be access through the command (not a register): -



        \glscategorylabel  \glscategorylabel

        -

        +

        This may be used inside the definition of \GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation. -

        If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use -


        If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use +


        \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup  \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup{name}

        -

        +

        where ⟨name⟩ is the name of the existing style. For example, the \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup{long-noshort-desc}

        -

        within ⟨

        within ⟨setup⟩. -

        The ⟨

        The ⟨fmts⟩ argument deals with the way the entry is displayed in the document. This argument should redefine the following commands. -

        The default suffix for the plural short form (if not overridden by the

        The default suffix for the plural short form (if not overridden by the shortplural key): -



        \abbrvpluralsuffix  \abbrvpluralsuffix

        -

        +

        (Note that this isn’t used for the plural long form, which just uses the regular \glspluralsuffix.) -

        The font used for the short form on

        The font used for the short form on first use or in the full forms: -



        \glsfirstabbrvfont  \glsfirstabbrvfont{text}

        -

        -

        The font used for the short form on subsequent use or through commands like +

        +

        The font used for the short form on subsequent use or through commands like \glsxtrshort: -



        \glsabbrvfont  \glsabbrvfont{text}

        -

        -

        The font used for the long form on

        +

        The font used for the long form on first use or in the full forms: -



        \glsfirstlongfont  \glsfirstlongfont{text}

        -

        -

        The font used for the long form in commands like

        +

        The font used for the long form in commands like \glsxtrlong use: -



        \glslongfont  \glslongfont{text}

        -

        -

        Display full form singular no case-change (used by

        +

        Display full form singular no case-change (used by \gls on first use for @@ -13168,7 +13189,7 @@ abbreviations without the regular attribute set): -



        \glsxtrfullformat  label}{insert}

        -

        -

        Display full form singular first letter converted to upper case (used by

        +

        Display full form singular first letter converted to upper case (used by \Gls on \Glsregular attribute set): -



        \Glsxtrfullformat  label}{insert}

        -

        -

        Display full form plural no case-change (used by

        +

        Display full form plural no case-change (used by \glspl on first use for @@ -13204,7 +13225,7 @@ abbreviations without the regular attribute set): -



        \glsxtrfullplformat  }

        -

        -

        Display full form plural first letter converted to upper case (used by

        +

        Display full form plural first letter converted to upper case (used by \Glspl on first use for abbreviations without the regular attribute set): -



        \Glsxtrfullplformat  label}{insert}

        -

        -

        In addition ⟨

        +

        In addition ⟨fmts⟩ may also redefine the following commands that govern the inline full formats. If the style doesn’t redefine them, they will default to the same as the display full forms. -

        Inline singular no case-change (used by

        Inline singular no case-change (used by \glsentryfull, \glsxtrfull\glsxtrfull\GLSxtrfull): -



        \glsxtrinlinefullformat  }{insert}

        -

        -

        Inline singular first letter converted to upper case (used by

        +

        Inline singular first letter converted to upper case (used by \Glsentryfull and \Glsxtrfull): -



        \Glsxtrinlinefullformat  }{insert}

        -

        -

        Inline plural no case-change (used by

        +

        Inline plural no case-change (used by \glsentryfullpl, \glsxtrfullpl\glsxtrfullpl\GLSxtrfullpl): -



        \glsxtrinlinefullplformat  }{insert}

        -

        -

        Inline plural first letter converted to upper case (used by

        +

        Inline plural first letter converted to upper case (used by \Glsentryfullpl and \Glsxtrfullpl): -



        \Glsxtrinlinefullplformat  }{insert}

        -

        -

        (New to version 1.17.) You can also modify the way the subsequent use is +

        +

        (New to version 1.17.) You can also modify the way the subsequent use is formatted by redefining the following four commands, but these won’t be used for abbreviations with the regular attribute set. If the style doesn’t redefine these commands, the default values are used. -

        Singular with no case-change: -


        Singular with no case-change: +


        \glsxtrsubsequentfmt  label}{insert}

        -

        -

        Singular with first letter upper case: -


        +

        Singular with first letter upper case: +


        \Glsxtrsubsequentfmt  label}{insert}

        -

        +

        -

        Plural with no case-change: -


        Plural with no case-change: +


        \glsxtrsubsequentplfmt  }{insert}

        -

        -

        Plural with first letter upper case: -


        +

        Plural with first letter upper case: +


        \Glsxtrsubsequentplfmt  }{insert}

        -

        -

        If you want to provide support for

        +

        If you want to provide support for glossaries-accsupp use the following glossaries-accsupp\glsentry⟨xxx⟩ command.) -

        For example, the

        For example, the short-long style has the following in ⟨fmts⟩:  
            \glsxtrparen{\glsfirstlongfont{\glsaccesslongpl{##1}}}%  
          }%

        -

        Since the inline full commands aren’t redefined, they default to the same as the +

        Since the inline full commands aren’t redefined, they default to the same as the display versions. -

        If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use -


        If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use +


        \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts  \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts{name}

        -

        +

        within ⟨fmts⟩, where ⟨name⟩ is the name of the existing style. For example, the @@ -13451,8 +13472,8 @@ class="cmti-10">fmts⟩:

          \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts{long-short}%
        -

        -

        Here’s an example of an abbreviation style that’s based on

        +

        Here’s an example of an abbreviation style that’s based on long-short that displays @@ -13473,7 +13494,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\textsf:  
          \renewcommand*{\glsabbrvfont}[1]{\textsf{##1}}%  
        }

        -

        Note that this wouldn’t work if it was instead based on one of the modified versions +

        Note that this wouldn’t work if it was instead based on one of the modified versions such as short-sc-longshort-long\glsabbrvfont etc which makes them easier to adapt than the modified styles. -

        For further details, see the “Abbreviations” section in the documented code +

        For further details, see the “Abbreviations” section in the documented code (glossaries-extra-code.pdf).

        -

        -

        +

        Top

        4. Entries in Sectioning Titles, Headers, Captions and Contents

        -

        The

        The glossaries user manual cautions against using commands like \gls in chapter or section titles. The principle problems are:

        @@ -13531,9 +13552,9 @@ class="cmss-10">hyperrefhyperref, you will end up with nested hyperlinks in the table of contents.
      -

      Similar problems can also occur with captions (except for the page header and bookmark +

      Similar problems can also occur with captions (except for the page header and bookmark issues). -

      To get around all these problems, the

      To get around all these problems, the glossaries user manual recommends using the expandable non-hyperlink commands, such as \glsentrytext \chapter{A Chapter about \glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{html}}}

    -

    Or, if you are using

    Or, if you are using hyperref: @@ -13575,8 +13596,8 @@ class="cmss-10">hyperref\texorpdfstring{\glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{html}}}{\glsentryshort{html}}}

    -

    -

    Since this is a bit cumbersome, you might want to define a new command to do +

    +

    Since this is a bit cumbersome, you might want to define a new command to do this for you. However, if you have mixed styles this won’t work as commands like \gls and \MakeUppercase. -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package tries to resolve this by modifying \markright and @@ -13599,20 +13620,20 @@ class="cmtt-10">\markboth and \@starttoc. If you don’t like this change, you can restore their former definitions using -



    \glsxtrRevertMarks  \glsxtrRevertMarks

    -

    +

    If you only want to restore \@starttoc you can use: -



    \glsxtrRevertTocMarks  \glsxtrRevertTocMarks

    -

    +

    If you restore the header or table of contents commands, you’ll have to use the glossaries manual’s recommendations of either simply using \chapter[A Chapter about \glsentryshort{html}]{A Chapter about \gls{html}}

    -

    Alternatively, you need to find a way to insert

    Alternatively, you need to find a way to insert \glsxtrmarkhook and \@glsxtrinmark at the start of the header or table of contents either scoped or afterwards cancelled with \@glsxtrnotinmark and \glsxtrrestoremarkhook. -

    If you don’t revert the mark commands back with

    If you don’t revert the mark commands back with \glsxtrRevertMarks, you can use the commands described below in the argument of sectioning commands. You can still use them even if the mark commands have been reverted, but only where they don’t conflict with the page style. -

    The commands listed below all use

    The commands listed below all use \texorpdfstring if hyperref

    These commands essentially behave as though you have used

    These commands essentially behave as though you have used \glsxtrshort (or equivalent) with the options noindexheaduc attribute to “true” for the appropriate category. -

    If you use one of the

    If you use one of the \textsc styles, be aware that the default fonts don’t provide bold small-caps or italic small-caps. This means that if the chapter @@ -13678,239 +13699,239 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont. You may want to consider using the slantsc package in this case.
    -

    -

    Display the short form: -


    +

    Display the short form: +


    \glsfmtshort  \glsfmtshort{label}

    -

    -

    Display the plural short form: -


    +

    Display the plural short form: +


    \glsfmtshortpl  \glsfmtshortpl{label}

    -

    -

    First letter upper case singular short form: -


    +

    First letter upper case singular short form: +


    \Glsfmtshort  \Glsfmtshort{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    First letter upper case plural short form: +

    First letter upper case plural short form: -



    \Glsfmtshortpl  \Glsfmtshortpl{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    Display the long form: -


    Display the long form: +


    \glsfmtlong  \glsfmtlong{label}

    -

    -

    Display the plural long form: -


    +

    Display the plural long form: +


    \glsfmtlongpl  \glsfmtlongpl{label}

    -

    -

    First letter upper case singular long form: -


    +

    First letter upper case singular long form: +


    \Glsfmtlong  \Glsfmtlong{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    First letter upper case plural long form: -


    First letter upper case plural long form: +


    \Glsfmtlongpl  \Glsfmtlongpl{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    There are similar commands for the full form, but note that these use the

    There are similar commands for the full form, but note that these use the inline full form, which may be different from the full form used by \gls. -

    Display the full form: -


    Display the full form: +


    \glsfmtfull  \glsfmtfull{label}

    -

    -

    Display the plural full form: -


    +

    Display the plural full form: +


    \glsfmtfullpl  \glsfmtfullpl{label}

    -

    -

    First letter upper case singular full form: -


    +

    First letter upper case singular full form: +


    \Glsfmtfull  \Glsfmtfull{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    First letter upper case plural full form: -


    First letter upper case plural full form: +


    \Glsfmtfullpl  \Glsfmtfullpl{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    There are also equivalent commands for the value of the

    There are also equivalent commands for the value of the text field: -



    \glsfmttext  \glsfmttext{label}

    -

    -

    First letter converted to upper case: -


    +

    First letter converted to upper case: +


    \Glsfmttext  \Glsfmttext{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    The plural equivalents: +

    The plural equivalents: -



    \glsfmtplural  \glsfmtplural{label}

    -

    +

    and -



    \Glsfmtplural  \Glsfmtplural{label}

    -

    -

    Likewise for the value of the

    +

    Likewise for the value of the name field: -



    \glsfmtname  \glsfmtname{label}

    -

    -

    First letter converted to upper case: -


    +

    First letter converted to upper case: +


    \Glsfmtname  \Glsfmtname{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    Similarly for the value of the

    Similarly for the value of the first field: -



    \glsfmtfirst  \glsfmtfirst{label}

    -

    -

    First letter converted to upper case: -


    +

    First letter converted to upper case: +


    \Glsfmtfirst  \Glsfmtfirst{label}

    -

    +

    (No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.) -

    The plural equivalents: -


    The plural equivalents: +


    \glsfmtfirstpl  \glsfmtfirstpl{label}

    -

    +

    and -



    \Glsfmtfirstpl  \Glsfmtfirstpl{label}

    -

    +

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    5. Categories

    -

    Each entry defined by

    Each entry defined by \newglossaryentry (or commands that internally use it such as babel shorthands on that make some characters active.) -

    The use of categories can give you more control over the way entries are displayed +

    The use of categories can give you more control over the way entries are displayed in the text or glossary. Note that an entry’s category is independent of the glossary type. Be careful not to confuse category with type. -

    The default category assumed by

    The default category assumed by \newglossaryentry is labelled general. @@ -13944,7 +13965,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\newacronym have the category set to acronym by default. -

    Additionally, if you have enabled

    Additionally, if you have enabled \newterm with the numbersnumber. -

    You can obtain the category label for a given entry using -


    You can obtain the category label for a given entry using +


    \glscategory  \glscategory{label}

    -

    +

    This is equivalent to commands like \glsentryname and so may be used in an expandable context. No error is generated if the entry doesn’t exist. -

    You can test the category for a given entry using -


    You can test the category for a given entry using +


    \glsifcategory  part}{false part}

    -

    +

    This is equivalent to

    }
    so any restrictions that apply to \ifglsfieldeq also apply to \glsifcategory. -

    Each category may have a set of attributes. For example, the

    Each category may have a set of attributes. For example, the general and acronym\glsentryfmt to determine whether to use \glsgenentryfmt or \glsxtrgenabbrvfmt. -

    Other attributes recognised by

    Other attributes recognised by glossaries-extra are:

    \glsfirst use for entries with a category that has this attribute set to “true”. (This settings can be overridden by explicitly setting the hyper key on - or off in the optional argument of commands like \gls.) As from version 1.07, - + key on or off in the optional argument of commands like \gls.) As + from version 1.07, \glsfirst, \Glsfirst, \GLSfirst and their plural versions (which should - ideally behave in a similar way to the first use of \GLSfirst and their plural + versions (which should ideally behave in a similar way to the first use of + \gls or \glspl) now honour - this attribute (but not the package-wide \glspl) now honour this attribute (but not the package-wide + hyperfirst=false option, which - matches the behaviour of option, which matches the behaviour of glossaries). If you want commands these - \glsfirst etc commands to ignore the ). If you want + commands like \glsfirst to ignore the nohyperfirst attribute then just redefine -



    \glsxtrchecknohyperfirst  \glsxtrchecknohyperfirst{label}

    -

    +

    to do nothing.

    \newacronym if it’s using \newabbreviation.) This attribute doesn’t apply to the accessibility fields. -

    Note that this can cause a problem if you access a field that doesn’t end with a +

    Note that this can cause a problem if you access a field that doesn’t end with a full stop. For example: @@ -14158,7 +14179,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation.) This attribute doesn’t apply to  
     {dante}{DANTE e.V.}{Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\  
    e.V.}

    -

    Here the

    Here the short and longuser1 \glsuseri{dante}[.]

    -

    This will bring the punctuation character inside the

    This will bring the punctuation character inside the link-text and it won’t be discarded. @@ -14230,21 +14251,21 @@ class="description">If this attribute is set to “true” any entry def class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation will automatically have spaces in the long form replaced with -



    \glsxtrwordsep  \glsxtrwordsep

    -

    +

    and each word is encapsulated with -



    \glsxtrword  \glsxtrword{word}

    -

    +

    For example: @@ -14254,7 +14275,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">}


    \glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{markwords}{true}  
    \newabbreviation{ip}{IP}{Internet Protocol}
    -

    is essentially the same as +

    is essentially the same as @@ -14263,7 +14284,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">}


    \newabbreviation{ip}{IP}  
    {\glsxtrword{Internet}\glsxtrwordsep\glsxtrword{Protocol}}
    -

    The “hyphen” styles, such as

    The “hyphen” styles, such as long-hyphen-short-hyphen, take advantage of this @@ -14285,20 +14306,20 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong. You can provide your own \newcommand{\hyplong}[2][]{%  
     {\def\glsxtrwordsep{-}\glsxtrlong[#1]{#2}}}

    -

    -

    This setting will also adjust the long plural. This attribute is only applicable to +

    +

    This setting will also adjust the long plural. This attribute is only applicable to entries defined using \newabbreviation (or \newacronym if it’s using \newabbreviation.) -

    This setting may result in the

    This setting may result in the \glsxtrword and \glsxtrwordsep markup ending up in the sort field, depending on the style in use.
    -

    +

    \newabbreviation (or \newacronym if it’s using \newabbreviation.) -

    This setting will only adjust the short plural if the

    This setting will only adjust the short plural if the shortplural key isn’t used. This setting will take precedence over insertdots. -

    This setting may result in the

    This setting may result in the \glsxtrword and \glsxtrwordsep markup ending up in the sort field, depending on the style in use.
    -

    +

    \newabbreviation (or \newacronym if it’s using \newabbreviation.) -

    If you explicitly override the short plural using the

    If you explicitly override the short plural using the shortplural key, you must explicitly insert the dots yourself (since there’s no way for the code to determine if the plural has a suffix that shouldn’t be followed by a dot).
    -

    +

    -

    This attribute is best used with the

    This attribute is best used with the discardperiod attribute set to “true”. @@ -14449,7 +14470,7 @@ class="cmss-10">short\newabbreviation[category=initialism]{pi}{PI}{Private Investigator}

    -

    This setting will be overridden by an explicit use of the

    This setting will be overridden by an explicit use of the shortaccess key in the optional argument of \glsxtrifcounttrigger\cgls should behave. -

    With

    With glossaries, commands like \cgls use \cglsformat only if the previous @@ -14679,7 +14700,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\capitalisewordsmfirstuc). If you want to use a different command you can redefine: -



    \glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs  \glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs{phrase cs}

    -

    +

    For example: @@ -14696,7 +14717,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">}

    \newcommand*{\glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs}[1]{\xcapitalisefmtwords*{#1}}
    -

    (Note that the argument to

    (Note that the argument to \glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs will be a control sequence whose replacement text is the entry’s description, which is why \xcapitalisefmtwords is needed instead of \capitalisefmtwords.)

    -

    Any other values of this attribute are ignored. Remember that there are design +

    Any other values of this attribute are ignored. Remember that there are design limitations for both the first letter uppercasing and the title casing commands. See the mfirstuc\glossentrydesc \glssetcategoryattribute{general}{glossdescfont}{emph}

    -

    +

    \glossentryname \glssetcategoryattribute{general}{glossnamefont}{emph}
    -

    Note that this overrides

    Note that this overrides \glsnamefont which will only be used if this attribute hasn’t been set. -

    Remember that glossary styles may additionally apply a font change, +

    Remember that glossary styles may additionally apply a font change, such as the list styles which put the name in the optional argument of \item. @@ -14844,7 +14865,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\gls will be set to the

    \glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targeturl}{master-doc.pdf}
    -

    (See also the accompanying sample file

    (See also the accompanying sample file sample-external.tex.) If the URL contains awkward characters (such as % or \glspercentchar and \glstildechar that expand to literal characters. -

    If you want to a named anchor within the target URL (notionally adding +

    If you want to a named anchor within the target URL (notionally adding #name⟩ to the URL), then you also need to set \glslabel within ⟨name⟩ which is set by commands like \gls to the entry’s label. -

    All the predefined glossary styles start each entry listing with

    All the predefined glossary styles start each entry listing with \glstarget which sets the anchor to \glolinkprefix\glslabel, so if you want @@ -14884,10 +14905,10 @@ class="cmss-10">targeturl \glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetname}{\glolinkprefix\glslabel}

    -

    (If the target document changed

    (If the target document changed \glolinkprefix then you will need to adjust the above as appropriate.) -

    If the anchor is in the form ⟨

    If the anchor is in the form ⟨name1.name2⟩ then use targetcategory for the ⟨name1⟩ part. -

    For example: +

    For example: @@ -14910,11 +14931,11 @@ class="cmti-10">name1⟩ part.  
    \glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetcategory}{page}  
    \glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetname}{7}

    -

    will cause all link text for

    will cause all link text for general entries to link to master-doc.pdf#page.7 (page 7 of that PDF). -

    If you want a mixture in your document of entries that link to an internal +

    If you want a mixture in your document of entries that link to an internal glossary and entries that link to an external URL then you can use the starred form of \newignoredglossary\newignoredglossary  category=external,  
      description={external example}}

    -

    +

    Entry Indexing). In it’s better to use bib2gls v1.7+ which can handle multiple external sources +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls v1.7+ which can handle multiple external sources and doesn’t require this attribute. -

    An attribute can be set using: -


    An attribute can be set using: +


    \glssetcategoryattribute  \glssetcategoryattribute{category-label} @@ -14966,31 +14986,31 @@ class="cmitt-10">attribute-label}{value}

    -

    +

    where ⟨category-label⟩ is the category label, ⟨attribute-label⟩ is the attribute label and ⟨value⟩ is the new value for the attribute. -

    There is a shortcut version to set the

    There is a shortcut version to set the regular attribute to “true”: -


    attribute to “true”: +


    \glssetregularcategory  \glssetregularcategory{category-label}

    -

    -

    If you need to lookup the category label for a particular entry, you can use the +

    +

    If you need to lookup the category label for a particular entry, you can use the shortcut command: -



    \glssetattribute  \glssetattribute{entry-label}{} class="cmtt-10">{value}

    -

    +

    This uses \glssetcategoryattribute with \glscategory to set the attribute. Note that this will affect all other entries that share this entry’s category. -

    You can fetch the value of an attribute for a particular category using: -


    You can fetch the value of an attribute for a particular category using: +


    \glsgetcategoryattribute  \glsgetcategoryattribute{category-label} @@ -15020,25 +15040,25 @@ class="cmtt-10">}

    -

    +

    Again there is a shortcut if you need to lookup the category label for a given entry: -



    \glsgetattribute  \glsgetattribute{entry-label}{attribute-label}

    -

    -

    You can test if an attribute has been assigned to a given category using: -


    +

    You can test if an attribute has been assigned to a given category using: +


    \glshascategoryattribute  \glshascategoryattribute{category-label} @@ -15050,19 +15070,19 @@ class="cmitt-10">true code}{false code}

    -

    +

    This uses etoolbox’s ’s \ifcsvoid and does ⟨true code⟩ if the attribute has been set and isn’t blank and isn’t \relax. The shortcut if you need to lookup the category label from an entry is: -



    \glshasattribute  \glshasattribute{entry-label}{code}{false code}

    -

    -

    You can test the value of an attribute for a particular category using: -


    +

    You can test the value of an attribute for a particular category using: +


    \glsifcategoryattribute  \glsifcategoryattribute{category-label} @@ -15093,7 +15113,7 @@ class="cmitt-10">true-part}{false-part}

    -

    +

    This tests if the attribute (given by ⟨attribute-label⟩) for the category (given by ⟨true-part⟩ is done. If the attribute isn’t set or is set but isn’t equal to ⟨value⟩, ⟨false part⟩ is done. -

    For example: +

    For example: @@ -15111,27 +15131,27 @@ class="cmti-10">false part⟩ is done.

    \glsifcategoryattribute{general}{nohyper}{true}{NO HYPER}{HYPER}
    -

    This does “NO HYPER” if the

    This does “NO HYPER” if the general category has the category has the nohyper attribute set to + id="dx1-29172"> attribute set to true otherwise if does “HYPER”. -

    With boolean-style attributes like

    With boolean-style attributes like nohyper, make sure you always test for , make sure you always test for true not false in case the attribute hasn’t been set. -

    Again there’s a shortcut if you need to lookup the category label from a particular +

    Again there’s a shortcut if you need to lookup the category label from a particular entry: -



    \glsifattribute  \glsifattribute{entry-label}{true-part} {false-part}

    -

    -

    There’s also a shortcut to determine if a particular category has the

    +

    There’s also a shortcut to determine if a particular category has the regular + id="dx1-29175"> attribute set to “true”: -



    \glsifregularcategory  \glsifregularcategory{category-label} @@ -15164,12 +15184,12 @@ class="cmitt-10">true-part}{false-part}

    -

    +

    Alternatively, if you need to lookup the category for a particular entry: -



    \glsifregular  \glsifregular{entry-label}{}{false-part}

    -

    +

    Note that if the regular attribute hasn’t be set, the above do ⟨ attribute hasn’t be set, the above do ⟨false-part⟩. There are also reverse commands that test if the regular attribute has been set to + id="dx1-29179"> attribute has been set to “false”: -



    \glsifnotregularcategory  \glsifnotregularcategory{category-label} @@ -15202,12 +15222,12 @@ class="cmitt-10">true-part}{false-part}

    -

    +

    or for a particular entry: -



    \glsifnotregular  \glsifnotregular{entry-label}{}{false-part}

    -

    +

    Again, if the regular attribute hasn’t been set, the above do ⟨ attribute hasn’t been set, the above do ⟨false-part⟩, so these reverse commands aren’t logically opposite in the strict sense. -

    You can iterate through all entries with a given category using: -


    You can iterate through all entries with a given category using: +


    \glsforeachincategory[glossary-labels]{label-cs}{body}

    -

    +

    This iterates through all entries in the glossaries identified by the comma-separated list ⟨glossary-labels⟩ that have the category given by ⟨

    Similarly, you can iterate through all entries that have a category with a given +

    Similarly, you can iterate through all entries that have a category with a given attribute using: -



    \glsforeachwithattribute  \glsforeachwithattribute[glossary-labels] @@ -15276,42 +15296,42 @@ class="cmtt-10">}{body}

    -

    +

    This will do ⟨body⟩ for each entry that has a category with the attribute ⟨attribute-label⟩ set to ⟨attribute-value⟩. The remaining arguments are as the previous command. -

    You can change the category for a particular entry using the standard glossary +

    You can change the category for a particular entry using the standard glossary field changing commands, such as \glsfielddef. Alternatively, you can + id="dx1-29184">. Alternatively, you can use -



    \glsxtrsetcategory  \glsxtrsetcategory{entry-labels}{category-label}

    -

    +

    This will change the category to ⟨category-label⟩ for each entry listed in the comma-separated list ⟨entry-labels⟩. This command uses \glsfieldxdef so it will + id="dx1-29186"> so it will expand ⟨category-label⟩ and make the change global. -

    You can also change the category for all entries with a glossary or glossaries +

    You can also change the category for all entries with a glossary or glossaries using: -



    \glsxtrsetcategoryforall  \glsxtrsetcategoryforall{glossary-labels} @@ -15319,18 +15339,18 @@ class="cmtt-10">} class="cmtt-10">{⟨category-label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨glossary-labels⟩ is a comma-separated list of glossary labels.

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    6. Counting References

    -

    There are three basic ways of counting entry references: +

    There are three basic ways of counting entry references:

    1. Counting the total number of times glossaries class="cmtt-10">.aux file so that it’s available on the next LATEX run. -

      This method is extended by

      This method is extended by glossaries-extra and is described in §6.1 Entry bib2gls and is intended for documents where the term should be displayed +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls and is intended for documents where the term should be displayed differently if it’s only been recorded (indexed) a certain number of times. See §9.5 Record Counting for further details.

    2. Counting the number of times the Counting the number of times the \gls-like or \glstext-like commands are used. (That is, those commands that internally use @@ -15382,10 +15401,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glslinkpresetkeys. See §6.2 Link Counting for further details.
    -

    Top

    6.1 Entry Counting (First Use Flag)

    -

    As mentioned in

    As mentioned in §2.4 Entry Counting Modifications, §5 Categories). -

    Remember that entry counting only counts the number of times an entry is used +

    Remember that entry counting only counts the number of times an entry is used by commands that change the first use flag. (That is, all those commands that mark the entry as having been used.) There are many commands that don’t modify this flag and they won’t contribute to the entry use count.
    -

    -

    With

    +

    With glossaries-extra, you may use \cgls instead of shortcuts=acro). -

    All upper case versions (not provided by

    All upper case versions (not provided by glossaries) are also available: -



    \cGLS  label}[insert]

    -

    +

    and -



    \cGLSpl  label}[insert]

    -

    +

    These are analogous to \cgls and \cglspl but they use -



    \cGLSformat  label}{insert}

    -

    +

    and -



    \cGLSplformat  label}{insert}

    -

    +

    which convert the analogous \cglsformat and \cglsplformat to upper case. -

    Just using

    Just using glossaries: @@ -15535,8 +15554,8 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries:  
    \printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    -

    If you switch to

    +

    If you switch to glossaries-extra you must set the entrycountentrycount\printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    -

    When activated with

    +

    When activated with \glsenableentrycount, commands such as \cgls now use -



    \glsxtrifcounttrigger  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨normal code}

    -

    +

    to determine if the entry trips the entry count trigger. The ⟨trigger code⟩ uses commands like trigger code⟩ but the usual \gls behaviour in ⟨normal code⟩). -

    The default definition is: +

    The default definition is: @@ -15612,7 +15631,7 @@ class="cmti-10">normal code⟩).  
     {#3}%  
    }

    -

    This means that if an entry is assigned to a category that has the

    This means that if an entry is assigned to a category that has the entrycount @@ -15620,7 +15639,7 @@ attribute then the ⟨trigger code⟩ will be used if the previous count value (the number of times the entry was used on the last run) is greater than the value of the attribute. -

    For example, to trigger normal use if the previous count value is greater than +

    For example, to trigger normal use if the previous count value is greater than four: @@ -15629,8 +15648,8 @@ four:

    \glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{entrycount}{4}
    -

    -

    There is a convenient command provided to enable entry counting, set the +

    +

    There is a convenient command provided to enable entry counting, set the entrycount\gls, etc to use \cgls etc: -



    \GlsXtrEnableEntryCounting  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨value}

    -

    +

    The first argument ⟨categories⟩ is a comma-separated list of categories. For each category, the value⟩. In addition, this does:  
    \renewcommand*{\GLS}{\cGLS}%  
    \renewcommand*{\GLSpl}{\cGLSpl}%

    -

    This makes it easier to enable entry-counting on existing documents. -

    If you use

    This makes it easier to enable entry-counting on existing documents. +

    If you use \GlsXtrEnableEntryCounting more than once, subsequent uses will just set the entrycount attribute for each listed category. -

    The above example document can then become: +

    The above example document can then become: @@ -15695,12 +15714,12 @@ class="cmss-10">entrycount\printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    -

    The standard entry-counting function describe above counts the number of times +

    +

    The standard entry-counting function describe above counts the number of times an entry has been marked as used throughout the document. (The reset commands will reset the total back to zero.) If you prefer to count per sectional-unit, you can use -



    \GlsXtrEnableEntryUnitCounting  value}{counter-name}

    -

    +

    where ⟨categories⟩ is a comma-separated list of categories to which this feature should be applied, ⟨value⟩ is the trigger value and ⟨counter-name⟩ is the name of the counter used by the sectional unit. -

    Due to the asynchronous nature of T

    Due to the asynchronous nature of TEX’s output routine, discrepancies will occur in page spanning paragraphs if you use the page counter.
    -

    -

    Note that you can’t use both the document-wide counting and the per-unit +

    +

    Note that you can’t use both the document-wide counting and the per-unit counting in the same document. -

    The counter value is used as part of a label, which means that

    The counter value is used as part of a label, which means that \thecounter-name⟩ needs to be expandable. Since \theHcounter-name⟩ if it exists otherwise it will use \thecounter-name⟩. -

    The per-unit counting function uses two attributes:

    The per-unit counting function uses two attributes: entrycount (as before) and @@ -15754,53 +15773,53 @@ class="cmss-10">entrycountunitcount (the name of the counter). -

    Both the original document-wide counting mechanism and the per-unit counting +

    Both the original document-wide counting mechanism and the per-unit counting mechanism provide a command that can be used to access the current count value for this run: -



    \glsentrycurrcount  \glsentrycurrcount{label}

    -

    +

    and the final value from the previous run: -



    \glsentryprevcount  \glsentryprevcount{label}

    -

    +

    In the case of the per-unit counting, this is the final value for the current unit. In both commands ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. -

    The per-unit counting mechanism additionally provides: -


    The per-unit counting mechanism additionally provides: +


    \glsentryprevtotalcount  \glsentryprevtotalcount{label}

    -

    +

    which gives the sum of all the per-unit totals from the previous run for the entry given by ⟨label⟩, and -



    \glsentryprevmaxcount  \glsentryprevmaxcount{label}

    -

    +

    which gives the maximum per-unit total from the previous run. -

    The above two commands are unavailable for the document-wide counting. -

    Example of per-unit counting, where the unit is the chapter: +

    The above two commands are unavailable for the document-wide counting. +

    Example of per-unit counting, where the unit is the chapter: @@ -15824,7 +15843,7 @@ which gives the maximum per-unit total from the previous run.  
    \printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    In this document, the

    In this document, the css entry is used three times in the first chapter. This is more than the trigger value of 2, so \gls{css} is expanded on \gls{css} doesn’t get a line added to the glossary file. -

    The

    The html is used a total of three times, but the expansion and indexing suppression trigger is tripped in both chapters because the per-unit total (1 for the first chapter and 2 for the second chapter) is less than or equal to the trigger value. -

    The

    The sample entry has only been used once, but it doesn’t trip the indexing suppression because it’s in the general\GlsXtrEnableEntryUnitCounting. -

    The per-unit entry counting can be used for other purposes. In the following +

    The per-unit entry counting can be used for other purposes. In the following example document the trigger value is set to zero, which means the index suppression won’t be triggered, but the unit entry count is used to automatically suppress the hyperlink for commands like \gls by modifying the hook -



    \glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook  \glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook

    -

    +

    which is used at the end of the macro the determines whether or not to suppress the hyperlink. @@ -15892,22 +15911,22 @@ hyperlink.  
    \printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    This only produces a hyperlink for the first instance of

    This only produces a hyperlink for the first instance of \gls{sample} on each page. -

    The earlier warning about using the

    The earlier warning about using the page counter still applies. If the first instance of \gls occurs at the top of the page within a paragraph that started on the previous page, then the count will continue from the previous page. -

    +

    -

    Top

    6.2 Link Counting

    -

    As from version 1.26, an alternative method of entry counting is to count the number +

    As from version 1.26, an alternative method of entry counting is to count the number @@ -15923,8 +15942,8 @@ class="cmtt-10">\hyperlink when displaying the link-text.) -

    To enable link counting use the preamble-only command: -


    To enable link counting use the preamble-only command: +


    \GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting  ] class="cmtt-10">{⟨categories}

    -

    +

    where ⟨categories⟩ is a list of category labels. The optional argument ⟨master @@ -15951,18 +15970,18 @@ href="#catattr.linkcountmaster">linkcountmaster attribute. -

    When enabled, commands like

    When enabled, commands like \gls and \glstext increment the associated counter using -



    \glsxtrinclinkcounter  \glsxtrinclinkcounter{counter name}

    -

    +

    This just does \stepcounter{counter name\refstepcounter instead, just redefine this command:

    \renewcommand*{\glsxtrinclinkcounter}[1]{\refstepcounter{#1}}
    -

    -

    You can access the internal count register using -


    +

    You can access the internal count register using +


    \GlsXtrLinkCounterValue  \GlsXtrLinkCounterValue{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. This will expand to 0 if the counter hasn’t been defined. -

    It’s also possible to access the display value (

    It’s also possible to access the display value (\thecounter⟩) using -



    \GlsXtrTheLinkCounter  \GlsXtrTheLinkCounter{counter}

    -

    +

    (This will expand to 0 if the counter hasn’t been defined.) -

    In order to conserve resources, the counter is only defined when it first +

    In order to conserve resources, the counter is only defined when it first needs to be incremented so terms that have been defined but haven’t been used in the document won’t have the associated count register allocated.
    -

    -

    You can test if the counter has been defined using: -


    +

    You can test if the counter has been defined using: +


    \GlsXtrIfLinkCounterDef  }{false}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. -

    The counter name can be obtained using -


    The counter name can be obtained using +


    \GlsXtrLinkCounterName  \GlsXtrLinkCounterName{label}

    -

    +

    This simply expands to the counter name associated with the entry given by ⟨label⟩ without any check for existence. For example, to change the display command @@ -16046,7 +16065,7 @@ class="cmss-10">etoolbox \csdef{the\GlsXtrLinkCounterName{duck}}{\Roman{\GlsXtrLinkCounterName{duck}}}

    -

    This is useful if you just want to change the display for specific entries but isn’t +

    This is useful if you just want to change the display for specific entries but isn’t convenient if you want to change the display for all entries. Instead, it’s simpler to redefine \GlsXtrTheLinkCounter. For example: @@ -16061,9 +16080,9 @@ class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrTheLinkCounter. For example:  
     {0}%  
    }

    -

    In both cases, the redefinition should be implemented after

    In both cases, the redefinition should be implemented after \GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting. -

    Here’s an example document that uses link counting to disable the hyperlink after +

    Here’s an example document that uses link counting to disable the hyperlink after the first reference. This redefines \glslinkpresetkeys (which is used by both \glstext).  
    \printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    The use of

    The use of \glslinkpresetkeys means that the options can override this. For example @@ -16112,7 +16131,7 @@ example

    \gls[hyper=true]{sample1}
    -

    will override the

    will override the hyper=false setting in \glslinkpresetkeys. If \glslinkpostsetkeyshyper=false setting will override the setting provided in the optional argument. -

    The

    The abbreviation category doesn’t have the \ifnum\GlsXtrLinkCounterValue{\glslabel}>1

    -

    will always be false. This means that the abbreviation won’t have

    will always be false. This means that the abbreviation won’t have hyper=false applied. If the test is changed to @@ -16153,9 +16172,9 @@ applied. If the test is changed to  
     \setkeys{glslink}{hyper=false}%  
    \fi

    -

    Then the abbreviation will always have

    Then the abbreviation will always have hyper=false applied. -

    To reset the counter every section use the optional argument to set the master +

    To reset the counter every section use the optional argument to set the master counter: @@ -16164,16 +16183,16 @@ counter:

    \GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting[section]{general}
    -

    +

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    7. Auto-Indexing

    -

    It’s possible that you may also want a normal index as well as the glossary, +

    It’s possible that you may also want a normal index as well as the glossary, and you may want entries to automatically be added to the index (as in this document). There are two attributes that govern this: indexnamedualindex. -

    The auto-indexing is designed for

    The auto-indexing is designed for makeindex syntax. If you’ve used the makeindex’s defaults) that can’t be customize to consider using bib2gls and its dual entries as an alternative approach. +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls and its dual entries as an alternative approach.
    -

    -

    The

    +

    The \glsxtrpostnamehook macro, used at the end of macro, used at the end of \glossentryname and + id="dx1-33011"> and \Glossentryname, checks the , checks the indexname attribute for the category associated with + id="dx1-33013"> attribute for the category associated with that entry. Since \glossentryname is used in the default glossary styles, this makes a convenient way of automatically indexing each entry name at its location in the glossary without fiddling around with the value of the name + id="dx1-33014"> key. -

    The internal macro used by the

    The internal macro used by the glossaries package to write the information to the external glossary file is modified to check for the dualindex attribute. -

    In both cases, the indexing is done through -


    attribute. +

    In both cases, the indexing is done through +


    \glsxtrdoautoindexname  \glsxtrdoautoindexname{label}{attribute-label}

    -

    +

    This uses the standard \index command with the sort value taken from the entry’s + id="dx1-33017"> command with the sort value taken from the entry’s sort key and the actual value set to key and the actual value set to \glsentryname{label}. As from v1.16, there are user-level commands available to change the sort and actual value used by the automated index. -

    The actual value is given by -


    The actual value is given by +


    \glsxtrautoindexentry  \glsxtrautoindexentry{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. The default definition is: @@ -16276,22 +16294,22 @@ class="cmti-10">label⟩ is the entry’s label. The default def

    \newcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexentry}[1]{\string\glsentryname{#1}}
    -

    Note the use of

    Note the use of \string to prevent \glsentryname from being expanded as it’s written to the index file. -

    The sort value is assigned using: -


    The sort value is assigned using: +


    \glsxtrautoindexassignsort  \glsxtrautoindexassignsort{cs}{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry label and ⟨cs⟩ is the command which needs to be set to the @@ -16305,48 +16323,48 @@ sort value. The default definition is:  
      \glsletentryfield{#1}{#2}{sort}%  
    }

    -

    After this macro is called, ⟨

    After this macro is called, ⟨cs⟩ is then processed to escape any of makeindex’s special + id="dx1-33021">’s special characters. Note that this escaping is only performed on the sort not on the actual value. The escaping of the sort value is performed by -



    \glsxtrautoindexesc  \glsxtrautoindexesc

    -

    +

    You can redefine this to do nothing if you want to omit the escaping. You may want to consider providing another field to obtain the appropriate sort value if the one provided in the sort field isn’t suitable (because it may already have had special + id="dx1-33023"> field isn’t suitable (because it may already have had special characters escaped or it may be a numeric value in the case of sort by use or definition). -

    The command used to perform the actual indexing is: -


    The command used to perform the actual indexing is: +


    \glsxtrautoindex  \glsxtrautoindex{text}

    -

    +

    This just does \index{text} by default. -

    The entry’s

    The entry’s parent field isn’t referenced in this automated indexing. + id="dx1-33025"> field isn’t referenced in this automated indexing.
    -

    -

    For example, to index the value of the

    +

    For example, to index the value of the first key, instead of the key, instead of the name key: + id="dx1-33027"> key: @@ -16354,12 +16372,12 @@ class="cmss-10">name \renewcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexentry}[1]{\string\glsentryfirst{#1}}

    -

    and if the sort value also needs to be set to the

    and if the sort value also needs to be set to the long field, if present, otherwise the + id="dx1-33028"> field, if present, otherwise the sort field: + id="dx1-33029"> field: @@ -16371,8 +16389,8 @@ class="cmss-10">sort  {\glsletentryfield{#1}{#2}{sort}}%  
    }

    -

    -

    If the value of the attribute given by ⟨

    +

    If the value of the attribute given by ⟨attribute-label⟩ is “true”, no encap will be added, otherwise the encap will be the attribute value. For example: @@ -16382,7 +16400,7 @@ added, otherwise the encap will be the attribute value. For example:

    \glssetcategoryattribute{general}{indexname}{textbf}
    -

    will set the encap to

    will set the encap to textbf which will display the relevant page number in bold whereas @@ -16392,133 +16410,133 @@ whereas

    \glssetcategoryattribute{general}{dualindex}{true}
    -

    won’t apply any formatting to the page number in the index. -

    The location used in the index will always be the page number not the counter +

    won’t apply any formatting to the page number in the index. +

    The location used in the index will always be the page number not the counter used in the glossary. (Unless some other loaded package has modified the definition of \index to use some thing else.)
    -

    -

    By default the

    +

    By default the format key won’t be used with the key won’t be used with the dualindex attribute. You can + id="dx1-33031"> attribute. You can allow the format key to override the attribute value by using the preamble-only + id="dx1-33032"> key to override the attribute value by using the preamble-only command: -



    \GlsXtrEnableIndexFormatOverride  \GlsXtrEnableIndexFormatOverride

    -

    +

    If you use this command and hyperref has been loaded, then the has been loaded, then the theindex + id="dx1-33035"> environment will be modified to redefine \glshypernumber to allow formats that use + id="dx1-33037"> to allow formats that use that command. -

    The

    The dualindex attribute will still be used on subsequent use even if the + id="dx1-33038"> attribute will still be used on subsequent use even if the indexonlyfirst attribute (or attribute (or indexonlyfirst package option) is set. However, the package option) is set. However, the dualindex + id="dx1-33041"> attribute will honour the noindex key.
    -

    -

    The key.

    +

    +

    The \glsxtrdoautoindexname command will attempt to escape any of \makeindex’s special characters, but there may be special cases where it fails, so take + id="dx1-33043">’s special characters, but there may be special cases where it fails, so take care. This assumes the default makeindex actual, level, quote and encap values (unless any of the commands \actualchar, , \levelchar, , \quotechar or or \encapchar + id="dx1-33048"> have been defined before glossaries-extra is loaded). -

    If this isn’t the case, you can use the following preamble-only commands to set +

    If this isn’t the case, you can use the following preamble-only commands to set the correct characters. -

    Be very careful of possible shifting category codes!
    -

    -


    Be very careful of possible shifting category codes!
    +

    +


    \GlsXtrSetActualChar  \GlsXtrSetActualChar{char}

    -

    +

    Set the actual character to ⟨char⟩. -



    \GlsXtrSetLevelChar  \GlsXtrSetLevelChar{char}

    -

    +

    Set the level character to ⟨char⟩. -



    \GlsXtrSetEscChar  \GlsXtrSetEscChar{char}

    -

    +

    Set the escape (quote) character to ⟨char⟩. -



    \GlsXtrSetEncapChar  \GlsXtrSetEncapChar{char}

    -

    +

    Set the encap character to ⟨char⟩.

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    8. On-the-Fly Document Definitions

    -

    The commands described here may superficially look like ⟨

    The commands described here may superficially look like ⟨word\index{word\index then just use \index.
    -

    -

    The

    +

    The glossaries package advises against defining entries in the documentglossaries-extra but can be enabled using the href="#styopt.docdefs">docdefs package options. -

    Although this can be problematic, the

    Although this can be problematic, the glossaries-extra package provides a way of defining and using entries within the documentdocdefsThere are limitations with this approach, so take care with it. This function is disabled by default, but can be enabled using the preamble-only command: -



    \GlsXtrEnableOnTheFly  \GlsXtrEnableOnTheFly

    -

    +

    When used, this defines the commands described below. -

    The commands

    The commands \glsxtr, \glsxtrpl, \Glsxtr and \printglossary\gls or there may be unexpected results.
    -

    -


    +


    \glsxtr  dfn-options]{label}

    -

    +

    If an entry with the label ⟨label⟩ has already been defined, this just does \gls @@ -16621,7 +16639,7 @@ class="cmitt-10">dfn-options⟩}

    -

    The ⟨

    The ⟨label⟩ must contain any non-expandable commands, such as formatting commands or problematic characters. If the term requires any of these, they must be omitted from the ⟨name key must be provided in the optional argument ⟨dfn-options⟩.
    -

    +

    -

    The second optional argument ⟨

    The second optional argument ⟨dfn-options⟩ should be empty if the entry has already been defined, since it’s too late for them. If it’s not empty, a warning will be generated with -



    \GlsXtrWarning  dfn-options}{label}

    -

    -

    For example, this warning will be generated on the second instance of

    +

    For example, this warning will be generated on the second instance of \glsxtr below: @@ -16660,8 +16678,8 @@ below:  
     ... later  
    \glsxtr[][plural=geese]{goose}

    -

    -

    If you are considering doing something like: +

    +

    If you are considering doing something like: @@ -16672,14 +16690,14 @@ below:  
     ... later  
    \goose\ some more text here

    -

    then don’t bother. It’s simpler and less problematic to just define the entries in the +

    then don’t bother. It’s simpler and less problematic to just define the entries in the preamble with \newglossaryentry and then use \gls in the document. -

    There are plural and case-changing alternatives to

    There are plural and case-changing alternatives to \glsxtr: -



    \glsxtrpl  dfn-options]{label}

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtr but uses \glspl instead of \gls. -



    \Glsxtr  dfn-options]{label}

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtr but uses \Gls instead of \gls. -



    \Glsxtrpl  dfn-options]{label}

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtr but uses \Glspl instead of \gls. -

    If you use UTF-8 and don’t want the inconvenient of needing to use an +

    If you use UTF-8 and don’t want the inconvenient of needing to use an ASCII-only label, then it’s better to use XƎLATEX or LuaLATEX instead of LATEX (or pdfLATEX). If you really desperately want to use UTF-8 entry labels @@ -16736,24 +16754,24 @@ without switching to X\GlsXtrEnableOnTheFly that allows you to use UTF-8 characters in ⟨label⟩, but it’s experimental and may not work in some cases. -

    If you use the starred version of

    If you use the starred version of \GlsXtrEnableOnTheFly don’t use any commands in the ⟨label⟩, even if they expand to just text.
    -

    +

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    9. bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases

    -

    There is a new command line application called bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases +

    There is a new command line application called bib2gls, which works in much +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls, which works in much the same way as a combination of bibtex and makeindex/\input or \loadglsentries, the entries can instead be stored in a .bib file and bib2gls can + id="dx1-35002">bib2gls can selectively write the appropriate commands to a .glstex file which is loaded using \glsxtrresourcefile (or \GlsXtrLoadResources). -

    This means that you can use a reference managing system, such as JabRef, to +

    This means that you can use a reference managing system, such as JabRef, to maintain the database and it reduces the TEX overhead by only defining the entries that are actually required in the document. If you currently have a .tex file containing glossary definitions to a .bib file using convertgls2bib, supplied with + id="dx1-35003">, supplied with bib2gls.) -

    There are some new commands and options added to bib2gls.) +

    There are some new commands and options added to glossaries-extra to help assist the integration of bib2gls into the document build process. -

    This chapter just provides a general overview of bib2gls. The full details and + id="dx1-35005">bib2gls into the document build process. +

    This chapter just provides a general overview of bib2gls. The full details and some sample documents are provided in the bib2gls bib2gls manual. -

    An example of the contents of

    An example of the contents of .bib file that stores glossary entries that can be extracted with bib2gls: + id="dx1-35008">bib2gls: @@ -16830,8 +16842,8 @@ class="cmtt-10">bib2gls  description={a waterbird with a long neck}  
    }

    -

    -

    The follow provides some abbreviations: +

    +

    The follow provides some abbreviations: @@ -16855,8 +16867,8 @@ class="cmtt-10">bib2gls  description={a simple interpreted server-side scripting language}  
    }

    -

    -

    Here are some symbols: +

    +

    Here are some symbols: @@ -16879,16 +16891,15 @@ preamble{"\providecommand{\mtx}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}"}  
      description={a set}  
    }

    -

    -

    To ensure that

    +

    To ensure that bib2gls can find out which entries have been used in the +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls can find out which entries have been used in the document, you need the record package option: + id="dx1-35010"> package option: @@ -16896,61 +16907,58 @@ class="cmss-10">record \usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}

    -

    If this option’s value is omitted (as above), the normal indexing will be switched off, +

    If this option’s value is omitted (as above), the normal indexing will be switched off, since bib2gls can also sort the entries and collate the locations. -

    If you still want to use an indexing application (for example, you need a custom +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls can also sort the entries and collate the locations. +

    If you still want to use an indexing application (for example, you need a custom xindy rule), then just use record=alsoindex and continue to use and continue to use \makeglossaries and \printglossary (or \printglossaries), but you also need to instruct bib2gls to omit sorting to save time and to prevent the bib2gls to omit sorting to save time and to prevent the sort key from being + id="dx1-35015"> key from being set. -

    The

    The .glstex file created by bib2gls is loaded using: -


    bib2gls is loaded using: +


    \glsxtrresourcefile  \glsxtrresourcefile[options]{filename}

    -

    +

    (Don’t include the file extension in ⟨filename⟩.) There’s a shortcut version (recommended over the above) that sets ⟨filename⟩ to use \jobname: -



    \GlsXtrLoadResources  \GlsXtrLoadResources[options]

    -

    +

    On the first use, this command is a shortcut for

    }
    On subsequent use,9.1 this + id="x1-35019f1"> this command is a shortcut for
    }
    where ⟨n⟩ is the current value of -



    \glsxtrresourcecount

    -

    +

    which is incremented at the end of \GlsXtrLoadResources. Any advisory notes regarding \glsxtrresourcefile also apply to \GlsXtrLoadResources. -

    The

    The \glsxtrresourcefile command writes the line

    filename.glstex if it exists.9.2 + id="x1-35020f2"> -

    Since the

    Since the .glstex file won’t exist on the first LATEX run, the record package + id="dx1-35021"> package option additionally switches on undefaction=warn. Any use of commands like . Any use of commands like \gls or \glstext will produce ?? in the document, since the entries are undefined at this point. Once bib2gls has created the bib2gls has created the .glstex file the references should be resolved. This may cause a shift in the locations if the actual text produced once the entry is defined is significantly larger than the placeholder ?? (as this can alter the page breaking). -

    Note that as from v1.12,

    Note that as from v1.12, \glsxtrresourcefile temporarily switches the category code of @ to 11 (letter) while it reads the file to allow for any internal commands stored in the location field.

    -

    Top

    9.1 Selection

    -

    The default behaviour is for

    The default behaviour is for bib2gls to select all entries that have a record in the +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls to select all entries that have a record in the .aux file, and any dependent entries (including parent and cross-references). The glsignore format (for example, \gls[format=glsignore]{duck}) is recognised by bib2gls as a special ignored record. This means that it will match the selection + id="dx1-36002">bib2gls as a special ignored record. This means that it will match the selection criteria but the record won’t be added to the location list. This means that you won’t get spurious commas in the location list (as can happen with the other indexing methods), so you can do, for example, @@ -17060,7 +17065,7 @@ methods), so you can do, for example,

    \GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{glsignore}
    -

    at the start of the front matter and +

    at the start of the front matter and @@ -17068,27 +17073,24 @@ methods), so you can do, for example,

    \GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{glsnumberformat}
    -

    at the start of the main matter to prevent any records in the front matter from +

    at the start of the main matter to prevent any records in the front matter from occurring in the location lists. -

    Note that commands like

    Note that commands like \glsaddall and \glsaddallunused don’t work with bib2gls as the command has to iterate over the internal lists of +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls as the command has to iterate over the internal lists of defined entry labels, which will be empty on the first run and on subsequent runs will only contain those entries that have been selected by bib2gls. + id="dx1-36004">bib2gls.
    -

    -

    If you want to add all entries to the glossary, you need to tell bib2gls this in the +

    +

    If you want to add all entries to the glossary, you need to tell bib2gls this in the options list. For example: @@ -17097,32 +17099,29 @@ options list. For example:

    \GlsXtrLoadResources[src={terms},selection={all}]
    -

    This will add all entries, regardless of whether or not they have any records in the +

    This will add all entries, regardless of whether or not they have any records in the .aux file. Those that don’t have any records will have an empty location list. See the bib2gls user manual for more details of this option. -

    +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls user manual for more details of this option. +

    -

    Top

    9.2 Sorting and Displaying the Glossary

    -

    There are many sorting options provided by

    There are many sorting options provided by bib2gls. The default is to sort +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls. The default is to sort according to the system locale. If the document has a language setting, you can use sort=doc to instruct bib2gls to sort according to that. (The language tag obtained + id="dx1-37002">bib2gls to sort according to that. (The language tag obtained from tracklang’s interface is written to the ’s interface is written to the .aux file.) For a multilingual document you need to explicitly set the locale using a well-formed language tag. For example: @@ -17136,23 +17135,21 @@ example:  
      sort=de-DE-1996 % sort according to this locale  
    ]

    -

    The locale-sensitive sort methods usually ignore most punctuation so for lists of +

    The locale-sensitive sort methods usually ignore most punctuation so for lists of symbols you may find it more appropriate to use one of the letter-base sort methods that sort according to the Unicode value of each character. Alternatively you can provide a custom rule. See the bib2gls manual for full details of all the available sort +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls manual for full details of all the available sort methods. -

    Since the

    Since the .glstex file only defines those references required within the document (selected according to the selection option) and the definitions have been written in the order corresponding to bib2gls’s sorted list, the glossaries can simply be + id="dx1-37005">bib2gls’s sorted list, the glossaries can simply be displayed using \printunsrtglossary (or \printunsrtglossaries), described in @@ -17160,7 +17157,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossaries), described in href="#sec:printunsrt">§10.2 Display All Entries Without Sorting or Indexing. -

    Suppose the

    Suppose the .bib examples shown above have been stored in the files terms.bib, EX’s path. Then the document might look like:  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    The document build process (assuming the document is called

    The document build process (assuming the document is called mydoc) is: @@ -17195,7 +17192,7 @@ pdflatex mydoc  
    bib2gls mydoc  
    pdflatex mydoc

    -

    This creates a single glossary containing the entries:

    This creates a single glossary containing the entries: bird, duck, goose, bird, shtml and M entries were added because bib2gls detected (from the bib2gls detected (from the .aux file) that they had been used in the document. The other entries were added because bib2gls detected (from the bib2gls detected (from the .bib files) that they are referenced by the used entries. In the case of duck and goose, they are in the see field for field for bird. In the case of ssi and html, they are referenced in the description field of field of shtml. These cross-referenced entries won’t have a location list when the glossary is first displayed, but depending on how they are referenced, they may pick up a location list on the next document build. -

    The entries can be separated into different glossaries with different sort +

    The entries can be separated into different glossaries with different sort methods: @@ -17256,8 +17251,8 @@ methods:  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    -

    Or you can have multiple instance of

    +

    Or you can have multiple instance of \GlsXtrLoadResources with the same type, which will produce a glossary with ordered sub-blocks. For example: @@ -17283,13 +17278,12 @@ class="cmtt-10">type, which will produce a glossary with ordered sub-bloc  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    This will result in a glossary where the first group has the title “Abbreviations”, the +

    This will result in a glossary where the first group has the title “Abbreviations”, the second group has the title “Symbols” and then follow the usual letter groups. Note that for this example to work, you must run bib2gls with the bib2gls with the --group (or -g) switch. For example, if the document is called bib2gls -g myDoc  
    pdflatex myDoc

    -

    The value of the

    The value of the group field must always be a label. You can set the corresponding + id="dx1-37011"> field must always be a label. You can set the corresponding title with \glsxtrsetgrouptitle (see §2.11 Glossary Style Modifications). If no title is set then the label is used as the group title. -

    You can provide your own custom sort rule. For example, if you are using +

    You can provide your own custom sort rule. For example, if you are using XƎLATEX or LuaLATEX:

    ]
    Remember that if you are using inputenc then extended characters, such as é or ø, + id="dx1-37012"> then extended characters, such as é or ø, are active and will expand when written to the .aux file. So with PDFLATEX the @@ -17464,10 +17458,9 @@ class="cmti-10">hex
    ⟩) in the .aux file. bib2gls will recognise this as the +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls will recognise this as the character given by the hexadecimal value ⟨hex⟩. The \u also needs protection from @@ -17476,7 +17469,7 @@ written as \string\uE6 and so on. This is quite cumbersome, but you can use the shortcut \glshex E6 instead, so the above needs to be written as:
    @@ -17612,13 +17605,13 @@ class="cmsy-10">}]
    -

    +

    -

    Top

    9.3 The glossaries-extra-bib2gls package

    -

    The package option

    The package option record=onlyglossaries-extra-bib2glsbib2gls. The package isn’t loaded by bib2gls. The package isn’t loaded by record=alsoindex as that option + id="dx1-38005"> as that option is intended for sorting with makeindex or xindy and it is expected that the sorting will be switched off (with the resource option sort=none). -

    If

    If glossaries-extra-bib2gls is loaded via the is loaded via the record package option then the + id="dx1-38009"> package option then the check for associated language resource files (see §13 script⟩ is the four letter script identifier, such as Latn). -



    \glsxtrprovidecommand  \glsxtrprovidecommand{cs}[] class="cmtt-10">{definition}

    -

    +

    This command is intended for use in @preamble. It’s simply defined to \providecommand in glossaries-extra-bib2gls but bib2gls’s interpreter treats it as + id="dx1-38011"> but bib2gls’s interpreter treats it as \renewcommand. This means that you can override bib2gls’s internal definition of a + id="dx1-38013">bib2gls’s internal definition of a command without overriding the command definition in the document (if it’s already defined before the resource file is input). For example @@ -17704,17 +17694,16 @@ defined before the resource file is input). For example

    @preamble{"\glsxtrprovidecommand{\int}{integral}"}
    -

    This will force

    This will force bib2gls to treat bib2gls to treat \int as the word “integral” to assist sorting but if this preamble code is written to the .glstex file (as it is by default) then it won’t override the current definition (provided by the kernel or redefined by a package). -

    The helper commands in the resource files are defined using

    The helper commands in the resource files are defined using \providecommand. For many of them, if you want to provide an alternative definition then you need to define the command before the resource file is loaded. There are a few that may be @@ -17724,10 +17713,10 @@ first LATEX run when the .glstex file doesn’t exist. In this case, you may prefer to use: -



    \glsrenewcommand  \glsrenewcommand{cs}[]{definition}

    -

    +

    This behaves like \renewcommand but only generates a warning rather than an error if the command isn’t already defined so it won’t interrupt the document build. -



    \GlsXtrIndexCounterLink  \GlsXtrIndexCounterLink{text}{label}

    -

    +

    If the \hyperref command has been defined (that is, command has been defined (that is, hyperref has been + id="dx1-38018"> has been loaded before glossaries-extra) then this command checks for the existence of the text⟩. This command is provided for use with the indexcounter package option combined with bib2gls’s package option combined with bib2gls’s save-index-counter resource option. See the bib2gls manual for further details (at least version + id="dx1-38021">bib2gls manual for further details (at least version 1.4). -

    If you use the

    If you use the set-widest resource option, bib2gls v1.8+ will now + id="dx1-38022">bib2gls v1.8+ will now use: -



    \glsxtrSetWidest  \glsxtrSetWidest{type}{level}{text}

    -

    +

    (if it has been defined) to set the widest name for the given glossary type and level. This allows for both the alttree style and the styles provided by style and the styles provided by glossary-longextra, + id="dx1-38025">, which need to know the widest name. -

    If bib2gls can’t determine the widest name (typically because the name field +

    If bib2gls can’t determine the widest name (typically because the name field consists of commands that aren’t recognised by the interpreter) then bib2gls v1.8+ + id="dx1-38027">bib2gls v1.8+ will now use: -



    \glsxtrSetWidestFallback  \glsxtrSetWidestFallback{max depth}{} -

    +

    (if defined). Currently the maximum hierarchical depth ⟨max depth⟩ may only be 0 or 2. This command requires commands provided by the glossaries-extra-stylemods + id="dx1-38029"> package with the alttree style enabled. In this case, it may be simpler to just use + id="dx1-38030"> style enabled. In this case, it may be simpler to just use \glssetwidest. -

    + id="dx1-38031">. +

    -

    Top

    9.3.1 Supplemental Locations

    -



    \glsxtrdisplaysupploc  src}{location}

    -

    +

    This is used by bib2gls version 1.7+ for supplemental locations, instead of using +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls version 1.7+ for supplemental locations, instead of using \glsxtrsupphypernumber with the externallocation attribute. This command sets up + id="dx1-39003"> attribute. This command sets up the location counter and prefix (used in the formation of hyperlinks) and then uses -



    \glsxtrmultisupplocation  \glsxtrmultisupplocation{location}{} class="cmtt-10">{format}

    -

    +

    to format the actual location (with an external hyperlink, if supported). -

    +

    -

    Top

    9.3.2 Nameref Record

    -

    Normally locations are recorded in the

    Normally locations are recorded in the .aux file in the form: -



    \glsxtr@record{label}{}{location}

    -

    +

    The record=nameref option, which requires at least bib2gls v1.8, instead +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls v1.8, instead uses: -



    \glsxtr@record@nameref{label}{href}{hcounter}

    -

    +

    where ⟨title⟩ is obtained from \@currentlabelname and ⟨href ⟩ is obtained from \@currentHref. These commands require hyperref. If they are undefined, ⟨. If they are undefined, ⟨title⟩ and ⟨href ⟩ will be left empty and bib2gls will treat it as a regular record. -

    Be careful with this option as ⟨bib2gls will treat it as a regular record. +

    Be careful with this option as ⟨href ⟩ will globally change on every instance of \refstepcounter but ⟨title⟩ won’t necessarily change. It can therefore cause unexpected behaviour.
    -

    -

    The final argument ⟨

    +

    The final argument ⟨hcounter⟩ is obtained from \theHcounter⟩ which provides the @@ -17979,15 +17960,15 @@ partial target name associated with the indexing counter. With the original makeindex/xindy approach, it’s not possible to include this information in the location, so the base glossaries package attempts to derive a prefix from which the + id="dx1-40007"> package attempts to derive a prefix from which the ⟨hcounter⟩ value can be reconstituted by appending the prefix. Unfortunately, not all definitions of \thecounter⟩ (most notably the equation counter with chapters) so this can fail. -

    Since counter with chapters) so this can fail. +

    Since bib2gls is customized specifically for use with bib2gls is customized specifically for use with glossaries-extra, it’s now possible to save ⟨hcounter⟩, so the record=nameref option does this. By providing both + id="dx1-40010"> option does this. By providing both ⟨href ⟩ and ⟨hcounter⟩, you can determine which target you would rather use. The default @@ -18021,11 +18001,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">\refstepcounter. However, you may choose to switch to using the ⟨href ⟩ target, which will take you to the nearest target before the indexing took place. -

    With bib2gls v1.8+, normal locations are displayed using: -


    With bib2gls v1.8+, normal locations are displayed using: +


    \glsnoidxdisplayloc{prefix}{format}{location}

    -

    +

    This is provided by the base glossaries package and is simply defined to do: -


    package and is simply defined to do: +


    \setentrycounter[prefix]{}{location}

    -

    +

    Earlier versions of bib2gls only used this in the bib2gls only used this in the loclist field and explicitly used + id="dx1-40014"> field and explicitly used \setentrycounter in the location field followed by field followed by \format{}, which follows the code that’s created with the default makeindex setting. The setting. The \setentrycounter command sets up the prefix needed for \glshypernumber to reform the target name from the given location. -

    The locations identified by

    The locations identified by \glsxtr@record@nameref are written by bib2gls to + id="dx1-40017">bib2gls to the location list using: -



    \glsxtrdisplaylocnameref  \glsxtrdisplaylocnameref{prefix}{hcounter}{file}

    -

    +

    With normal internal locations, ⟨file⟩ will always be empty. With supplemental locations, ⟨file⟩ will be the external file reference. -

    The default definition is: +

    The default definition is: @@ -18130,11 +18107,11 @@ class="cmti-10">file⟩ will be the external file reference.  
      }%  
    }

    -

    which uses: -


    which uses: +


    \glsxtrnamereflink  \glsxtrnamereflink{format}{}{file}

    -

    +

    This ignores the ⟨prefix⟩, ⟨counter⟩ and } arguments and instead creates a hyperlink with the target name obtained from ⟨target⟩ (and ⟨file⟩, if not empty). -

    Since pages and equations typically don’t have titles, the default definition of +

    Since pages and equations typically don’t have titles, the default definition of \glsxtrdisplaylocnameref checks the counter was used as the location. If it’s page + id="dx1-40020"> or if ⟨title⟩ is empty, then just the location is used as the hyperlink text. If the counter equation, then the text is the location in parentheses. Otherwise the text is obtained + id="dx1-40021">, then the text is the location in parentheses. Otherwise the text is obtained from ⟨title⟩. -

    If ⟨

    If ⟨file⟩ is empty an internal link is created with: -



    \glsxtrfmtinternalnameref  \glsxtrfmtinternalnameref{target}{} class="cmtt-10">{title}

    -

    +

    otherwise an external link is created with: -



    \glsxtrfmtexternalnameref  \glsxtrfmtexternalnameref{target}{title}{file}

    -

    +

    The ⟨file⟩ argument is set by bib2gls for supplemental locations. -

    Here’s alternative definition that uses the ⟨bib2gls for supplemental locations. +

    Here’s alternative definition that uses the ⟨prefix⟩ and ⟨counter⟩ to reform the target name (as  \glsxtrnamereflink{#3}{#5}{#6}{#7}%  
    }

    -

    which uses: -


    which uses: +


    \glsxtrnameloclink  \glsxtrnameloclink{prefix}{title}{file}

    -

    +

    This uses the same commands as \glsxtrnamereflink to produce the hyperlinks. -

    In both cases, the link is encapsulated with the text-block command whose +

    In both cases, the link is encapsulated with the text-block command whose name is given by ⟨format⟩, but \glshypernumber is first locally redefined to @@ -18256,11 +18232,10 @@ class="cmti-10">format⟩ is hyperbf then it will simply behave like textbf. -

    For compactness,

    For compactness, bib2gls merges normal records if the ⟨bib2gls merges normal records if the ⟨prefix⟩, ⟨counter⟩ and ⟨location⟩ all match. (An order of precedence can b With nameref records, you can use the --merge-nameref-on switch provided by bib2gls v1.8+ to determine how to merge nameref records. This switch + id="dx1-40027">bib2gls v1.8+ to determine how to merge nameref records. This switch must be followed by one of the following keywords: hcounter (merge on ⟨location class="cmti-10">location⟩, as regular records). In all cases, the ⟨counter⟩ must also match. -

    +

    -

    Top

    9.3.3 Helper Commands for Resource Options

    -



    \glshex  \glshex

    -

    +

    This is just defined as \string\u, which is required when you need to indicate a Unicode character in the form \uhex⟩ in some of the resource options (as illustrated above). -



    \glscapturedgroup  \glscapturedgroup

    -

    +

    This is just defined as \string\$ and is used for the captured group reference in a replacement part of a regular expression substitution (requires at least bib2gls +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls version 1.5). For example: @@ -18321,16 +18294,16 @@ version 1.5). For example:

    sort-replace={{([a-zA-Z])\string\.}{\glscapturedgroup1}}
    -

    This only removes a full stop that follows any of the characters a,…,z or +

    This only removes a full stop that follows any of the characters a,…,z or A,…,Z. -

    If you use the

    If you use the save-child-count resource option, you can test if the childcount field is non-zero using: -



    \GlsXtrIfHasNonZeroChildCount  \GlsXtrIfHasNonZeroChildCount{label} @@ -18340,7 +18313,7 @@ class="cmitt-10">true}{false}

    -

    +

    This internally uses \GlsXtrIfFieldNonZero and will do ⟨false⟩ if the field isn’t set. @@ -18350,41 +18323,39 @@ class="cmti-10">false⟩ you can use \glscurrentfieldvalue to access the value. (It will be 0 in ⟨false⟩ if the field isn’t set.) -

    A convenient shortcut for use in the

    A convenient shortcut for use in the entry-type-aliases setting: -



    \GlsXtrBibTeXEntryAliases  \GlsXtrBibTeXEntryAliases

    -

    +

    This provides aliases for BibTEX’s standard entry types to bib2gls’s bib2gls’s @bibtexentry entry type (requires at least bib2gls version 1.4). -

    You may also want to provide storage keys for BibTbib2gls version 1.4). +

    You may also want to provide storage keys for BibTEX’s standard fields rather than having to alias them all. This can be done with: -



    \GlsXtrProvideBibTeXFields  \GlsXtrProvideBibTeXFields

    -

    +

    Note that BibTEX’s type field clashes with the glossaries package’s package’s type key, so + id="dx1-41010"> key, so this command provides the key bibtextype instead. You can alias it with bibtextype field can be accessed with \glsxtrbibtype. Each of these commands takes the entry label as the sole argument. -

    The

    The glossaries-extra-bib2gls package also provides definitions of the missing + id="dx1-41011"> package also provides definitions of the missing mathematical Greek commands: \Alpha, , \Beta, , \Epsilon, , \Zeta, , \Eta, , \Iota, + id="dx1-41017">, \Kappa, , \Mu, , \Nu, , \Omicron, , \Rho, , \Tau, , \Chi, , \Digamma, , \omicron. These are all + id="dx1-41026">. These are all defined with \providecommand, so they won’t override any definitions provided by any package loaded before glossaries-extra. Since bib2gls’s interpreter recognises + id="dx1-41027">. Since bib2gls’s interpreter recognises these commands, using them instead of explicitly using the Latin characters with the same shape helps to keep the Greek symbols together when sorting. Similarly, if upgreek has been loaded, the missing upright Greek commands are also + id="dx1-41029"> has been loaded, the missing upright Greek commands are also provided. -

    The remaining commands provide common rule blocks for use in the +

    The remaining commands provide common rule blocks for use in the sort-rule resource option. If you want a rule for a specific locale, you can provide similar commands in a file called \IfTrackedLanguageFileExists in the tracklang documentation for further details. + id="dx1-41030"> documentation for further details. If this file is on TEX’s path and the tracklang package (automatically loaded by + id="dx1-41031"> package (automatically loaded by glossaries) detects that the document has requested that language or locale, then the file will automatically be loaded. For example, if you want to provide a rule @@ -18515,7 +18485,7 @@ contains:  
    }  
    {}% glossaries-extra-bib2gls.sty not loaded

    -

    (The use of

    (The use of \string is in case the < character has been made active.) You can provide more than one rule-block per local, to allow for loanwords or foreign words. @@ -18523,7 +18493,7 @@ For example, you could provide \glsxtrWelshIRules, \glsxtrWelshIIRules etc. -

    If the rules are for a particular script (independent of language or region) then +

    If the rules are for a particular script (independent of language or region) then they can be provided in a file given by glossariesxtr-scriptglossariesxtr-Cyrl.ldf could contain:  
      % an alternative set of Cyrillic rules  
    }

    -

    (Remember that the required document language scripts need to be tracked through +

    (Remember that the required document language scripts need to be tracked through the tracklang package, in order for these files to be automatically loaded. This + id="dx1-41032"> package, in order for these files to be automatically loaded. This essentially means ensuring you load the appropriate language package before tracklang is loaded by the base is loaded by the base glossaries package or any other package that uses it. + id="dx1-41034"> package or any other package that uses it. See the tracklang documentation for further details.) -

    Alternatively, if the rules are specific to a subject rather than a region or + id="dx1-41035"> documentation for further details.) +

    Alternatively, if the rules are specific to a subject rather than a region or language, then you can provide a supplementary package. For example, if you have a package called, say, mapsymbols that provides map symbols, then the file @@ -18582,13 +18552,12 @@ class="cmtt-10">mapsymbols.sty might contain:  
     \string< \glshex 26BD % football 0x26BD  
    }

    -

    and the supplementary file

    and the supplementary file mapsymbols.bib can provide the appropriate definitions for bib2gls: +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls: @@ -18598,7 +18567,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">bib2gls\glsxtrprovidecommand{\Battlefield}{\char"2694}  
    \glsxtrprovidecommand{\Stadium}{\char"26BD}"}

    -

    Now both the preamble and rule block can be used in the resource set: +

    Now both the preamble and rule block can be used in the resource set: @@ -18625,10 +18594,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">bib2gls }  
    ]

    -

    -

    The following commands are provided by

    +

    The following commands are provided by glossaries-extra-bib2gls. They should be + id="dx1-41037">. They should be separated by the rule separator characters ; (semi-colon) or , (comma) or @@ -18637,16 +18606,16 @@ class="cmtt-10">& (ampersand) or < (less than). See Java’s RuleBasedCollator documentation for details of the rule syntax. -

    For example, the following will place the mathematical Greek symbols (

    For example, the following will place the mathematical Greek symbols (\alpha, + id="dx1-41038">, \Alpha, , \beta, , \Beta etc) in a block before Latin characters: + id="dx1-41041"> etc) in a block before Latin characters: @@ -18666,48 +18635,47 @@ sort-rule={\glsxtrcontrolrules  
     <\glsxtrLatinOslash  
    }

    -

    -


    +


    \glsxtrcontrolrules  \glsxtrcontrolrules

    -

    +

    These are control characters that are usually placed at the start of a rule in the ignored section. They typically won’t occur in any sort values, but if they do they should normally be ignored. -



    \glsxtrspacerules  \glsxtrspacerules

    -

    +

    These are space characters. They typically come after the control characters with the two blocks separated by a ; (semi-colon). -



    \glsxtrnonprintablerules  \glsxtrnonprintablerules

    -

    +

    These are non-printable characters (BOM, tabs, line feed and carriage return). They typically come after the spaces separated by a ; (semi-colon). These characters aren’t checked for by bib2gls when it determines whether or not to use the +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls when it determines whether or not to use the interpreter, so a TAB or newline character may end up in the sort value if it wasn’t interpreted. -



    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticrules  \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticrules

    -

    +

    These are combining diacritic marks which typically follow the space and non-printable blocks (separated by a semi-colon). This command is defined in terms of sub-block commands: @@ -18723,36 +18691,36 @@ of sub-block commands:  
     \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIVrules  
    }

    -

    If you prefer, you can use the sub-blocks directly in your required ordered. -


    If you prefer, you can use the sub-blocks directly in your required ordered. +


    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIrules  \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIrules

    -

    +

    This contains the combining diacritics: acute, grave, breve, circumflex, caron, ring, vertical line above, diaeresis (umlaut), double acute, tilde, dot above, combining macron. -



    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIIrules  \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIIrules

    -

    +

    This contains the combining diacritics: short solidus overlay, cedilla, ogonek, dot below, low line, overline, hook above, double vertical line above, double grave accent, candrabindu, inverted breve, turned comma above, comma above, reversed comma above, comma above right, grave accent below, acute accent below. -



    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIIIrules  \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIIIrules

    -

    +

    This contains the combining diacritics: left tack below, right tack below, left angle above, horn, left half ring below, up tack below, down tack below, plus sign below, minus sign below, palatalized hook below, retroflex hook below, diaresis below, ring @@ -18764,13 +18732,13 @@ seagull below, x above, vertical tilde, double overline, Greek perispomeni, Gree dialytika tonos, Greek ypogegrammeni, double tilde, double inverted breve, Cyrillic titlo, Cyrillic palatalization, Cyrillic dasia pneumata, Cyrillic psili pneumata. -



    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIVrules  \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIVrules

    -

    +

    This contains the combining diacritics: left harpoon above, right harpoon above, long vertical line overlay, short vertical line overlay, anticlockwise arrow above, clockwise arrow above, left arrow above, right arrow above, ring overlay, clockwise ring overlay, @@ -18780,20 +18748,20 @@ arrow above, left arrow above, right arrow above, ring overlay, clockwise ring o anticlockwise ring overlay, three dots above, four dots above, enclosing circle, enclosing square, enclosing diamond, enclosing circle backslash, left right arrow above. -



    \glsxtrhyphenrules  \glsxtrhyphenrules

    -

    +

    This contains hyphens (including the minus sign 0x2212). This rule block typically comes after the diacritic rules separated by a comma. -



    \glsxtrgeneralpuncrules  \glsxtrgeneralpuncrules

    -

    +

    This contains punctuation characters. This rule block typically comes after the hyphen rules separated by a less than (<). As with the combining diacritics, this @@ -18810,13 +18778,13 @@ different order is required:  
      \string<\glsxtrgeneralpuncIIrules  
    }

    -

    -


    +


    \glsxtrgeneralpuncIrules  \glsxtrgeneralpuncIrules

    -

    +

    This is the first punctuation sub-block containing: underscore, macron, comma, semi-colon, colon, exclamation mark, inverted exclamation mark, question mark, inverted question mark, solidus, full stop, acute accent, grave accent, @@ -18825,32 +18793,32 @@ straight double quote, left guillemet, right guillemet, left parenthesis, right parenthesis, left square bracket, right square bracket, left curly bracket, right curly bracket, section sign, pilcrow sign, copyright sign, registered sign, at sign. -



    \glsxtrcurrencyrules  \glsxtrcurrencyrules

    -

    +

    This sub-block contains some currency symbols: currency sign, Thai currency symbol baht, cent sign, colon sign, cruzeiro sign, dollar sign, dong sign, euro sign, French franc sign, lira sign, mill sign, naira sign, peseta sign, pound sign, rupee sign, new sheqel sign, won sign, yen sign. -



    \glsxtrgeneralpuncIIrules  \glsxtrgeneralpuncIIrules

    -

    +

    This sub-block contains some other punctuation symbols: asterisk, backslash, ampersand, hash sign, percent sign, plus sign, plus-minus sign, division sign, multiplication sign, less-than sign, equals sign, greater-than sign, not sign, vertical bar (pipe), broken bar, degree sign, micron sign. -



    \glsxtrdigitrules  \glsxtrdigitrules

    -

    +

    This rule block contains the Basic Latin digits (0, …, 9) and the subscript and superscript digits (0 0 etc) made equivalent to the corresponding Basic Lat The digit block typically comes after the punctuation rules separated by a less than (<). -



    \glsxtrBasicDigitrules  \glsxtrBasicDigitrules

    -

    +

    This rule block contains just the Basic Latin digits (0, …, 9). -



    \glsxtrSubScriptDigitrules  \glsxtrSubScriptDigitrules

    -

    +

    This rule block contains just the subscript digits (0 … 9). -



    \glsxtrSuperScriptDigitrules  \glsxtrSuperScriptDigitrules

    -

    +

    This rule block contains just the superscript digits (0 … 9). -



    \glsxtrfractionrules  \glsxtrfractionrules

    -

    +

    This rule block contains vulgar fraction characters. The digit block typically comes after the digit rules separated by a less than (<). -

    There are a number of Latin rule blocks. Some of these included extended +

    There are a number of Latin rule blocks. Some of these included extended characters or ligatures (such as ß or œ) but they don’t include accented characters. If you require a Latin rule block that includes accented characters, digraphs, trigraphs or other extended characters, then it’s best to provide similar @@ -18904,12 +18872,12 @@ class="cmtt-10">glossariesxtr-⟨tag.ldf file for the particular language or region. -



    \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules  \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules

    -

    +

    This is just the basic (non-extended) Latin alphabet with the superscript and subscript Latin letters (a a etc) treated as the equivalent basic Latin letter. don’t want the subscripts and superscripts included you can redefine \glsxtrLatinA etc to omit them.) -



    \glsxtrGeneralLatinIIrules  \glsxtrGeneralLatinIIrules

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’ and eszett (ß) treated as ‘ss’. -



    \glsxtrGeneralLatinIIIrules  \glsxtrGeneralLatinIIIrules

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’ and eszett (ß) treated as ‘sz’. -



    \glsxtrGeneralLatinIVrules  \glsxtrGeneralLatinIVrules

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’, ae-ligature (æ) is treated as ‘ae’, oe-ligature (œ) is treated as ‘oe’, eszett (ß) treated as ‘ss’ and thorn (þ) is treated as ‘th’. -



    \glsxtrGeneralLatinVrules  \glsxtrGeneralLatinVrules

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’, eszett (ß) treated as ‘ss’ and thorn (þ) treated as ‘th’. -



    \glsxtrGeneralLatinVIrules  \glsxtrGeneralLatinVIrules

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’, eszett (ß) treated as ‘sz’ and thorn (þ) treated as ‘th’. -



    \glsxtrGeneralLatinVIIrules  \glsxtrGeneralLatinVIIrules

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules but it includes ae-ligature (æ) between ‘A’ and ‘B’, eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’, insular G (Ᵹ) instead of ‘G’, oe-ligature between ‘O’ and ‘P’, long s (ſ) equivalent to ‘s’, thorn (þ) between ‘T’ and ‘U’ and wynn (Ƿ) instead of W. -



    \glsxtrGeneralLatinVIIIrules  \glsxtrGeneralLatinVIIIrules

    -

    +

    This is like \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules but ae-ligature (æ) is treated as ‘ae’, oe-ligature (œ) is treated as ‘oe’, eszett (ß) treated as ‘ss’, thorn (þ) is treated as ‘th’, Ø is treated as ‘O’ and ‘Ł’ is treated as ‘L’. -



    \glsxtrLatinA  \glsxtrLatinA

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘A’ but includes the sub- and superscript A. -



    \glsxtrLatinE  \glsxtrLatinE

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘E’ but includes the subscript E. -



    \glsxtrLatinH  \glsxtrLatinH

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘H’ but includes the subscript H. -



    \glsxtrLatinK  \glsxtrLatinK

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘K’ but includes the subscript K. -



    \glsxtrLatinI  \glsxtrLatinI

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘I’ but includes the superscript I. -



    \glsxtrLatinL  \glsxtrLatinL

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘L’ but includes the subscript L. -



    \glsxtrLatinM  \glsxtrLatinM

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘M’ but includes the subscript M. -



    \glsxtrLatinN  \glsxtrLatinN

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘N’ but includes the sub- and superscript N. -



    \glsxtrLatinO  \glsxtrLatinO

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘O’ but includes the sub- and superscript O. -



    \glsxtrLatinP  \glsxtrLatinP

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘P’ but includes the subscript P. -



    \glsxtrLatinS  \glsxtrLatinS

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘S’ but includes the subscript S. -



    \glsxtrLatinT  \glsxtrLatinT

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘T’ but includes the subscript T. -



    \glsxtrLatinX  \glsxtrLatinX

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers ‘X’ but includes the subscript X. -



    \glsxtrLatinEszettSs  \glsxtrLatinEszettSs

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers eszett (ß) and makes long s (ſ) followed by short ‘s’ equivalent to ‘ß’. (This is used in the above blocks that treat ‘ß’ as ‘ss’.) -



    \glsxtrLatinEszettSz  \glsxtrLatinEszettSz

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers eszett (ß) and makes long s (ſ) followed by ‘z’ equivalent to ‘ß’. (This is used in the above blocks that treat ‘ß’ as ‘sz’.) -



    \glsxtrLatinEth  \glsxtrLatinEth

    -

    +

    A mini-rule for eth (Ð) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. -



    \glsxtrLatinThorn  \glsxtrLatinThorn

    -

    +

    A mini-rule for thorn (þ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. -



    \glsxtrLatinAELigature  \glsxtrLatinAELigature

    -

    +

    A mini-rule for ae-ligature (æ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. -



    \glsxtrLatinOELigature  \glsxtrLatinOELigature

    -

    +

    A mini-rule for oe-ligature (œ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. -



    \glsxtrLatinOslash  \glsxtrLatinOslash

    -

    +

    A mini-rule for ‘Ø’ so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. -



    \glsxtrLatinLslash  \glsxtrLatinLslash

    -

    +

    A mini-rule for ‘Ł’ so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. -



    \glsxtrLatinWynn  \glsxtrLatinWynn

    -

    +

    A mini-rule for wynn (Ƿ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. -



    \glsxtrLatinInsularG  \glsxtrLatinInsularG

    -

    +

    A mini-rule for insular G (Ᵹ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. -



    \glsxtrLatinSchwa  \glsxtrLatinSchwa

    -

    +

    A mini-rule that just covers schwa (Ə) but includes the subscript schwa. (Not used in any of the provided Latin rule blocks described above.) -



    \glsxtrLatinAA  \glsxtrLatinAA

    -

    +

    A mini-rule for ‘Å’ so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. (Not used in any of the provided Latin rule blocks described above.) -



    \glsxtrMathGreekIrules  \glsxtrMathGreekIrules

    -

    +

    A rule block for mathematical Greek (\alpha, , \beta etc) and upright Greek + id="dx1-41096"> etc) and upright Greek (\upalpha, etc, from the , etc, from the upgreek package) characters that includes digamma + id="dx1-41098"> package) characters that includes digamma (\digamma and and \Digamma) between epsilon and zeta. The upright and italic versions + id="dx1-41100">) between epsilon and zeta. The upright and italic versions are gathered together into the same letter group. -



    \glsxtrMathGreekIIrules  \glsxtrMathGreekIIrules

    -

    +

    As \glsxtrMathGreekIrules but doesn’t include digamma. -



    \glsxtrMathUpGreekIrules  \glsxtrMathUpGreekIrules

    -

    +

    A rule block for upright Greek (\upalpha, etc, from the , etc, from the upgreek package) + id="dx1-41104"> package) characters that includes digamma (\digamma and and \Digamma) between epsilon and + id="dx1-41106">) between epsilon and zeta. -



    \glsxtrMathUpGreekIIrules  \glsxtrMathUpGreekIIrules

    -

    +

    A rule block for upright Greek (\upalpha, etc, from the , etc, from the upgreek package) that + id="dx1-41109"> package) that doesn’t include digamma. -



    \glsxtrMathItalicGreekIrules  \glsxtrMathItalicGreekIrules

    -

    +

    A rule block for mathematical Greek (\alpha, , \Alpha, etc) characters that includes + id="dx1-41112">, etc) characters that includes digamma (\diagamma and and \Digamma) between epsilon and zeta. Note that even + id="dx1-41114">) between epsilon and zeta. Note that even though the upper case \Delta etc are actually rendered upright by LATEX, bib2gls’s interpreter treats them as italic to help keep them close to the lower case +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls’s interpreter treats them as italic to help keep them close to the lower case versions. -



    \glsxtrMathItalicGreekIIrules  \glsxtrMathItalicGreekIIrules

    -

    +

    A rule block for mathematical Greek (\alpha, , \Alpha, etc) characters that doesn’t + id="dx1-41118">, etc) characters that doesn’t include digamma. -



    \glsxtrMathItalicUpperGreekIrules  \glsxtrMathItalicUpperGreekIrules

    -

    +

    A rule block for upper case mathematical Greek (\Alpha, , \Beta, etc) characters that + id="dx1-41121">, etc) characters that includes digamma (\Digamma) between epsilon and zeta. -


    ) between epsilon and zeta. +


    \glsxtrMathItalicUpperGreekIIrules  \glsxtrMathItalicUpperGreekIIrules

    -

    +

    A rule block for upper case mathematical Greek (\Alpha, , \Beta, etc) characters that + id="dx1-41125">, etc) characters that doesn’t include digamma. -



    \glsxtrMathItalicLowerGreekIrules  \glsxtrMathItalicLowerGreekIrules

    -

    +

    A rule block for lower case mathematical Greek (\alpha, , \beta, etc) characters that + id="dx1-41128">, etc) characters that includes digamma (\digamma) between epsilon and zeta. -


    ) between epsilon and zeta. +


    \glsxtrMathItalicLowerGreekIIrules  \glsxtrMathItalicLowerGreekIIrules

    -

    +

    A rule block for lower case mathematical Greek (\alpha, , \beta, etc) characters that + id="dx1-41132">, etc) characters that doesn’t include digamma. -

    Additionally, there are commands in the form

    Additionally, there are commands in the form \glsxtrUpAlpha, \glsxtrUpBeta etc and \upalpha etc and \Alpha, \alpha etc) as well as the following: -



    \glsxtrMathItalicPartial  \glsxtrMathItalicPartial

    -

    +

    The partial derivative symbol (). -



    \glsxtrMathItalicNabla  \glsxtrMathItalicNabla

    -

    +

    The nabla symbol (). -

    +

    -

    Top

    9.4 Supplementary Commands

    -

    These commands are provided by

    These commands are provided by glossaries-extra for use with bib2gls. -

    The information provided with bib2gls. +

    The information provided with \GlsXtrLoadResources is written to the .aux file using

    @@ -19385,16 +19351,15 @@ class="cmtt-10">}
    where ⟨information⟩ is the information to pass to bib2gls. The command in the + id="dx1-42002">bib2gls. The command in the second argument -



    \glsxtrresourceinit  \glsxtrresourceinit

    -

    +

    may be used to temporarily redefine commands before the information is written to the file. This does nothing by default, but may be redefined to allow the use of short commands for convenience. For example, with: @@ -19405,14 +19370,14 @@ commands for convenience. For example, with:

    \renewcommand{\glsxtrresourceinit}{\let\u\glshex}
    -

    you can just use, for example,

    you can just use, for example, \u E6 instead of \string\uE6 in the custom rule. This redefinition of \u is scoped so its original definition is restored after the write operation. -

    It’s possible to specify label prefixes. For example, modifying the earlier +

    It’s possible to specify label prefixes. For example, modifying the earlier example: @@ -19439,7 +19404,7 @@ example:  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    If you do something like this, you may find it more convenient to define custom +

    If you do something like this, you may find it more convenient to define custom commands that set the prefix. For example: @@ -19448,15 +19413,15 @@ commands that set the prefix. For example:

    \newcommand*{\sym}[2][]{\gls[#1]{sym.#2}}
    -

    The problem with this is that the custom command

    The problem with this is that the custom command \sym doesn’t allow for modifiers (such as \gls* or \gls+). Instead you can use: -



    \glsxtrnewgls  \glsxtrnewgls[default options]{prefix}{cs}

    -

    +

    which defines the command ⟨cs⟩ that behaves like

    @@ -19492,7 +19457,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">]
    \glsxtrnewgls{sym.}{\sym}
    -

    or (to default to no hyperlinks) +

    or (to default to no hyperlinks) @@ -19500,15 +19465,15 @@ class="cmtt-10">]

    \glsxtrnewgls[hyper=false]{sym.}{\sym}
    -

    now you can use

    now you can use \sym+{M} to behave like \gls+{sym.M}. -

    If you also want the plural and first letter upper case versions you can +

    If you also want the plural and first letter upper case versions you can use -



    \glsxtrnewglslike  \glsxtrnewglslike[default options]{}{\Glspl-like cs}

    -

    +

    For example: @@ -19534,11 +19499,11 @@ For example:

    \glsxtrnewglslike[hyper=false]{idx.}{\idx}{\idxpl}{\Idx}{\Idxpl}
    -

    For the all caps versions: -


    For the all caps versions: +


    \glsxtrnewGLSlike  \glsxtrnewGLSlike[default options]{\GLS-like cs}{\GLSpl-like cs}

    -

    +

    For example: @@ -19559,13 +19524,13 @@ For example:

    \glsxtrnewGLSlike[hyper=false]{idx.}{\IDX}{\IDXpl}
    -

    -

    There’s an analogous command for

    +

    There’s an analogous command for \rgls: -



    \glsxtrnewrgls  \glsxtrnewrgls[default options]{}{cs}

    -

    +

    and for \rgls, \rglspl, \rGls and \rGlspl: -



    \glsxtrnewrglslike  \glsxtrnewrglslike[default options]{}{\rGlspl-like cs}

    -

    +

    and for the all caps: -



    \glsxtrnewrGLSlike  \glsxtrnewrGLSlike[default options]{\rGLS-like cs}{\rGLSpl-like cs}

    -

    -

    If you provide your own custom command with just

    +

    If you provide your own custom command with just \newcommand that has syntax that starts with [options]{label}, then you can notify bib2gls +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls using: -



    \glsxtridentifyglslike  \glsxtridentifyglslike{prefix}{command}

    -

    +

    This writes information to the .aux file so that bib2gls can search for the given + id="dx1-42012">bib2gls can search for the given command when looking for dependencies. -

    Another possibility is to set up known label prefixes, with each one identified +

    Another possibility is to set up known label prefixes, with each one identified by: -



    \glsxtraddlabelprefix  \glsxtraddlabelprefix{prefix}

    -

    +

    These should be listed in order of precedence. Since no entries are defined on the first LATEX run, the final prefix should be the fallback. You can prepend a prefix to the list using: -



    \glsxtrprependlabelprefix  \glsxtrprependlabelprefix{prefix}

    -

    +

    which gives it the highest order of precedence. -

    The ⟨

    The ⟨prefix⟩ argument may be empty. You can clear the list with: -



    \glsxtrclearlabelprefixes  \glsxtrclearlabelprefixes

    -

    -

    You can test if a prefix is already in the list with: +

    +

    You can test if a prefix is already in the list with: -



    \glsxtrifinlabelprefixlist  \glsxtrifinlabelprefixlist{prefix}{} class="cmtt-10">{false}

    -

    +

    In general it’s best to avoid adding multiple instances of the same prefix, so you can check with this command before adding a prefix to the list. However, it can be useful to repeat a prefix at the end of the list so that it can be used as a fallback for entries that haven’t yet been defined. -

    With the list of possible prefixes set up (including an empty prefix if necessary), +

    With the list of possible prefixes set up (including an empty prefix if necessary), you can use: -



    \dgls  \dgls[options]{label}[insert]

    -

    +

    which behaves like

    prefix⟩ is the first prefix in the list such that class="cmti-10">prefix⟩⟨label⟩ matches a defined entry (or the last entry in the prefix list if none match). -

    There are also analogous commands for the plural and case-changing +

    There are also analogous commands for the plural and case-changing versions: -



    \dglspl  \dglspl[options]{label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (uses \glspl), -



    \dGls  \dGls[options]{label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (uses \Gls), -



    \dGlspl  \dGlspl[options]{label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (uses \Glspl), -



    \dGLS  \dGLS[options]{label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (uses \GLS), -



    \dGLSpl  \dGLSpl[options]{label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (uses \GLSpl), -



    \dglslink  \dglslink[options]{label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (uses \glslink), -



    \dglsdisp  \dglsdisp[options]{label}[insert]

    -

    +

    (uses \glsdisp). -

    These commands are essentially provided for a mixture of single and dual entries. +

    These commands are essentially provided for a mixture of single and dual entries. Suppose the file entries.bib contains: @@ -19854,7 +19817,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">entries.bib contains:  
        diameter}  
    }

    -

    and suppose the document code is: +

    and suppose the document code is: @@ -19874,7 +19837,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">entries.bib contains:  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    This uses the default empty primary prefix and

    This uses the default empty primary prefix and dual. for the dual prefix, so \gls{svm} is referencing the primary entry, which is (essentially) an \gls{pi}, which references the primary @index entry rather than the symbol. -

    What’s really needed is: +

    What’s really needed is: @@ -19893,7 +19856,7 @@ symbol.

    \gls{duck}, \gls{dual.svm}, \gls{dual.pi}.
    -

    or with +

    or with @@ -19904,7 +19867,7 @@ symbol.  
     dual-prefix={}  
    ]

    -

    then only the entries without a dual need a prefix: +

    then only the entries without a dual need a prefix: @@ -19912,7 +19875,7 @@ symbol.

    \gls{idx.duck}, \gls{svm}, \gls{pi}.
    -

    Using

    Using \glsxtrnewglslike, as earlier, this can be simplified to: @@ -19921,8 +19884,8 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewglslike, as earlier, this can be simplified to:

    \idx{duck}, \gls{svm}, \gls{pi}.
    -

    but this requires remembering which terms have duals. -

    An alternative is to use

    but this requires remembering which terms have duals. +

    An alternative is to use \dgls instead: @@ -19945,7 +19908,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\dgls instead:  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    On the first LAT

    On the first LATEX call (when the .glstex file doesn’t exist), neither dual.svm) entry to be selected. The location will be adde primary entry’s location list, unless overridden by resource options, such as combine-dual-locations. -

    Once

    Once bib2gls has been run and the bib2gls has been run and the .glstex file exists, then dual.svm exists. So \dgls{svm} now behaves like \gls{dual.svm}, which follows the abbreviation style and hyperlinks to the list of abbreviations. -

    Similarly for the index-symbol combination

    Similarly for the index-symbol combination dual.pi and pi. In the case of \dgls{duck} always behaves like \gls{duck}. -

    If you haven’t used

    If you haven’t used combine-dual-locations an extra bib2gls+LATbib2gls+LATEX run may be required to correct the location lists. -

    If you change the label prefixes, remember to update the corresponding +

    If you change the label prefixes, remember to update the corresponding \glsxtraddlabelprefix{prefix}. If no prefixes have been added to the list (or if the list is cleared), just an empty prefix is assumed. -

    As from version 1.8, bib2gls provides hooks that identify the label prefixes in the +

    As from version 1.8, bib2gls provides hooks that identify the label prefixes in the @@ -20016,19 +19976,19 @@ class="cmtt-10">.glstex file:

    \bibglstertiaryprefixlabel{prefix}
    \bibglsdualprefixlabel{prefix}
    \bibglsprimaryprefixlabel{prefix} @@ -20043,7 +20003,7 @@ loaded to set up the prefix list. For example:  
    \newcommand{\bibglsdualprefixlabel}[1]{\glsxtrprependlabelprefix{#1}}  
    \GlsXtrLoadResources[src=entries]
    -

    Remember that this will only have an effect once the

    Remember that this will only have an effect once the .glstex file has been created. The prefix list will be empty on the first run (which is treated as a single empty prefix). If this isn’t a suitable fallback, it may be necessary to add one after all the @@ -20058,30 +20018,27 @@ resource commands:  
    \GlsXtrLoadResources[src=entries,label-prefix={idx.}]  
    \glsxtraddlabelprefix{idx.}

    -

    Although this rather defeats the purpose of using the hooks as you still have to keep +

    Although this rather defeats the purpose of using the hooks as you still have to keep track of the fallback prefix. -

    +

    -

    Top

    9.5 Record Counting

    -

    As from version 1.1 of

    As from version 1.1 of bib2gls, you can save the total record count for each entry by +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls, you can save the total record count for each entry by invoking bib2gls with the bib2gls with the --record-count or --record-count-unit switches. These options will ensure that when each entry is written to the .glstex file bib2gls will additionally set the following internal fields for that entry: + id="dx1-43003">bib2gls will additionally set the following internal fields for that entry:

    • recordcount: set to the total number of records found for class="cmtt-10">recordcount.⟨counter⟩: set to the total number of records found for the entry for the given counter.
    -

    If

    If --record-count-unit is used then additionally:

    • counter.location⟩: set to the total number of records found for the entry for the given counter with the given location.
    -

    Only use the unit counting option if the locations don’t contain any special characters. If +

    Only use the unit counting option if the locations don’t contain any special characters. If you really need it with locations that may contain formatting commands, then you can try redefining: -



    \glsxtrdetoklocation  \glsxtrdetoklocation{location}

    -

    +

    so that it detokenizes ⟨location⟩ but take care when using \GlsXtrLocationRecordCount with commands like \thepage as they can end up becoming detokenized too early. -

    Note that the record count includes locations that bib2gls discards, such as +

    Note that the record count includes locations that bib2gls discards, such as ignored records, duplicates and partial duplicates. It doesn’t include cross-reference records. For example, if \gls{bird} is used twice on page 1, once on page 2 and @@ -20138,23 +20094,23 @@ field) is 2 + 1 + 4 = 7, and the total for the section counter (stored in the recordcount.section field) is 1. -

    With the unit counting on as well, the field

    With the unit counting on as well, the field recordcount.page.1 is set to 2, recordcount.page.2 is set to 1, recordcount.page.3 is set to 4 and recordcount.section.3 is set to 1. -

    You can access these fields using the following commands which will expand to +

    You can access these fields using the following commands which will expand to the field value if set or to 0 if unset: -



    \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount  \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount{label}

    -

    +

    This expands to the total record count for the entry given by ⟨label⟩. @@ -20164,17 +20120,17 @@ class="cmti-10">label⟩.

    \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount{bird}
    -

    expands to 8. -


    expands to 8. +


    \GlsXtrRecordCount  \GlsXtrRecordCount{label}{counter}

    -

    +

    This expands to the counter total for the entry given by ⟨label⟩ where ⟨counter⟩ is the @@ -20186,7 +20142,7 @@ counter name. For example:

    \GlsXtrRecordCount{bird}{page}
    -

    expands to 7 and +

    expands to 7 and @@ -20194,11 +20150,11 @@ counter name. For example:

    \GlsXtrRecordCount{bird}{section}
    -

    expands to 1. -


    expands to 1. +


    \GlsXtrLocationRecordCount  \GlsXtrLocationRecordCount{label}{} class="cmtt-10">{location}

    -

    +

    This expands to the total for the given location. For example @@ -20217,21 +20173,21 @@ This expands to the total for the given location. For example

    \GlsXtrLocationRecordCount{bird}{page}{3}
    -

    expands to 4. Be careful about using

    expands to 4. Be careful about using \thepage in the ⟨location⟩ part. Remember that due to TEX’s asynchronous output routine, \thepage may not be correct. -

    There are commands analogous to the entry counting commands like

    There are commands analogous to the entry counting commands like \cgls and \cglsformat that are triggered by the record count. These are listed below. -



    \rgls  \rglsmodifier[label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rglspl  \rglsplmodifier[label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rGls  \rGlsmodifier[label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rGlspl  \rGlsplmodifier[label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rGLS  \rGLSmodifier[label}[insert]

    -

    -


    +


    \rGLSpl  \rGLSplmodifier[label}[insert]

    -

    +

    These commands check the recordcount attribute which, if set, should be a number. + id="dx1-43015"> attribute which, if set, should be a number. For example: @@ -20324,11 +20280,11 @@ For example:

    \glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{recordcount}{1}
    -

    For convenience, you can use -


    For convenience, you can use +


    \GlsXtrSetRecordCountAttribute  \GlsXtrSetRecordCountAttribute{category list}{n}

    -

    +

    to set the recordcount attribute to ⟨ attribute to ⟨n⟩ for all the categories listed in ⟨category list⟩. -

    The

    The \rgls-like commands use -



    \glsxtrifrecordtrigger  \glsxtrifrecordtrigger{label}{} class="cmtt-10">{normal}

    -

    +

    to determine whether the \rgls-like command should behave like its \gls counterpart (⟨normal⟩) or whether it should instead use ⟨trigger code⟩. -

    This command checks if the

    This command checks if the recordcount attribute is set. If not is just does + id="dx1-43019"> attribute is set. If not is just does ⟨normal⟩, otherwise it tests if -



    \glsxtrrecordtriggervalue  \glsxtrrecordtriggervalue{label}

    -

    +

    is greater than the value given in the recordcount attribute for that entry’s category. + id="dx1-43021"> attribute for that entry’s category. If true, this does ⟨normal⟩ otherwise it does ⟨trigger code⟩. The default definition of the @@ -20398,100 +20354,99 @@ trigger value command is:  
     \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount{#1}%  
    }

    -

    The ⟨

    The ⟨trigger code⟩ part writes a record with the format set to set to glstriggerrecordformat (which bib2gls v1.1+ recognises as a special type of ignored location format) and +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls v1.1+ recognises as a special type of ignored location format) and does ⟨trigger format⟩. Then it unsets the first use flag. Note that it doesn’t implement the post-link hook. This ensures that the record count is correct on the next run. -

    The ⟨

    The ⟨trigger format⟩ depends on the \rgls-like command used and will be one of the following: -



    \rglsformat  \rglsformat{label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rglsplformat  \rglsplformat{label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rGlsformat  \rGlsformat{label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rGlsplformat  \rGlsplformat{label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rGLSformat  \rGLSformat{label}{insert}

    -

    -


    +


    \rGLSplformat  \rGLSplformat{label}{insert}

    -

    +

    These all behave much like their \cglsformat counterparts. If the entry’s regular + id="dx1-43031"> attribute is set or if the entry doesn’t have a long form, the first or first plural is used, otherwise the long or long plural form is used. -

    You can use -


    You can use +


    \glsxtrenablerecordcount  \glsxtrenablerecordcount

    -

    +

    to redefine \gls, \glspl, \rGls, class="cmtt-10">\rGlspl, \rGLS, \rGLSpl, respectively, for convenience. -

    If you don’t want the entries that use ⟨

    If you don’t want the entries that use ⟨trigger code⟩ to appear in the glossary, you need to use the resource option trigger-type to assign them to another glossary. @@ -20532,7 +20487,7 @@ For example:  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    In the above,

    In the above, stc and upa both only have one record, so they are assigned to the main one.

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    10. Miscellaneous New Commands

    -

    The

    The glossaries package provides \glsrefentry entry to cross-reference entries @@ -20559,21 +20514,21 @@ class="cmss-10">subentrycounter options. The glossaries-extra package provides a supplementary command -



    \glsxtrpageref  \glsxtrpageref{label}

    -

    +

    that works in the same way except that it uses \pageref instead of \ref. -

    You can copy an entry to another glossary using -


    You can copy an entry to another glossary using +


    \glsxtrcopytoglossary  }{glossary-type}

    -

    +

    This appends ⟨entry-label⟩ to the end of the internal list for the glossary given by ⟨ \printunsrtglossary[target=false]

    -

    -

    The

    +

    The glossaries package allows you to set preamble code for a given glossary type using \setglossarypreamble. This overrides any previous setting. With glossaries-extra (as from v1.12) you can instead append to the preamble using -



    \apptoglossarypreamble  type]{code}

    -

    +

    or prepend using -



    \pretoglossarypreamble  type]{code}

    -

    +

    -

    Top

    10.1 Entry Fields

    -

    A field may now be used to store the name of a text-block command that takes a +

    A field may now be used to store the name of a text-block command that takes a single argument. The field is given by -



    \GlsXtrFmtField  \GlsXtrFmtField

    -

    +

    The default value is useri. Note that the value must be the control sequence name without the initial backslash. -

    For example: +

    For example: @@ -20678,10 +20633,10 @@ class="cmti-10">without the initial backslash.  
       $\mtx{M}\mtxinv{M}=\glssymbol{identitymatrix}$}  
    }

    -

    -

    There are two commands provided that allow you to apply the command to an +

    +

    There are two commands provided that allow you to apply the command to an argument: -



    \glsxtrfmt  label}{text}

    -

    +

    This effectively does

    cs name⟩ is the control sequence name supplied in must be defined to take a single required argument. Although it effectively acts like \glslink it misses out the post-link hook. -

    The default ⟨

    The default ⟨default-options⟩ are given by -



    \GlsXtrFmtDefaultOptions  \GlsXtrFmtDefaultOptions

    -

    +

    This is defined as noindex but may be redefined as appropriate. Note that the replacement text of \GlsXtrFmtDefaultOptions is prepended to the optional argument of \glslink. -

    As from version 1.23, there’s also a starred version of this command that has a +

    As from version 1.23, there’s also a starred version of this command that has a final optional argument: -



    \glsxtrfmt*  text}[insert]

    -

    +

    Both the starred and unstarred versions use: -



    \glsxtrfmtdisplay  }{insert}

    -

    +

    within the link text. In the case of the unstarred version ⟨insert⟩ will be empty. It will also be empty if the final option argument is missing from the starred form. If the @@ -20790,17 +20745,17 @@ default definition is:

    \newcommand{\glsxtrfmtdisplay}[3]{\csuse{#1}{#2}#3}
    -

    which puts ⟨

    which puts ⟨text⟩ inside the argument of the control sequence and ⟨insert⟩ outside it (but it will still be inside the link text). -

    Remember that nested links cause a problem so avoid using commands like

    Remember that nested links cause a problem so avoid using commands like \gls or \glsxtrfmt within ⟨text⟩.
    -

    -

    For example: +

    +

    For example: @@ -20813,7 +20768,7 @@ class="cmti-10">text⟩.

     
      \glssymbol{identitymatrix}  
    \]
    -

    If the default options are set to

    If the default options are set to noindex then \glsxtrfmt won’t index, but will create a hyperlink (if \renewcommand{\GlsXtrFmtDefaultOptions}{hyper=false,noindex}

    -

    -

    Note that

    +

    Note that \glsxtrfmt won’t work with PDF bookmarks. Instead you can use -



    \glsxtrentryfmt  label}{text}

    -

    +

    This uses \texorpdfstring and will simply expand to ⟨text⟩ within the PDF @@ -20851,14 +20806,14 @@ class="cmti-10">text⟩} if a control sequence name has been provided or just ⟨text⟩ otherwise. -

    The

    The glossaries package provides \glsaddstoragekey to add new keys. This command will cause an error if the key has already been defined. The glossaries-extra package provides a supplementary command that will only define the key if it doesn’t already exist: -



    \glsxtrprovidestoragekey  }{cs}

    -

    +

    If the key has already been defined, it will still provide the command given in the third argument ⟨cs⟩ (if it hasn’t already been defined). Unlike cs⟩ may be left empty if you’re happy to just use \glsfieldfetch to fetch the value of this new key. -

    You can test if a key has been provided with: -


    You can test if a key has been provided with: +


    \glsxtrifkeydefined  true}{false}

    -

    +

    This tests if ⟨key⟩ is available for use in the ⟨key⟩= list in the second argument of @@ -20900,7 +20855,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry (or the optional argument of commands l class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation). The corresponding field may not have been set for any of the entries if no default was provided. -

    There are now commands provided to set individual fields. Note that +

    There are now commands provided to set individual fields. Note that these only change the specified field, not any related values. For example, changing the value of the textparent field). Unexpected results may occur if they are subsequently changed. -



    \GlsXtrSetField  field}{value}

    -

    +

    Sets the field given by ⟨field⟩ to ⟨value⟩ for the entry given by ⟨

    \GlsXtrSetField uses -



    \glsxtrsetfieldifexists  }{code}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry label and ⟨code⟩ is the assignment code. -

    This command just uses

    This command just uses \glsdoifexists{=warn\glsxtrsetfieldifexists to simply do ⟨code⟩ if you want to skip the existence check. Alternatively you can instead use -



    \glsxtrdeffield  replacement text}

    -

    +

    This simply uses etoolbox’s \protected@csedef instead:10.1 -



    \glsxtredeffield  replacement text}

    -

    -


    +


    \gGlsXtrSetField  field}{value}

    -

    +

    As \GlsXtrSetField but globally. -



    \eGlsXtrSetField  field}{value}

    -

    +

    As \GlsXtrSetField but uses protected expansion. -



    \xGlsXtrSetField  field}{value}

    -

    +

    As \gGlsXtrSetField but uses protected expansion. -



    \GlsXtrLetField  field}{cs}

    -

    +

    Sets the field given by ⟨field⟩ to the replacement text of ⟨cs⟩ for the entry given by ⟨label⟩ (using \let). -



    \csGlsXtrLetField  }{cs name}

    -

    +

    As \GlsXtrLetField but the control sequence name is supplied instead. -



    \GlsXtrLetFieldToField  label-2}{field-2}

    -

    +

    Sets the field given by ⟨field-1⟩ for the entry given by ⟨label-1⟩ to the field given by @@ -21125,7 +21080,7 @@ class="cmti-10">code⟩} is still used, as for \GlsXtrSetField. -

    The

    The glossaries package provides \ifglshasfield to determine if a field has been @@ -21134,7 +21089,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra package provides a simpler version: -



    \glsxtrifhasfield  }{false}

    -

    +

    (New to v1.19.) Note that in this case the ⟨field⟩ must be the internal field label (for @@ -21165,17 +21120,17 @@ class="cmti-10">true⟩ part is done otherwise it does ⟨false⟩. Within ⟨true⟩ you may use -



    \glscurrentfieldvalue  \glscurrentfieldvalue

    -

    +

    to access the field value. This command includes grouping which scopes the ⟨true⟩ and ⟨false⟩ parts. The starred version -



    \glsxtrifhasfield*  }{false}

    -

    +

    omits the implicit grouping. -

    Be careful of keys that use

    Be careful of keys that use \relax as the default value (such as the symbol). Use \ifglshassymbol instead.
    -

    -

    There is also a version that simply uses

    +

    There is also a version that simply uses \ifcsundef. It doesn’t save the field value, but can be used if you only need to check if the field is defined without accessing it: -



    \GlsXtrIfFieldUndef  }{false}

    -

    -

    There’s a difference between an undefined field and an unset field. An undefined +

    +

    There’s a difference between an undefined field and an unset field. An undefined field hasn’t been assigned any value (no associated internal control sequence has been defined). If a defined field has been defined to empty, then it’s considered unset. \GlsXtrIfFieldUndef for fields that can only be defined through commands like \GlsXtrSetField.
    -

    -

    You can test if a field value equals a string using -


    +

    You can test if a field value equals a string using +


    \GlsXtrIfFieldEqStr  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨false}

    -

    +

    If the entry exists and has the given field set to the given text then this does ⟨true⟩ otherwise it does ⟨false⟩. This is just a shortcut that uses: +class="cmti-10">false⟩. This uses \glsxtrifhasfield to test if the field exists and -


    \GlsXtrIfFieldCmpStr  \GlsXtrIfFieldCmpStr{field}{label}{comparison} -{text}{true}{false}

    -

    -This in turn is just a shortcut that uses \glsxtrifhasfield to test if the field exists -and then compares the replacement text of \glscurrentfieldvalue with ⟨text⟩ using etoolbox’s \ifdefstring. The ⟨comparison⟩ argument must be one of = (equality), < -(less than) or > (greater than). -

    As from version 1.31, there’s a similar command: -


    ’s \ifdefstring. Version 1.39 introduced a starred form of this command, +which uses the starred form of \glsxtrifhasfield. +

    As from version 1.31, there’s a similar command: +


    \GlsXtrIfFieldEqXpStr  \GlsXtrIfFieldEqXpStr{field}{true}{false}

    -

    +

    This is like \GlsXtrIfFieldEqStr but first (protected) fully expands ⟨text⟩ (but not the field value). If you want to compare the (protected) full expansion of both the field value and ⟨text⟩ use: -



    \GlsXtrIfXpFieldEqXpStr  \GlsXtrIfXpFieldEqXpStr{field}{true}{false}

    -

    -

    As from v1.31, if a field represents a numeric (integer) value, you can use the -following two numeric tests. If the field is set, it must expand to an integer. -You may use

    +Again, version 1.39 introduced a starred form of these commands, which use the +starred form of \glsxtrifhasfield. +

    As from v1.31, if a field represents a numeric (integer) value, you can use the +following two numeric tests. If the field is set, it must expand to an integer. You may +use \glscurrentfieldvalue within ⟨true⟩ or ⟨false⟩ to access the -actual value. Both ⟨false⟩ to access the actual value. Both +⟨true⟩ and ⟨false⟩ are scoped. If the field is undefined or -empty, the value is assumed to be 0, and \glscurrentfieldvalue is set -accordingly. -

    To test if the value is non-zero: -


    false⟩ are scoped. If the field is undefined or empty, the value is assumed to +be 0, and \glscurrentfieldvalue is set accordingly. As from version 1.39, these +numeric tests have starred versions. The unstarred versions add implicit grouping. +The starred versions don’t. +

    To test if the value is non-zero: +


    \GlsXtrIfFieldNonZero  \GlsXtrIfFieldNonZero{field}{} class="cmtt-10">{false}

    -

    +

    Alternatively, you can test if the field expands to a specific number using: -



    \GlsXtrIfFieldEqNum  \GlsXtrIfFieldEqNum{field}{} class="cmtt-10">{false}

    -

    +

    This does ⟨true⟩ if the field value equals ⟨n⟩ (using \ifnum for the comparison) otherwise -it does ⟨false⟩. -

    The \ifnum for the comparison) +otherwise it does ⟨false⟩. For a more general numeric comparison you can +use: +


    \GlsXtrIfFieldCmpNum  \GlsXtrIfFieldCmpNum{field}{label}{comparison} +{n}{true}{false}

    +

    +where ⟨comparison⟩ is one of =, < or >. +

    The glossaries package provides \glsfieldfetch which can be used to fetch the value of the given field and store it in a control sequence. The glossaries-extra package provides another way of accessing the field value: -



    \glsxtrusefield  entry-label}{field-label}

    -

    +

    This works in the same way as commands like \glsentrytext but the field label is specified in the first argument. Note that the ⟨glossaries manual. No error occurs if the entry or field haven’t been defined. This command is -not robust. -

    There is also a version that converts the first letter to uppercase (analogous to -\Glsentrytext): -


    There is also a version that converts the first letter to uppercase (analogous to +\Glsentrytext): +


    \Glsxtrusefield  entry-label}{field-label}

    -

    +

    and, as from v1.37, a command that converts the entire value to upper case: -



    \GLSxtrusefield  entry-label}{field-label}

    -

    -

    If you want to use a field to store a list that can be used as an

    +

    If you want to use a field to store a list that can be used as an etoolbox internal list, you can use the following command that adds an item to the field using @@ -21454,7 +21415,7 @@ list, you can use the following command that adds an item to the field using class="cmss-10">etoolbox’s \listcsadd: -



    \glsxtrfieldlistadd  }{item}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label, ⟨field⟩ is the entry’s field and ⟨\listgadd, \listeadd and \listxadd: -



    \glsxtrfieldlistgadd  }{item}

    -

    -


    +


    \glsxtrfieldlisteadd  }{item}

    -

    -


    +


    \glsxtrfieldlistxadd  }{item}

    -

    +

    You can then iterate over the list using: -



    \glsxtrfielddolistloop  }{field}

    -

    +

    or -



    \glsxtrfieldforlistloop  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨handler}

    -

    +

    that internally use \dolistcsloop and \forlistloop, respectively. -

    There are also commands that use

    There are also commands that use \ifinlistcs: -



    \glsxtrfieldifinlist  } class="cmtt-10">{⟨false}

    -

    +

    and \xifinlistcs -



    \glsxtrfieldxifinlist  true}{false}

    -

    -

    See the

    +

    See the etoolbox’s user manual for further details of these commands, in particular the limitations of \ifinlist. - - - -

    If the field has a comma-separated list value instead, you can iterate over it +

    If the field has a comma-separated list value instead, you can iterate over it using: -



    \glsxtrforcsvfield  }{handler}

    -

    +

    where again ⟨handler⟩ is a control sequence that takes a single argument. Unlike the \@endfortrue. The \glsxtrforcsvfield command locally defines a user level command: -



    \glsxtrendfor  \glsxtrendfor

    -

    +

    which is just a synonym for \@endfortrue. -

    The loop is performed within the true part of

    The loop is performed within the true part of \glsxtrifhasfield so scoping is automatically applied. -

    As from version 1.32, if the field given by -


    As from version 1.32, if the field given by +


    \GlsXtrForeignTextField  \GlsXtrForeignTextField

    -

    +

    (which defaults to userii) contains a locale tag, then -



    \GlsXtrForeignText  entry label}{text}

    -

    +

    can be used to encapsulate ⟨text⟩ in \foreignlanguage{text⟩. For example:  
    \gls{abnt}, \gls{din}.  
    \end{document}

    -

    -

    When using the

    +

    When using the record option, in addition to recording the usual location, you can also record the current value of another counter at the same time using the preamble-only command: -



    \GlsXtrRecordCounter  \GlsXtrRecordCounter{counter name}

    -

    +

    For example: @@ -21738,7 +21699,7 @@ For example: \usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}  
    \GlsXtrRecordCounter{section}

    -

    Each time an entry is referenced with commands like

    Each time an entry is referenced with commands like \gls or \glstext, the \gls{bird} is used in section 1.2 th

    \glsxtrfieldlistgadd{bird}{record.section}{1.2}
    -

    Note that there’s no key corresponding to this new

    Note that there’s no key corresponding to this new record.section field, but its value can be accessed with \glsxtrfielduse or the list can be iterated over with \glsxtrfielddolistloop etc. -

    +

    -

    Top

    10.2 Display All Entries Without Sorting or Indexing

    -



    \printunsrtglossary  \printunsrtglossary[options]

    -

    +

    This behaves like \printnoidxglossary but never sorts the entries and always lists all the defined entries for the given glossary (and doesn’t require @@ -21820,8 +21781,8 @@ the definition of \glsgroupskip to avoid the “Incomplete \iftrue” error that may otherwise occur. -

    There’s also a starred form -


    There’s also a starred form +


    \printunsrtglossary*  options]{code}

    -

    +

    which is equivalent to

    \endgroup class="cmtt-10">\glossarypreamble, the supplied ⟨code⟩ is done before the glossary header. -

    This means you now have the option to simply list all entries on the first +

    This means you now have the option to simply list all entries on the first LATEX run without the need for a post-processor, however there will be no number list in this case, as that has to be set by a post-processor such as bib2gls (see bib2gls (see §9 bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases). -

    No attempt is made to gather hierarchical elements. If child entries aren’t defined +href="#sec:bib2gls">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases). +

    No attempt is made to gather hierarchical elements. If child entries aren’t defined immediately after their parent entry, they won’t be together in the glossary when using \printunsrtglossary.
    -

    +

    -

    There’s a difference in behaviour depending on whether or not the

    There’s a difference in behaviour depending on whether or not the group key is + id="dx1-46008"> key is defined. If not defined (default), the group label will be formed from the first letter of the name field. The corresponding group title will be obtained as + id="dx1-46009"> field. The corresponding group title will be obtained as discussed in §2.11 Glossary Style Modifications. This can lead to an odd effect if you are using a style that separates letter groups when the ordering isn’t alphabetical. -

    If the

    If the group key is defined (which it is with the key is defined (which it is with the record option) then the group label + id="dx1-46011"> option) then the group label will be obtained from the value of that field. If the field is empty, no grouping is performed, even if the style supports it. (That is, there won’t be a header or a vertical separation.) If the group field is non-empty, then the corresponding title is obtained + id="dx1-46012"> field is non-empty, then the corresponding title is obtained as described earlier. -

    If you want to use a different field, you can redefine -


    If you want to use a different field, you can redefine +


    \glsxtrgroupfield  \glsxtrgroupfield

    -

    +

    to the relevant internal field label, but the group key must still be defined (through the record option or with commands like option or with commands like \glsaddstoragekey) to ensure that \printunsrtglossary uses \glsxtrgroupfield. (This method is used by bib2gls +class="cmtt-10">bib2gls for secondary entries, which have the group label stored in the secondarygroup internal field.) -

    If you have any entries with the

    If you have any entries with the see key set, you will need the key set, you will need the glossaries package + id="dx1-46018"> package option seenoindex=ignore or or seenoindex=warn to prevent an error occurring from the + id="dx1-46020"> to prevent an error occurring from the automated \glssee normally triggered by this key. The record=only package option + id="dx1-46021"> package option will automatically deal with this. -

    For example: +

    For example: @@ -21959,112 +21919,112 @@ will automatically deal with this.  
    \printunsrtglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    In the above, zebra will be listed before ant as it was defined first. -

    If you allow document definitions with the

    In the above, zebra will be listed before ant as it was defined first. +

    If you allow document definitions with the docdefs option, the document will + id="dx1-46022"> option, the document will require a second LATEX run if the entries are defined after \printunsrtglossary. -

    The optional argument is as for

    The optional argument is as for \printnoidxglossary (except for the sort key, + id="dx1-46023"> key, which isn’t available). -

    All glossaries may be displayed in the order of their definition using: -


    All glossaries may be displayed in the order of their definition using: +


    \printunsrtglossaries  \printunsrtglossaries

    -

    +

    which is analogous to \printnoidxglossaries. This just iterates over all defined glossaries (that aren’t on the ignored list) and does \printunsrtglossary[type=⟨type⟩]. -

    To avoid complications caused by

    To avoid complications caused by tabular-like glossary styles, -like glossary styles, \printunsrtglossary iterates over all entries in the selected glossary and appends the appropriate code to an internal command. Once the construction of this command is complete, then it’s performed to display the glossary. This puts the loop outside the style code. For convenience, there’s a hook used within the loop: -



    \printunsrtglossaryentryprocesshook  \printunsrtglossaryentryprocesshook {label}

    -

    +

    This hook should not display any content, but may be used to perform calculations. For example, to calculate widths. Within this hook you can use: -



    \printunsrtglossaryskipentry  \printunsrtglossaryskipentry

    -

    +

    to skip the current entry. This will prevent the entry from being added to the internal command. -

    There’s another hook immediately before the internal command containing the +

    There’s another hook immediately before the internal command containing the glossary code is performed: -



    \printunsrtglossarypredoglossary  \printunsrtglossarypredoglossary

    -

    +

    -

    The internal command uses -


    The internal command uses +


    \printunsrtglossaryhandler  \printunsrtglossaryhandler{label}

    -

    +

    to display each item in the list, where ⟨label⟩ is the current label. -

    By default the handler just does -


    By default the handler just does +


    \glsxtrunsrtdo  \glsxtrunsrtdo{label}

    -

    +

    which determines whether to use \glossentry or \subglossentry and checks the location and and loclist fields for the fields for the number list. If you want to use a different field to be used instead of location then redefine: -


    then redefine: +


    \GlsXtrLocationField  \GlsXtrLocationField

    -

    +

    to the internal name of the desired field. For example: @@ -22073,28 +22033,27 @@ to the internal name of the desired field. For example:

    \renewcommand{\GlsXtrLocationField}{primarylocation}
    -

    -

    Note that if the given location field is undefined or unset, the handler will +

    +

    Note that if the given location field is undefined or unset, the handler will fallback on the loclist field.
    -

    + id="dx1-46037"> field.

    +

    You can instruct bib2gls to omit setting the bib2gls to omit setting the loclist field with the resource option + id="dx1-46039"> field with the resource option --save-loclist=false to prevent it from being used as a fallback. -

    You can redefine the handler if required. For example, you may want to filter +

    You can redefine the handler if required. For example, you may want to filter entries according to the category label. You can test if a label is contained in a comma-separated list of labels using: -



    \glsxtriflabelinlist  \glsxtriflabelinlist{label}{} class="cmtt-10">{false}

    -

    +

    The ⟨label⟩ and ⟨label list⟩ will be fully expanded. -

    If you redefine the handler to exclude entries, you may end up with an empty +

    If you redefine the handler to exclude entries, you may end up with an empty glossary. This could cause a problem for the list-based styles.
    -

    -

    For example, if the preamble includes: +

    +

    For example, if the preamble includes: @@ -22122,7 +22081,7 @@ glossary. This could cause a problem for the list-based styles.

    \usepackage[record,style=index]{glossaries-extra}  
    \GlsXtrRecordCounter{section}
    -

    then you can print the glossary but first redefine the handler to only select entries +

    then you can print the glossary but first redefine the handler to only select entries that include the current section number in the record.section field: @@ -22136,8 +22095,8 @@ class="cmtt-10">record.section field:  
      {}%  
    }

    -

    -

    Alternatively you can use the starred form of

    +

    Alternatively you can use the starred form of \printunsrtglossary which will localise the change: @@ -22153,10 +22112,10 @@ localise the change:  
      }%  
    }

    -

    -

    If you are using the

    +

    If you are using the hyperref package and want to display the same glossary more + id="dx1-46041"> package and want to display the same glossary more than once, you can also add a temporary redefinition of \glolinkprefix to avoid duplicate hypertarget names. For example: @@ -22180,7 +22139,7 @@ duplicate hypertarget names. For example:  
      }%  
    }

    -

    Note that this will cause a problem if your descriptions contain commands like

    Note that this will cause a problem if your descriptions contain commands like \gls that need to link an entry that doesn’t appear in the summary. In this case, it’s a better approach to use: @@ -22204,8 +22163,8 @@ better approach to use:  
      }%  
    }

    -

    -

    If it’s a short summary at the start of a section, you might also want to suppress +

    +

    If it’s a short summary at the start of a section, you might also want to suppress the glossary header and add some vertical space afterwards: @@ -22229,12 +22188,12 @@ the glossary header and add some vertical space afterwards:  
      \appto\glossarypostamble{\glspar\medskip\glspar}%  
    }

    -

    -

    There’s a shortcut command that essentially does this: -


    +

    There’s a shortcut command that essentially does this: +


    \printunsrtglossaryunit  \printunsrtglossaryunit[options]{counter name}

    -

    +

    The above example can simply be replaced with: @@ -22251,20 +22210,20 @@ The above example can simply be replaced with:

    \printunsrtglossaryunit{section}
    -

    -

    This shortcut command is actually defined to use

    +

    This shortcut command is actually defined to use \printunsrtglossary* with -



    \printunsrtglossaryunitsetup  \printunsrtglossaryunitsetup{counter name}

    -

    +

    so if you want to just make some minor modifications you can do @@ -22275,18 +22234,18 @@ so if you want to just make some minor modifications you can do  
      \renewcommand*{\glossarysection}[2][]{\subsection*{Summary}}%  
    }

    -

    which will start the list with a subsection header with the title “Summary” +

    which will start the list with a subsection header with the title “Summary” (overriding the glossary’s title). -

    Note that this shortcut command is only available with the

    Note that this shortcut command is only available with the record (or + id="dx1-46044"> (or record=alsoindex) package option. -

    This temporary change in the hypertarget prefix means you need to explicitly use + id="dx1-46045">) package option. +

    This temporary change in the hypertarget prefix means you need to explicitly use \hyperlink to create a link to it as commands like \gls will try to link to the target @@ -22298,12 +22257,12 @@ the front or back matter) which can be the target for all glossary references an just use \printunsrtglossaryunit for a quick summary at the start of a section etc. -

    +

    -

    Top

    10.3 Standalone Entry Items

    -

    It may be that you don’t want a list but would rather display entry details +

    It may be that you don’t want a list but would rather display entry details throughout the document. You can simply do \glsentryname followed by  \par\medskip  
    }

    -

    define your entries +

    define your entries @@ -22338,7 +22297,7 @@ custom command:  
      description={a relation or expression involving variables}  
    }

    -

    and then later in the text: +

    and then later in the text: @@ -22346,25 +22305,25 @@ custom command:

    \displayterm{function}
    -

    -

    However, if may be that you want to use

    +

    However, if may be that you want to use hyperref and have commands like \gls link back to the place where the term is described. Instead of using \glsentryname use -



    \glsxtrglossentry  \glsxtrglossentry{label}

    -

    +

    where ⟨label⟩ is the entry’s label. -

    This is designed to behave much like the way the name is displayed in the +

    This is designed to behave much like the way the name is displayed in the glossary. It performs the following:

    • Defines \printglossary and may be used by style hooks. class="cmtt-10">\glsentryitem and \glssubentryitem. The value is obtained by fully expanding: -



      \GlsXtrStandaloneGlossaryType  \GlsXtrStandaloneGlossaryType

      -

      +

      which defaults to the value of the type field for the current entry. @@ -22411,7 +22370,7 @@ class="cmss-10">subentrycounter\glsentryitem{⟨label}

    -

    otherwise it does (as from v1.31)

    +

    otherwise it does (as from v1.31)

    -

    If you have used

    If you have used \nopostdesc or \glsxtrnopostpunc in any of your description fields, you can use -



    \glsxtractivatenopost  \glsxtractivatenopost

    -

    +

    to make these commands behave as they normally do within a glossary. This needs to be placed before

    @@ -22493,10 +22452,10 @@ class="cmtt-10">}\glspostdescription class="cmtt-10">\glsnonextpages and \glsnextpages have no effect outside of the glossary and are not intended for use in a standalone context. -

    It’s also possible to select a different field (rather than using

    It’s also possible to select a different field (rather than using name): -



    \glsxtrglossentryother  }{field}

    -

    +

    The ⟨field⟩ must be given using its internal field label which may not be the same as the key used to set the field. See the key to field mappings table in the }.

  • Otherwise ⟨header⟩ is simply the field value.
  • -

    The

    The \glsxtrglossentryother command internally uses -



    \GlsXtrStandaloneEntryOther  }{field}

    -

    +

    instead of \GlsXtrStandaloneEntryName, which uses \glossentrynameother{} instead of \glossentryname{label}. -

    If you have loaded the

    If you have loaded the glossaries-accsupp package (through the }

    (for example, \glssymbolaccessdisplay). -

    This means that my custom command can be changed to: +

    This means that my custom command can be changed to: @@ -22593,7 +22552,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glssymbolaccessdisplay).  
     \par\medskip  
    }

    -

    If I want numbered definitions, then I can use the package options

    If I want numbered definitions, then I can use the package options entrycounter or subentrycounter \par\medskip  
    }

    -

    The counter label uses a dot after the number by default but this can be changed to +

    The counter label uses a dot after the number by default but this can be changed to a colon: @@ -22620,13 +22579,13 @@ a colon:

    \renewcommand*{\glsentrycounterlabel}{\theglossaryentry:\space}
    -

    It’s now possible to not only use

    It’s now possible to not only use \gls to link back to the definition but also use \glsrefentry to reference the counter and \glsxtrpageref to reference the page number. -

    If I want the description to behave more like it does in a glossary in need to make +

    If I want the description to behave more like it does in a glossary in need to make the following modification: @@ -22643,9 +22602,9 @@ the following modification:  
     \par\medskip  
    }

    -

    (Note the grouping to localise

    (Note the grouping to localise \glsxtractivatenopost.) -

    You can also use

    You can also use \glsxtrglossentry within section headings. For example: @@ -22654,7 +22613,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrglossentry within section headings. For example:

    \section{\glsxtrglossentry{function}}
    -

    This will use

    This will use \glsentryname in PDF bookmarks (if \texorpdfstring is defined) and will use \@glsxtrnotinmark and \glsxtrrestoremarkhook.) -

    +

    -

    Top

    10.4 Entry Aliases

    -

    An entry can be made an alias of another entry using the

    An entry can be made an alias of another entry using the alias key. The value should be the label of the other term. There’s no check for the other’s @@ -22684,18 +22643,17 @@ defining the other entry after the aliased entry. (For example, when used with bib2gls.) -

    If an entry ⟨bib2gls.) +

    If an entry ⟨entry-1⟩ is made an alias of ⟨entry-2⟩ then:

    • If the see field wasn’t provided when ⟨ field wasn’t provided when ⟨entry-1⟩ was defined, the alias key will + id="dx1-48004"> key will automatically trigger
      }
    • If the hyperref package has been loaded then package has been loaded then \gls{entry-1} will link to @@ -22717,7 +22675,7 @@ class="cmtt-10">} will link to class="cmti-10">entry-2⟩’s target. (Unless the targeturl attribute has been set for ⟨ attribute has been set for ⟨entry-1⟩’s category.)
    • @@ -22725,20 +22683,20 @@ class="cmti-10">entry-1⟩’s href="#styopt.record">record=off or or record=alsoindex, the , the noindex setting will automatically + id="dx1-48009"> setting will automatically be triggered when referencing ⟨entry-1⟩ with commands like \gls or \glstext. This prevents ⟨entry-1⟩ from have a location list (aside from the cross-reference added with \glssee) unless it’s been explicitly @@ -22749,44 +22707,43 @@ class="cmtt-10">noindex=false. -

      Note that with

      Note that with record=only, the location list for aliased entries is controlled + id="dx1-48011">, the location list for aliased entries is controlled with bib2gls’s settings.

    -

    The index suppression trigger is performed by -


    bib2gls’s settings.

    +

    The index suppression trigger is performed by +


    \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex  \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex

    -

    +

    This is performed after the default options provided by \GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts + id="dx1-48015"> have been set. With record=only, , \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex will default to do nothing. -

    Within the definition of

    Within the definition of \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex you can use -



    \glsxtrindexaliased  \glsxtrindexaliased

    -

    +

    to index ⟨entry-2⟩. -

    The index suppression command can be redefined to index the main term instead. +

    The index suppression command can be redefined to index the main term instead. For example: @@ -22798,27 +22755,27 @@ For example:  
     \setkeys{glslink}{noindex}%  
    }

    -

    -

    The value of the

    +

    The value of the alias field can be accessed using -


    field can be accessed using +


    \glsxtralias  \glsxtralias{label}

    -

    +

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    11. Supplemental Packages

    -

    The

    The glossaries bundle provides additional support packages glossaries-prefix (for @@ -22827,10 +22784,10 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp (for accessibility support). These packages aren’t automatically loaded.

    -

    Top

    11.1 Prefixes or Determiners

    -

    If prefixing is required, you can simply load

    If prefixing is required, you can simply load glossaries-prefix after glossaries-extra. For @@ -22854,13 +22811,13 @@ example:  
    \printglossaries  
    \end{document}

    -

    -

    +

    +

    -

    Top

    11.2 Accessibility Support

    -

    The

    The glossaries-accsupp package needs to be loaded before glossaries-extra or through @@ -22875,7 +22832,7 @@ class="cmss-10">accsupp \usepackage[accsupp]{glossaries-extra}

    -

    If you don’t load

    If you don’t load glossaries-accsupp or you load glossaries-accsuppxxx⟩ commands described below will simply be equiv corresponding \glsentryxxx⟩ commands. -

    The following

    The following \glsaccessxxx⟩ commands add accessibility information wrapped around the corresponding \glsentryxxx⟩ commands. There is no check for existence of the entry nor do any of these commands add formatting, hyperlinks or indexing information. -



    \glsaccessname  \glsaccessname{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the name field for the entry identified by ⟨label⟩. -

    If the

    If the glossaries-accsupp package isn’t loaded, this is simply defined as: @@ -22917,7 +22874,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp \newcommand*{\glsaccessname}[1]{\glsentryname{#1}}

    -

    otherwise it’s defined as: +

    otherwise it’s defined as: @@ -22931,20 +22888,20 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp  {#1}%  
    }

    -

    (

    (\glsnameaccessdisplay is defined by the glossaries-accsupp package.) The first letter upper case version is: -



    \Glsaccessname  \Glsaccessname{label}

    -

    +

    Without the glossaries-accsupp package this is just defined as: @@ -22955,7 +22912,7 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp \newcommand*{\Glsaccessname}[1]{\Glsentryname{#1}}

    -

    With the

    With the glossaries-accsupp package this is defined as: @@ -22971,112 +22928,112 @@ class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp  {#1}%  
    }

    -

    -

    The following commands are all defined in an analogous manner. -


    +

    The following commands are all defined in an analogous manner. +


    \glsaccesstext  \glsaccesstext{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the text field. -



    \Glsaccesstext  \Glsaccesstext{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the text field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessplural  \glsaccessplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the plural field. -



    \Glsaccessplural  \Glsaccessplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the plural field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessfirst  \glsaccessfirst{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the first field. -



    \Glsaccessfirst  \Glsaccessfirst{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the first field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessfirstplural  \glsaccessfirstplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the firstplural field. -



    \Glsaccessfirstplural  \Glsaccessfirstplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the firstplural field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccesssymbol  \glsaccesssymbol{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the symbol field. -



    \Glsaccesssymbol  }

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the symbol field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccesssymbolplural  \glsaccesssymbolplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the symbolplural field. -



    \Glsaccesssymbolplural  \Glsaccesssymbolplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the symbolplural field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessdesc  \glsaccessdesc{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the descdescription field. -



    \Glsaccessdesc  \Glsaccessdesc{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the descdescription field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessdescplural  \glsaccessdescplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the descpluraldescriptionplural field. -



    \Glsaccessdescplural  \Glsaccessdescplural{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the descplural field with the first letter converted to upper -case. -


    descriptionplural field with the first letter converted to +upper case. +


    \glsaccessshort  \glsaccessshort{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the short field. -



    \Glsaccessshort  \Glsaccessshort{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the short field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccessshortpl  \glsaccessshortpl{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the shortplural field. -



    \Glsaccessshortpl  \Glsaccessshortpl{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the shortplural field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccesslong  \glsaccesslong{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the long field. -



    \Glsaccesslong  \Glsaccesslong{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the long field with the first letter converted to upper case. -



    \glsaccesslongpl  }

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the longplural field. -



    \Glsaccesslongpl  \Glsaccesslongpl{label}

    -

    +

    This displays the value of the longplural field with the first letter converted to upper @@ -23259,11 +23216,11 @@ case.

    -

    -

    +

    Top

    12. Sample Files

    -

    The following sample files are provided with this package: +

    The following sample files are provided with this package:

    sample.tex
    sample-suppl-hyp.tex. -

    -

    +

    Top

    -

    -

    Alternatively you can use the

    +

    Alternatively you can use the title key when you print the list of abbreviations. For example: @@ -23609,7 +23566,7 @@ For example:

    \printabbreviations[title={List of Abbreviations}]
    -

    or +

    or @@ -23617,10 +23574,10 @@ For example:

    \printglossary[type=abbreviations,title={List of Abbreviations}]
    -

    -

    The other fixed text commands are the diagnostic messages, which shouldn’t +

    +

    The other fixed text commands are the diagnostic messages, which shouldn’t appear in the final draft of your document. -

    The

    The glossaries-extra package has the facility to load language modules (whose filename is in the form glossariesxtr-Latn, associated with the given dialect. There’s no warning if the associated file isn’t found. The script file is loaded after the dialect file. -

    If you want to write your own language module, you just need to create a file +

    If you want to write your own language module, you just need to create a file called glossariesxtr-langtracklang package). For example, glossariesxtr-french.ldf. -

    The simplest code for this file is: +

    The simplest code for this file is: @@ -23681,8 +23638,8 @@ class="cmtt-10">glossariesxtr-french.ldf.  
      {}%  
    }

    -

    -

    You can adapt this for other languages by replacing all instances of the language +

    +

    You can adapt this for other languages by replacing all instances of the language identifier french and the translated text Abr\’eviations as appropriate. You can @@ -23691,76 +23648,75 @@ class="cmtt-10">.ldf file to provide rule blocks for a particular languag bib2gls’s custom sort rule. See bib2gls’s custom sort rule. See §9.3 The glossaries-extra-bib2gls package for further details. -

    This

    This .ldf file then needs to be put somewhere on TEX’s path so that it can be found by glossaries-extra. You might also want to consider uploading it to CTAN so that it can be useful to others. (Please don’t send it to me. I already have more packages than I am able to maintain.) -

    If you additionally want to provide translations for the diagnostic messages used +

    If you additionally want to provide translations for the diagnostic messages used when a glossary is missing, you need to redefine the following commands: -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningHead  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningHead{label}{file}

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    This document is incomplete. The external file associated with the +

    This document is incomplete. The external file associated with the glossary ‘⟨label⟩’ (which should be called ⟨file⟩) hasn’t been created.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyStart  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyStart

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    This has probably happened because there are no entries defined in +

    This has probably happened because there are no entries defined in this glossary.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyMain  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyMain

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    If you don’t want this glossary, add

    If you don’t want this glossary, add nomain to your package option list when you load glossaries-extra.sty. For example:

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyNotMain  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyNotMain{label}

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    Did you forget to use

    Did you forget to use type=label⟩ when you defined your entries? If you tried to load entries into this glossary with ] as the optional argument? If you did, check that the definitions in the file you loaded all had the type set to \glsdefaulttype.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningCheckFile  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningCheckFile{file}

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    Check the contents of the file ⟨

    Check the contents of the file ⟨file⟩. If it’s empty, that means you haven’t indexed any of your entries in this glossary (using commands like \gls or \glsadd) so this list can’t be generated. If the file isn’t empty, the document build process hasn’t been completed.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningMisMatch  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningMisMatch

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    You need +

    You need to either replace \makenoidxglossaries with \makeglossaries or @@ -23812,17 +23768,17 @@ class="cmtt-10">\printglossaries) class="cmtt-10">\printnoidxglossary (or \printnoidxglossaries) and then rebuild this document.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningNoOut  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningNoOut{file}

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    The file ⟨

    The file ⟨file⟩ doesn’t exist. This most likely means you haven’t used \makeglossaries or you have used \nofiles. If this is just a draft version of the document, you can suppress this message using the nomissingglstext package option.

    -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningTail  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningTail

    -

    +

    This produces the following text in English:

    -

    This message will be removed once the problem has been fixed.

    -


    This message will be removed once the problem has been fixed.

    +


    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningBuildInfo  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningBuildInfo

    -

    +

    This is advice on how to generate the glossary files. See the documented code (glossaries-extra-code.pdf) for further details. -



    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningAutoMake  \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningAutoMake{label}

    -

    +

    This is the message produced when the automake option is used, but the document + id="dx1-53021"> option is used, but the document needs a rerun or the shell escape setting doesn’t permit the execution of the external application. This command also generates a warning in the transcript file. See the documented code for further details. @@ -23882,17 +23838,16 @@ href="#top">Top

    bib2gls

    A command line Java application that selects entries from a .bib file and converts them to glossary definitions (like bibtex but also performs hierarchical sorting and collation, thus omitting the need for xindy or makeindex). Further details at: http://www.dickimaw-books.com/software/bib2gls/. entry location
    The location of the entry in the document. This defaults to the page number on which the entry appears. An entry may have multiple locations. @@ -23910,80 +23865,80 @@ class="description">The location of the entry in the document. This defaults to first use
    The first time a glossary entry is used (from the start of the document or after a reset) with one of the following commands: \gls, , \Gls, , \GLS, + id="dx1-54008">, \glspl, , \Glspl, , \GLSpl or or \glsdisp. + id="dx1-54012">.
    first use flag
    A conditional that determines whether or not the entry has been used according to the rules of first use.
    first use text
    The text that is displayed on first use, which is governed by the + id="dx1-54016">first use, which is governed by the first and and firstplural keys of keys of \newglossaryentry. (May be overridden by + id="dx1-54019">. (May be overridden by \glsdisp.) + id="dx1-54020">.)
    link-text
    The text produced by commands such as \gls. It may or may not + id="dx1-54022">. It may or may not have a hyperlink to the glossary.
    location list
    A list of entry locations. See number list.
    makeglossaries
    A custom designed Perl script interface provided with the glossaries package to run xindy or makeindex according to the document settings. @@ -23993,13 +23948,13 @@ class="cmtt-10">makeindex according to the document makeglossaries-lite
    A custom designed Lua script interface to xindy and makeindex provided with the glossaries package. This is a cut-down alternative to the Perl makeglossaries-lite.exe. makeindex
    An indexing application.
    number list
    A list of entry locations (also called a location list). The number list can be suppressed using the nonumberlist package option. + id="dx1-54036"> package option.
    xindy
    An flexible indexing application with multilingual support written in Perl.
    @@ -24544,7 +24499,7 @@ class="cmss-10">short-sm-postfootnote
      273
    \abbreviationsname  274
    \abbrvpluralsuffix  sm-short-long-desc  297
    amsgen package  298
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10" >298
    amsmath package  299
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4132" >299
    \apptoglossarypreamble  B class="cmss-10">babel package  301, 302, 303, 304, 305, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309
    bib2gls  310, 311, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330, 331, 331, 332, 333, 334, 335, 336, 337, 338, 335, 336, 337, 338, 339, 340, 341, 340, 341, 342, 343, 344, 344, 345, 346, 347, 348, 349, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 355, 356, 357, 358, 359, 349, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 355, 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 361, 362, 363, 364, 365, 361, 362, 363, 364, 365, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 371, 372, 373, 367, 368, 369, 370, 371, 372, 373, 374, 375, 376, 377, 378, 379, 380, 381, 382, 375, 376, 377, 378, 379, 380, 381, 382, 383, 384, 385, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 385, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 393, 394, 395, 396, 397, 398, 399, 394, 395, 396, 397, 398, 399, 400, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 409, 410, 411, 408, 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 414, 413, 414, 415, 416, 416, 417, 418
    -bib2gls  419, 420, 421, 422, 423, 424, 425, 426, 427, 428, 429, 430, 431, 432, 433, 434, 435, 436, 437, 438, 439, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 448, 449, 450, 451, 452, 453, 454, 455, 456, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466, 467, 468, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 475, 476, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482, 483, 484, 485, 486, 487, 488, 489, 490, 491, 492, 493, 494, 495, 496, 497, 498, 499, 500, 501, 502, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510, 511, 512, 513, 514, 515, 516, 517, 518, 519, 520, 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 526, 527
    +class="cmbx-10">418

    C categories:
        abbreviation  528, 529, 530, 531, 532
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-9004" >419, 420, 421, 422, 423
        acronym  533, 534, 535, 536, 537
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17022" >424, 425, 426, 427, 428
        general  538, 539, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544, 545
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8037" >429, 430, 431, 432, 433, 434, 435, 436
        index  546, 547
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5050" >437, 438
        number  548
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29018" >439
        symbol  549, 550
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8045" >440, 441
    category attributes:
        accessaposplural  551, 552, 553
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29099" >442, 443, 444
        accessinsertdots  554
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29080" >445
        accessnoshortplural  555
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29110" >446
        aposplural  556, 557, 558, 559, 560, 561, 562, 563
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-11036" >447, 448, 449, 450, 451, 452, 453, 454
        discardperiod  564, 565, 566, 567, 568
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8032" >455, 456, 457, 458, 459
        dualindex  569, 570, 571, 572, 573, 574, 575
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29148" >460, 461, 462, 463, 464, 465, 466
        entrycount  576, 577, 578, 579, 580, 581, 582, 583, 584, 585, 586
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-9003" >467, 468, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 475, 476, 477
        externallocation  587, 588, 589, 590
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6052" >478, 479, 480, 481
        firstshortaccess  591
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29096" >482
        glossdesc  592, 593, 594
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17004" >483, 484, 485
        glossdescfont  595, 596
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17005" >486, 487
        glossname  597, 598, 599
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17003" >488, 489, 490
        glossnamefont  600, 601, 602
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17009" >491, 492, 493
        headuc  603, 604, 605, 606
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12059" >494, 495, 496, 497
        hyperoutside  607, 608
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6019" >498, 499
        indexname  609, 610, 611, 612, 613
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-17014" >500, 501, 502, 503, 504
        indexonlyfirst  614, 615, 616
    - - - +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6007" >505, 506, 507
        insertdots  617, 618, 619, 620
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-20004" >508, 509, 510, 511
        linkcount  621, 622, 623
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29124" >512, 513, 514
    + + +     linkcountmaster  624, 625
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29126" >515, 516
        markshortwords  626, 627
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29061" >517, 518
        markwords  628, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-26212" >519, 520, 521, 522, 523, 524
        nameshortaccess  634
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29087" >525
        nohyper  635, 636, 637
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29034" >526, 527, 528
        nohyperfirst  638, 639, 640, 641, 642
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-26148" >529, 530, 531, 532, 533
        noshortplural  643, 644, 645, 646, 647, 648
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-11037" >534, 535, 536, 537, 538, 539
        pluraldiscardperiod  649, 650
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29048" >540, 541
        recordcount  651, 652, 653, 654
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43015" >542, 543, 544, 545
        regular  655, 656, 657, 658, 659, 660, 661, 662, 663, 664, 665, 666, 667, 668, 669, 670, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675, 676, 677, 678, 679, 680, 681, 682, 683, 684, 685, 686
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8010" >546, 547, 548, 549, 550, 551, 552, 553, 554, 555, 556, 557, 558, 559, 560, 561, 562, 563, 564, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571, 572, 573, 574, 575, 576, 577
        retainfirstuseperiod  687
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29050" >578
        tagging  688, 689, 690, 691
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-21002" >579, 580, 581, 582
        targetcategory  692
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29157" >583
        targetname  693, 694
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29154" >584, 585
        targeturl  695, 696, 697, 698, 699
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5016" >586, 587, 588, 589, 590
        textformat  700, 701, 702, 703, 704
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6020" >591, 592, 593, 594, 595
        textshortaccess  705
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29093" >596
        unitcount  706
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-31034" >597
        wrgloss  707, 708
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6015" >598, 599
    \cGLS  709
    +class="cmti-10">600
    \cGLSformat  710
    +class="cmti-10">601
    \cGLSpl  711
    +class="cmti-10">602
    \cGLSplformat  712
    +class="cmti-10">603
    convertgls2bib  713
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-35003" >604
    \csGlsXtrLetField  714
    +class="cmti-10">605
    \CustomAbbreviationFields  715
    +class="cmti-10">606

    D datatool-base package  716
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-9" >607
    \dGLS  717
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42021" >608
    \dGls  718
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42019" >609
    \dgls  719
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42017" >610
    \dglsdisp  720
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42024" >611
    \dglslink  721
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42023" >612
    \dGLSpl  722
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42022" >613
    \dGlspl  723
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42020" >614
    \dglspl  724
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42018" >615

    E \eglssetwidest  725
    +class="cmti-10">616
    \eglsupdatewidest  726
    - - - +class="cmti-10">617
    \eGlsXtrSetField  727
    +class="cmti-10">618
    entry location  728, 729, 730
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-54004" >619, 620, 621
    + + + entrycounter package  731
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-47020" >622
    equation (counter)  732, 733, 734, 735, 736
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4109" >623, 624, 625, 626, 627
    etoolbox package  737, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5" >628, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633, 634, 635, 636

    F fancyhdr package  746
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14049" >637
    first use  747, 748, 749, 750, 751, 752, 753, 754, 755, 756, 757, 758, 759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 764, 765, 766, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 791, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, 798, 799
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6005" >638, 639, 640, 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 646, 647, 648, 649, 650, 651, 652, 653, 654, 655, 656, 657, 658, 659, 660, 661, 662, 663, 664, 665, 666, 667, 668, 669, 670, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675, 676, 677, 678, 679, 680, 681, 682, 683, 684, 685, 686, 687, 688, 689, 690
    first use flag  800, 801, 802, 803, 804, 805, 806
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8052" >691, 692, 693, 694, 695, 696, 697
    first use text  807, 808
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-54015" >698, 699
    fontenc package  809
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24024" >700

    G \gglssetwidest  810
    +class="cmti-10">701
    \gglsupdatewidest  811
    +class="cmti-10">702
    \gGlsXtrSetField  812
    +class="cmti-10">703
    glossaries package  813, 814, 815, 816, 817, 818, 819, 820, 821, 822, 823, 824, 825, 826, 827, 828, 829, 830, 831, 832
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5038" >704, 705, 706, 707, 708, 709, 710, 711, 712, 713, 714, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719, 720, 721, 722, 723
    glossaries-accsupp package  833, 834, 835, 836, 837, 838, 839, 840, 841, 842, 843, 844, 845, 846, 847, 848, 849
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4034" >724, 725, 726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731, 732, 733, 734, 735, 736, 737, 738, 739, 740
    glossaries-extra package  850, 851, 852, 853, 854, 855
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5011" >741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746
    glossaries-extra-bib2gls package  856, 857, 858, 859, 860, 861, 862, 863, 864
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4077" >747, 748, 749, 750, 751, 752, 753, 754, 755
    glossaries-extra-stylemods package  865, 866, 867, 868, 869, 870, 871, 872, 873
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4026" >756, 757, 758, 759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 764
    glossaries-prefix package  874, 875, 876
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-49001" >765, 766, 767
    \glossariesextrasetup  877
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4230" >768
    glossary styles:
        altlist  878, 879
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19023" >769, 770
        alttree  880, 881, 882, 883, 884, 885, 886, 887, 888, 889, 890, 891
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15026" >771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 779, 780, 781, 782
        bookindex  892, 893, 894, 895
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14002" >783, 784, 785, 786
        index  896
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19038" >787
        inline  897, 898
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19006" >788, 789
        list  899, 900, 901
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19018" >790, 791, 792
        listdotted  902, 903
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19024" >793, 794
        long  904
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19012" >795
        long-desc-name  905
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15066" >796
        long-desc-sym-name  906
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15133" >797
        long-loc-desc-name  907
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15075" >798
        long-loc-desc-sym-name  908
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15141" >799
        long-loc-sym-desc-name  909
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15125" >800
        long-name-desc  910, 911, 912
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15044" >801, 802, 803
        long-name-desc-loc  913
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15057" >804
        long-name-desc-sym  914, 915
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15083" >805, 806
        long-name-desc-sym-loc  916, 917
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15091" >807, 808
        long-name-sym-desc  918
    - - - +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15099" >809
        long-name-sym-desc-loc  919
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15108" >810
        long-sym-desc-name  920
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15117" >811
    + + +     long3col  921
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19004" >812
        longragged-booktabs  922, 923
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15045" >813, 814
        mcolindexgroup  924
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14003" >815
        tree  925, 926
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19039" >816, 817
        treenoname  927, 928, 929
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19044" >818, 819, 820
    glossary-bookindex package  930, 931
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14001" >821, 822
    glossary-inline package  932
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19007" >823
    glossary-long package  933, 934
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15018" >824, 825
    glossary-longextra package  935, 936
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15001" >826, 827
    glossary-tree package  937, 938, 939, 940, 941
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14042" >828, 829, 830, 831, 832
    \glossentrynameother  942
    +class="cmti-10">833
    \glossxtrsetpopts  943
    +class="cmti-10">834
    \glsabbrvdefaultfont  944, 835, 945
    +class="cmti-10">836
    \glsabbrvemfont  946
    +class="cmti-10">837
    \glsabbrvfont  947
    +class="cmti-10">838
    \glsabbrvhyphenfont  948
    +class="cmti-10">839
    \glsabbrvonlyfont  949
    +class="cmti-10">840
    \glsabbrvscfont  950
    +class="cmti-10">841
    \glsabbrvsmfont  951
    +class="cmti-10">842
    \glsabbrvuserfont  952, 843, 953
    +class="cmti-10">844
    \Glsaccessdesc  954
    +class="cmti-10">845
    \glsaccessdesc  955
    +class="cmti-10">846
    \Glsaccessdescplural  956
    +class="cmti-10">847
    \glsaccessdescplural  957
    +class="cmti-10">848
    \Glsaccessfirst  958
    +class="cmti-10">849
    \glsaccessfirst  959
    +class="cmti-10">850
    \Glsaccessfirstplural  960
    +class="cmti-10">851
    \glsaccessfirstplural  961
    +class="cmti-10">852
    \Glsaccesslong  962
    +class="cmti-10">853
    \glsaccesslong  963
    +class="cmti-10">854
    \Glsaccesslongpl  964
    +class="cmti-10">855
    \glsaccesslongpl  965
    +class="cmti-10">856
    \Glsaccessname  966
    +class="cmti-10">857
    \glsaccessname  967
    +class="cmti-10">858
    \Glsaccessplural  968
    +class="cmti-10">859
    \glsaccessplural  969
    +class="cmti-10">860
    \Glsaccessshort  970
    +class="cmti-10">861
    \glsaccessshort  971
    +class="cmti-10">862
    \Glsaccessshortpl  972
    +class="cmti-10">863
    \glsaccessshortpl  973
    +class="cmti-10">864
    \Glsaccesssymbol  974
    +class="cmti-10">865
    \glsaccesssymbol  975
    +class="cmti-10">866
    \Glsaccesssymbolplural  976
    +class="cmti-10">867
    \glsaccesssymbolplural  977
    - - - +class="cmti-10">868
    \Glsaccesstext  978
    +class="cmti-10">869
    \glsaccesstext  979
    +class="cmti-10">870
    + + + \glsacspace  980
    +class="cmti-10">871
    \glsacspacemax  981
    +class="cmti-10">872
    \glsadd options
        format  982
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8075" >873
        theHvalue  983, 984
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6038" >874, 875
        thevalue  985, 986, 987, 988, 989
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6037" >876, 877, 878, 879, 880
    \glsaddeach  990
    +class="cmti-10">881
    \glsaddpostsetkeys  991
    +class="cmti-10">882
    \glsaddpresetkeys  992
    +class="cmti-10">883
    \glscapturedgroup  993
    +class="cmti-10">884
    \glscategory  994
    +class="cmti-10">885
    \glscategorylabel  995
    +class="cmti-10">886
    \glscurrententrylabel  996
    +class="cmti-10">887
    \glscurrentfieldvalue  997
    +class="cmti-10">888
    \glsdefpostdesc  998
    +class="cmti-10">889
    \glsdefpostlink  999
    +class="cmti-10">890
    \glsdefpostname  1000
    +class="cmti-10">891
    \glsentrycurrcount  1001
    +class="cmti-10">892
    \glsentryprevcount  1002
    +class="cmti-10">893
    \glsentryprevmaxcount  1003
    +class="cmti-10">894
    \glsentryprevtotalcount  1004
    +class="cmti-10">895
    \glsextrapostnamehook  1005
    +class="cmti-10">896
    \glsFindWidestAnyName  1006
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19076" >897
    \glsFindWidestAnyNameLocation  1007
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19088" >898
    \glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbol  1008
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19080" >899
    \glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbolLocation  1009
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19085" >900
    \glsFindWidestLevelTwo  1010
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19078" >901
    \glsFindWidestTopLevelName  1011
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19071" >902
    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyName  1012
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19074" >903
    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameLocation  1013
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19086" >904
    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbol  1014
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19079" >905
    \glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbolLocation  1015
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19081" >906
    \glsFindWidestUsedLevelTwo  1016
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19077" >907
    \glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName  1017
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19072" >908
    \glsfirstabbrvdefaultfont  1018
    +class="cmti-10">909
    \glsfirstabbrvemfont  1019
    +class="cmti-10">910
    \glsfirstabbrvfont  1020
    +class="cmti-10">911
    \glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont  1021
    +class="cmti-10">912
    \glsfirstabbrvonlyfont  1022
    +class="cmti-10">913
    \glsfirstabbrvsmfont  1023
    +class="cmti-10">914
    \glsfirstabbrvuserfont  1024
    +class="cmti-10">915
    \glsfirstlongdefaultfont  1025
    +class="cmti-10">916
    \glsfirstlongemfont  1026
    +class="cmti-10">917
    \glsfirstlongfont  1027
    - - - +class="cmti-10">918
    \glsfirstlongfootnotefont  1028
    +class="cmti-10">919
    \glsfirstlonghyphenfont  1029
    -920
    + + + +\glsfirstlongonlyfont  1030
    +class="cmti-10">921

    \glsfirstlonguserfont  1031
    +class="cmti-10">922
    \Glsfmtfirst  1032
    +class="cmti-10">923
    \glsfmtfirst  1033
    +class="cmti-10">924
    \Glsfmtfirstpl  1034
    +class="cmti-10">925
    \glsfmtfirstpl  1035
    +class="cmti-10">926
    \Glsfmtfull  1036
    +class="cmti-10">927
    \glsfmtfull  1037
    +class="cmti-10">928
    \Glsfmtfullpl  1038
    +class="cmti-10">929
    \glsfmtfullpl  1039
    +class="cmti-10">930
    \Glsfmtlong  1040
    +class="cmti-10">931
    \glsfmtlong  1041
    +class="cmti-10">932
    \Glsfmtlongpl  1042
    +class="cmti-10">933
    \glsfmtlongpl  1043
    +class="cmti-10">934
    \Glsfmtname  1044
    +class="cmti-10">935
    \glsfmtname  1045
    +class="cmti-10">936
    \Glsfmtplural  1046
    +class="cmti-10">937
    \glsfmtplural  1047
    +class="cmti-10">938
    \Glsfmtshort  1048
    +class="cmti-10">939
    \glsfmtshort  1049
    +class="cmti-10">940
    \Glsfmtshortpl  1050
    +class="cmti-10">941
    \glsfmtshortpl  1051
    +class="cmti-10">942
    \Glsfmttext  1052
    +class="cmti-10">943
    \glsfmttext  1053
    +class="cmti-10">944
    \glsforeachwithattribute  1054
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29183" >945
    \glsgetattribute  1055
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29166" >946
    \glsgetcategoryattribute  1056
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29165" >947
    \glsgetwidestname  1057
    +class="cmti-10">948
    \glsgetwidestsubname  1058
    +class="cmti-10">949
    \glshasattribute  1059
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29169" >950
    \glshascategoryattribute  1060
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29167" >951
    \glshex  1061
    +class="cmti-10">952
    \glsifattribute  1062
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29174" >953
    \glsifcategory  1063
    +class="cmti-10">954
    \glsifcategoryattribute  1064
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29170" >955
    \glsifnotregular  1065
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29181" >956
    \glsifnotregularcategory  1066
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29180" >957
    \glsifregular  1067
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29177" >958
    \glsifregularcategory  1068
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29176" >959
    \glskeylisttok  1069
    +class="cmti-10">960
    \glslabeltok  1070
    +class="cmti-10">961
    \glslink options
        counter  1071, 1072
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4114" >962, 963
        format  1073, 1074, 1075, 1076
    - - - +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6049" >964, 965, 966, 967
        hyper  1077, 1078, 1079
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-12055" >968, 969, 970
        hyper=false  1080
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-28017" >971
    + + +     hyperoutside  1081, 1082
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6018" >972, 973
        noindex  1083, 1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1089
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6003" >974, 975, 976, 977, 978, 979, 980
        prefix  1090, 1091
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5024" >981, 982
        textformat  1092, 1093
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6022" >983, 984
        theHvalue  1094, 1095
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6028" >985, 986
        thevalue  1096, 1097
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6027" >987, 988
        wrgloss  1098, 1099, 1100, 1101
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6011" >989, 990, 991, 992
    \glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook  1102
    +class="cmti-10">993
    \glslinkpresetkeys  1103
    +class="cmti-10">994
    \glslistchildpostlocation  1104
    +class="cmti-10">995
    \glslistchildprelocation  1105
    +class="cmti-10">996
    \glslistdesc  1106
    +class="cmti-10">997
    \glslistprelocation  1107
    +class="cmti-10">998
    \glslocalreseteach  1108
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10010" >999
    \glslocalunseteach  1109
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10011" >1000
    \glslongdefaultfont  1110
    +class="cmti-10">1001
    \glslongemfont  1111
    +class="cmti-10">1002
    \glslongextraDescAlign  1112
    +class="cmti-10">1003
    \glslongextraDescFmt  1113
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15036" >1004
    \glslongextraDescNameHeader  1114
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15070" >1005
    \glslongextraDescNameTabularFooter  1115
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15074" >1006
    \glslongextraDescNameTabularHeader  1116
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15073" >1007
    \glslongextraDescSymNameHeader  1117
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15136" >1008
    \glslongextraDescSymNameTabularFooter  1118
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15140" >1009
    \glslongextraDescSymNameTabularHeader  1119
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15139" >1010
    \glslongextraGroupHeading  1120
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15043" >1011
    \glslongextraHeaderFmt  1121
    +class="cmti-10">1012
    \glslongextraLocationAlign  1122
    +class="cmti-10">1013
    \glslongextraLocationDescNameHeader  1123
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15078" >1014
    \glslongextraLocationDescNameTabularFooter  1124
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15082" >1015
    \glslongextraLocationDescNameTabularHeader  1125
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15081" >1016
    \glslongextraLocationDescSymNameHeader  1126
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15144" >1017
    \glslongextraLocationDescSymNameTabularFooter  1127
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15148" >1018
    \glslongextraLocationDescSymNameTabularHeader  1128
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15147" >1019
    \glslongextraLocationFmt  1129, 1130
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15038" >1020, 1021
    \glslongextraLocationSymDescNameHeader  1131
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15128" >1022
    \glslongextraLocationSymDescNameTabularFooter  1132
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15132" >1023
    \glslongextraLocationSymDescNameTabularHeader  1133
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15131" >1024
    \glslongextraLocSetDescWidth  1134
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15033" >1025
    \glslongextraNameAlign  1135
    +class="cmti-10">1026
    \glslongextraNameDescHeader  1136
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15047" >1027
    \glslongextraNameDescLocationHeader  1137
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15061" >1028
    \glslongextraNameDescLocationTabularFooter  1138
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15065" >1029
    \glslongextraNameDescLocationTabularHeader  1139
    - - - +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15064" >1030
    \glslongextraNameDescSymHeader  1140
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15086" >1031
    \glslongextraNameDescSymLocationHeader  1141
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15094" >1032
    + + + \glslongextraNameDescSymLocationTabularFooter  1142
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15098" >1033
    \glslongextraNameDescSymLocationTabularHeader  1143
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15097" >1034
    \glslongextraNameDescSymTabularFooter  1144
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15090" >1035
    \glslongextraNameDescSymTabularHeader  1145
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15089" >1036
    \glslongextraNameDescTabularFooter  1146
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15050" >1037
    \glslongextraNameDescTabularHeader  1147
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15049" >1038
    \glslongextraNameFmt  1148
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15035" >1039
    \glslongextraNameSymDescHeader  1149
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15103" >1040
    \glslongextraNameSymDescLocationHeader  1150
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15112" >1041
    \glslongextraNameSymDescLocationTabularFooter  1151
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15116" >1042
    \glslongextraNameSymDescLocationTabularHeader  1152
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15115" >1043
    \glslongextraNameSymDescTabularFooter  1153
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15107" >1044
    \glslongextraNameSymDescTabularHeader  1154
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15106" >1045
    \glslongextraSetDescWidth  1155
    +class="cmti-10">1046
    \glslongextraSetWidest  1156
    +class="cmti-10">1047
    \glslongextraSubDescFmt  1157
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15040" >1048
    \glslongextraSubNameFmt  1158
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15039" >1049
    \glslongextraSubSymbolFmt  1159
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15041" >1050
    \glslongextraSymbolAlign  1160
    +class="cmti-10">1051
    \glslongextraSymbolFmt  1161
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15037" >1052
    \glslongextraSymDescNameHeader  1162
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15120" >1053
    \glslongextraSymDescNameTabularFooter  1163
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15124" >1054
    \glslongextraSymDescNameTabularHeader  1164
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15123" >1055
    \glslongextraSymLocSetDescWidth  1165
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15034" >1056
    \glslongextraSymSetDescWidth  1166
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15032" >1057
    \glslongextraTabularVAlign  1167
    +class="cmti-10">1058
    \glslongextraUpdateWidest  1168
    +class="cmti-10">1059
    \glslongextraUpdateWidestChild  1169
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-15031" >1060
    \GlsLongExtraUseTabulartrue  1170
    +class="cmti-10">1061
    \glslongfont  1171
    +class="cmti-10">1062
    \glslongfootnotefont  1172
    +class="cmti-10">1063
    \glslonghyphenfont  1173
    +class="cmti-10">1064
    \glslongonlyfont  1174
    +class="cmti-10">1065
    \glslongpltok  1175
    +class="cmti-10">1066
    \glslongtok  1176
    +class="cmti-10">1067
    \glslonguserfont  1177
    +class="cmti-10">1068
    \glsnoidxdisplayloc  1178
    +class="cmti-10">1069
    \glsps  1179
    +class="cmti-10">1070
    \glspt  1180
    +class="cmti-10">1071
    \glsrenewcommand  1181
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-38015" >1072
    \glsseeitemformat  1182
    +class="cmti-10">1073
    \glssetattribute  1183
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29164" >1074
    \glssetcategoryattribute  1184
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29161" >1075
    \glssetregularcategory  1185
    - - - +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29163" >1076
    \glsshortpltok  1186
    +class="cmti-10">1077
    \glsshorttok  1187
    +class="cmti-10">1078
    + + + \glstreechilddesc  1188
    +class="cmti-10">1079
    \glstreechildprelocation  1189
    +class="cmti-10">1080
    \glstreechildsymbol  1190
    +class="cmti-10">1081
    \glstreedefaultnamefmt  1191
    +class="cmti-10">1082
    \glstreedesc  1192
    +class="cmti-10">1083
    \glstreenonamechilddesc  1193
    +class="cmti-10">1084
    \glstreenonamedesc  1194
    +class="cmti-10">1085
    \glstreenonamesymbol  1195
    +class="cmti-10">1086
    \glstreeprelocation  1196
    +class="cmti-10">1087
    \glstreesymbol  1197
    +class="cmti-10">1088
    \glsupdatewidest  1198
    +class="cmti-10">1089
    \glsuseabbrvfont  1199
    +class="cmti-10">1090
    \glsuselongfont  1200
    +class="cmti-10">1091
    \glsuserdescription  1201
    +class="cmti-10">1092
    \Glsxtr  1202
    +class="cmti-10">1093
    \glsxtr  1203
    +class="cmti-10">1094
    \glsxtrabbreviationfont  1204
    +class="cmti-10">1095
    \glsxtrabbrvfootnote  1205
    +class="cmti-10">1096
    \glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix  1206, 1097, 1207
    +class="cmti-10">1098
    \glsxtractivatenopost  1208
    +class="cmti-10">1099
    \glsxtraddallcrossrefs  1209
    +class="cmti-10">1100
    \glsxtraddlabelprefix  1210
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42013" >1101
    \glsxtralias  1211
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-48019" >1102
    \glsxtrAltTreeIndent  1212
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19094" >1103
    \glsxtralttreeInit  1213
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19093" >1104
    \glsxtralttreeSubSymbolDescLocation  1214
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19091" >1105
    \glsxtralttreeSymbolDescLocation  1215
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19090" >1106
    \GlsXtrAutoAddOnFormat  1216
    +class="cmti-10">1107
    \glsxtrautoindex  1217
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33024" >1108
    \glsxtrautoindexassignsort  1218
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33020" >1109
    \glsxtrautoindexentry  1219
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33019" >1110
    \glsxtrautoindexesc  1220
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33022" >1111
    \glsxtrBasicDigitrules  1221
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41057" >1112
    \GlsXtrBibTeXEntryAliases  1222
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41005" >1113
    \glsxtrbookindexatendgroup  1223
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14034" >1114
    \glsxtrbookindexbetween  1224
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14029" >1115
    \glsxtrbookindexbookmark  1225
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14039" >1116
    \glsxtrbookindexcols  1226
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14010" >1117
    \glsxtrbookindexcolspread  1227
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14013" >1118
    \glsxtrbookindexfirstmark  1228
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14045" >1119
    \glsxtrbookindexfirstmarkfmt  1229
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14047" >1120
    \glsxtrbookindexformatheader  1230
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14041" >1121
    \glsxtrbookindexlastmark  1231
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14046" >1122
    \glsxtrbookindexlastmarkfmt  1232
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14048" >1123
    +\glsxtrbookindexlocation  1124
    +\glsxtrbookindexmarkentry  1125
    -\glsxtrbookindexmarkentry  1233
    \glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv  1234
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14018" >1126
    \glsxtrbookindexname  1235
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14019" >1127
    \glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep  1236
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14027" >1128
    \glsxtrbookindexparentsubchildsep  1237
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14028" >1129
    \glsxtrbookindexprelocation  1238
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14021" >1130
    \glsxtrbookindexsubatendgroup  1239
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14033" >1131
    \glsxtrbookindexsubbetween  1240
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14030" >1132
    +\glsxtrbookindexsublocation  1133
    \glsxtrbookindexsubname  1241
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14020" >1134
    \glsxtrbookindexsubprelocation  1242
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14024" >1135
    \glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup  1243
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14032" >1136
    \glsxtrbookindexsubsubbetween  1244
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14031" >1137
    \glsxtrchecknohyperfirst  1245
    +class="cmti-10">1138
    \glsxtrclearlabelprefixes  1246
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42015" >1139
    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIIIrules  1247
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41049" >1140
    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIIrules  1248
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41048" >1141
    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIrules  1249
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41047" >1142
    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIVrules  1250
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41050" >1143
    \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticrules  1251
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41046" >1144
    \glsxtrcontrolrules  1252
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41042" >1145
    \glsxtrcopytoglossary  1253
    +class="cmti-10">1146
    \glsxtrcurrencyrules  1254
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41054" >1147
    \glsxtrdeffield  1255
    +class="cmti-10">1148
    \glsxtrdetoklocation  1256
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43004" >1149
    \glsxtrdigitrules  1257
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41056" >1150
    \glsxtrdisplayendloc  1258
    +class="cmti-10">1151
    \glsxtrdisplayendlochook  1259
    +class="cmti-10">1152
    \glsxtrdisplaylocnameref  1260
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-40018" >1153
    \glsxtrdisplaysingleloc  1261
    +class="cmti-10">1154
    \glsxtrdisplaystartloc  1262
    +class="cmti-10">1155
    \glsxtrdisplaysupploc  1263
    +class="cmti-10">1156
    \glsxtrdoautoindexname  1264
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33016" >1157
    \glsxtrdowrglossaryhook  1265
    +class="cmti-10">1158
    \glsxtredeffield  1266
    +class="cmti-10">1159
    \glsxtremsuffix  1267
    +class="cmti-10">1160
    \GlsXtrEnableEntryCounting  1268
    +class="cmti-10">1161
    \GlsXtrEnableEntryUnitCounting  1269
    +class="cmti-10">1162
    \GlsXtrEnableIndexFormatOverride  1270
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33033" >1163
    \GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging  1271
    +class="cmti-10">1164
    \GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting  1272
    +class="cmti-10">1165
    \GlsXtrEnableOnTheFly  1273
    +class="cmti-10">1166
    \GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag  1274
    +class="cmti-10">1167
    \glsxtrenablerecordcount  1275
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43032" >1168
    \glsxtrendfor  1276
    +class="cmti-10">1169
    \glsxtrentryfmt  1277
    +class="cmti-10">1170
    \GlsXtrExpandedFmt  1278
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10018" >1171
    \glsxtrfielddolistloop  1279
    +class="cmti-10">1172
    \glsxtrfieldforlistloop  1280
    +class="cmti-10">1173
    \glsxtrfieldifinlist  1281
    +class="cmti-10">1174
    \glsxtrfieldlistadd  1282
    +class="cmti-10">1175
    \glsxtrfieldlisteadd  1283
    +class="cmti-10">1176
    \glsxtrfieldlistgadd  1284
    +class="cmti-10">1177
    \glsxtrfieldlistxadd  1285
    +class="cmti-10">1178
    \glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs  1286
    +class="cmti-10">1179
    \glsxtrfieldxifinlist  1287
    +class="cmti-10">1180
    \glsxtrfmt  1288
    +class="cmti-10">1181
    \glsxtrfmt*  1289
    +class="cmti-10">1182
    \GlsXtrFmtDefaultOptions  1290
    +class="cmti-10">1183
    \glsxtrfmtdisplay  1291
    +class="cmti-10">1184
    \glsxtrfmtexternalnameref  1292
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-40023" >1185
    \GlsXtrFmtField  1293
    +class="cmti-10">1186
    \glsxtrfmtinternalnameref  1294
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-40022" >1187
    \glsxtrfootnotename  1295
    +class="cmti-10">1188
    \glsxtrforcsvfield  1296
    +class="cmti-10">1189
    \GlsXtrForeignText  1297
    +class="cmti-10">1190
    \GlsXtrForeignTextField  1298
    +class="cmti-10">1191
    \GlsXtrFormatLocationList  1299
    +class="cmti-10">1192
    \GlsXtrForUnsetBufferedList  1300
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10015" >1193
    \glsxtrfractionrules  1301
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41060" >1194
    \GLSxtrfull  1302
    +class="cmti-10">1195
    \Glsxtrfull  1303
    +class="cmti-10">1196
    \glsxtrfull  1304
    +class="cmti-10">1197
    \Glsxtrfullformat  1305
    +class="cmti-10">1198
    \glsxtrfullformat  1306
    +class="cmti-10">1199
    \GLSxtrfullpl  1307
    +class="cmti-10">1200
    \Glsxtrfullpl  1308
    +class="cmti-10">1201
    \glsxtrfullpl  1309
    +class="cmti-10">1202
    \Glsxtrfullplformat  1310
    +class="cmti-10">1203
    \glsxtrfullplformat  1311
    +class="cmti-10">1204
    \glsxtrfullsep  1312
    +class="cmti-10">1205
    \glsxtrGeneralLatinIIIrules  1313
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41063" >1206
    \glsxtrGeneralLatinIIrules  1314
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41062" >1207
    \glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules  1315
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41061" >1208
    \glsxtrGeneralLatinIVrules  1316
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41064" >1209
    \glsxtrGeneralLatinVIIIrules  1317
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41068" >1210
    \glsxtrGeneralLatinVIIrules  1318
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41067" >1211
    \glsxtrGeneralLatinVIrules  1319
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41066" >1212
    \glsxtrGeneralLatinVrules  1320
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41065" >1213
    \glsxtrgeneralpuncIIrules  1321
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41055" >1214
    \glsxtrgeneralpuncIrules  1322
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41053" >1215
    \glsxtrgeneralpuncrules  1323
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41052" >1216
    \glsxtrglossentry  1324
    +class="cmti-10">1217
    \glsxtrglossentryother  1325
    +class="cmti-10">1218
    \glsxtrgroupfield  1326
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46013" >1219
    \GLSXTRhiername  1327
    +class="cmti-10">1220
    \GLSxtrhiername  1328
    +class="cmti-10">1221
    \GlsXtrhiername  1329
    +class="cmti-10">1222
    \Glsxtrhiername  1330
    +class="cmti-10">1223
    \glsxtrhiername  1331
    +class="cmti-10">1224
    \glsxtrhiernamesep  1332
    +class="cmti-10">1225
    \glsxtrhyphenrules  1333
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41051" >1226
    \glsxtrhyphensuffix  1334
    +class="cmti-10">1227
    \glsxtridentifyglslike  1335
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42011" >1228
    \glsxtrifcounttrigger  1336
    +class="cmti-10">1229
    \glsxtrifcustomdiscardperiod  1337
    +class="cmti-10">1230
    \GlsXtrIfFieldCmpStr  1338
    +class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrIfFieldCmpNum  1231
    \GlsXtrIfFieldEqNum  1339
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-45039" >1232
    \GlsXtrIfFieldEqStr  1340
    +class="cmti-10">1233
    \GlsXtrIfFieldEqXpStr  1341
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-45036" >1234
    \GlsXtrIfFieldNonZero  1342
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-45038" >1235
    \GlsXtrIfFieldUndef  1343
    +class="cmti-10">1236
    \glsxtrifhasfield  1344
    +class="cmti-10">1237
    \glsxtrifhasfield*  1345
    +class="cmti-10">1238
    \GlsXtrIfHasNonZeroChildCount  1346
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41004" >1239
    \glsxtrifinlabelprefixlist  1347
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42016" >1240
    \glsxtrifkeydefined  1348
    +class="cmti-10">1241
    \glsxtriflabelinlist  1349
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46040" >1242
    \GlsXtrIfLinkCounterDef  1350
    +class="cmti-10">1243
    \glsxtrifrecordtrigger  1351
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43018" >1244
    \GlsXtrIfUnusedOrUndefined  1352
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10007" >1245
    \glsxtrifwasfirstuse  1353
    +class="cmti-10">1246
    \GlsXtrIfXpFieldEqXpStr  1354
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-45037" >1247
    \glsxtrinclinkcounter  1355
    +class="cmti-10">1248
    \glsxtrindexaliased  1356
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-48017" >1249
    \GlsXtrIndexCounterLink  1357
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-38016" >1250
    \glsxtrindexseealso  1358
    +class="cmti-10">1251
    \glsxtrinitwrgloss  1359
    +class="cmti-10">1252
    \Glsxtrinlinefullformat  1360
    +class="cmti-10">1253
    \glsxtrinlinefullformat  1361
    +class="cmti-10">1254
    \Glsxtrinlinefullplformat  1362
    +class="cmti-10">1255
    \glsxtrinlinefullplformat  1363
    +class="cmti-10">1256
    \glsxtrinsertinsidetrue  1364
    +class="cmti-10">1257
    \glsxtrLatinA  1365
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41069" >1258
    \glsxtrLatinAA  1366
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41093" >1259
    \glsxtrLatinAELigature  1367
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41086" >1260
    \glsxtrLatinE  1368
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41070" >1261
    \glsxtrLatinEszettSs  1369
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41082" >1262
    \glsxtrLatinEszettSz  1370
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41083" >1263
    \glsxtrLatinEth  1371
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41084" >1264
    \glsxtrLatinH  1372
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41071" >1265
    \glsxtrLatinI  1373
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41073" >1266
    \glsxtrLatinInsularG  1374
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41091" >1267
    \glsxtrLatinK  1375
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41072" >1268
    \glsxtrLatinL  1376
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41074" >1269
    \glsxtrLatinLslash  1377
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41089" >1270
    \glsxtrLatinM  1378
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41075" >1271
    \glsxtrLatinN  1379
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41076" >1272
    \glsxtrLatinO  1380
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41077" >1273
    \glsxtrLatinOELigature  1381
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41087" >1274
    \glsxtrLatinOslash  1382
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41088" >1275
    \glsxtrLatinP  1383
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41078" >1276
    \glsxtrLatinS  1384
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41079" >1277
    \glsxtrLatinSchwa  1385
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41092" >1278
    \glsxtrLatinT  1386
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41080" >1279
    \glsxtrLatinThorn  1387
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41085" >1280
    \glsxtrLatinWynn  1388
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41090" >1281
    \glsxtrLatinX  1389
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41081" >1282
    \GlsXtrLetField  1390
    +class="cmti-10">1283
    \GlsXtrLetFieldToField  1391
    +class="cmti-10">1284
    \GlsXtrLinkCounterName  1392
    +class="cmti-10">1285
    \GlsXtrLinkCounterValue  1393
    +class="cmti-10">1286
    \GlsXtrLoadResources  1394
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-35018" >1287
    \glsxtrlocalsetgrouptitle  1395
    +class="cmti-10">1288
    \GlsXtrLocationField  1396
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46036" >1289
    \GlsXtrLocationRecordCount  1397
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43008" >1290
    \glsxtrlocrangefmt  1398
    +class="cmti-10">1291
    \Glsxtrlong  1399, 1292, 1400
    +class="cmti-10">1293
    \glsxtrlong  1401
    +class="cmti-10">1294
    \glsxtrlonghyphen  1402
    +class="cmti-10">1295
    \glsxtrlonghyphenshort  1403
    +class="cmti-10">1296
    \glsxtrlongnoshortdescname  1404
    +class="cmti-10">1297
    \glsxtrlongnoshortname  1405
    +class="cmti-10">1298
    \GLSxtrlongpl  1406
    +class="cmti-10">1299
    \Glsxtrlongpl  1407
    +class="cmti-10">1300
    \glsxtrlongpl  1408
    +class="cmti-10">1301
    \glsxtrlongshortdescname  1409
    +class="cmti-10">1302
    \glsxtrlongshortdescsort  1410
    +class="cmti-10">1303
    \glsxtrlongshortname  1411
    +class="cmti-10">1304
    \glsxtrlongshortuserdescname  1412
    +class="cmti-10">1305
    \glsxtrMathGreekIIrules  1413
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41101" >1306
    \glsxtrMathGreekIrules  1414
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41094" >1307
    \glsxtrMathItalicGreekIIrules  1415
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41116" >1308
    \glsxtrMathItalicGreekIrules  1416
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41110" >1309
    \glsxtrMathItalicLowerGreekIIrules  1417
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41130" >1310
    \glsxtrMathItalicLowerGreekIrules  1418
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41126" >1311
    \glsxtrMathItalicNabla  1419
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41134" >1312
    \glsxtrMathItalicPartial  1420
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41133" >1313
    \glsxtrMathItalicUpperGreekIIrules  1421
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41123" >1314
    \glsxtrMathItalicUpperGreekIrules  1422
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41119" >1315
    \glsxtrMathUpGreekIIrules  1423
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41107" >1316
    \glsxtrMathUpGreekIrules  1424
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41102" >1317
    \glsxtrmultisupplocation  1425
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-39004" >1318
    \glsxtrnameloclink  1426
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-40025" >1319
    \glsxtrnamereflink  1427
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-40019" >1320
    \glsxtrnewgls  1428
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42004" >1321
    \glsxtrnewGLSlike  1429
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42006" >1322
    \glsxtrnewglslike  1430
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42005" >1323
    \glsxtrnewnumber  1431
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4205" >1324
    \glsxtrnewrgls  1432
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42007" >1325
    \glsxtrnewrGLSlike  1433
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42009" >1326
    \glsxtrnewrglslike  1434
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42008" >1327
    \glsxtrnewsymbol  1435
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4202" >1328
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningAutoMake  1436
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53020" >1329
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningBuildInfo  1437
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53019" >1330
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningCheckFile  1438
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53015" >1331
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyMain  1439
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53013" >1332
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyNotMain  1440
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53014" >1333
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningEmptyStart  1441
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53012" >1334
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningHead  1442
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53011" >1335
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningMisMatch  1443
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53016" >1336
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningNoOut  1444
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53017" >1337
    \GlsXtrNoGlsWarningTail  1445
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53018" >1338
    \glsxtrnonprintablerules  1446
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41044" >1339
    \glsxtrnopostpunc  1447
    +class="cmti-10">1340
    \glsxtronlydescname  1448
    +class="cmti-10">1341
    \glsxtronlyname  1449
    +class="cmti-10">1342
    \glsxtronlysuffix  1450
    +class="cmti-10">1343
    \glsxtrorglong  1451
    +class="cmti-10">1344
    \glsxtrorgshort  1452
    +class="cmti-10">1345
    \GLSxtrp  1453
    +class="cmti-10">1346
    \Glsxtrp  1454
    +class="cmti-10">1347
    \glsxtrp  1455
    +class="cmti-10">1348
    \glsxtrpageref  1456
    +class="cmti-10">1349
    \glsxtrparen  1457
    +class="cmti-10">1350
    \Glsxtrpl  1458
    +class="cmti-10">1351
    \glsxtrpl  1459
    +class="cmti-10">1352
    \glsxtrpostdescription  1460
    +class="cmti-10">1353
    \glsxtrposthyphenlong  1461
    +class="cmti-10">1354
    \glsxtrposthyphenshort  1462
    +class="cmti-10">1355
    \glsxtrpostlink  1463
    +class="cmti-10">1356
    \glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse  1464
    +class="cmti-10">1357
    \glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolDescOnFirstUse  1465
    +class="cmti-10">1358
    \glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolOnFirstUse  1466
    +class="cmti-10">1359
    \glsxtrpostlinkendsentence  1467
    +class="cmti-10">1360
    \glsxtrpostlinkhook  1468
    +class="cmti-10">1361
    \glsxtrpostlongdescription  1469
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5037" >1362
    \glsxtrpostnamehook  1470
    +class="cmti-10">1363
    \GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation  1471
    +class="cmti-10">1364
    \glsxtrprelocation  1472
    +class="cmti-10">1365
    \glsxtrprependlabelprefix  1473
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42014" >1366
    \GlsXtrProvideBibTeXFields  1474
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41008" >1367
    \glsxtrprovidecommand  1475
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-38010" >1368
    \glsxtrprovidestoragekey  1476
    +class="cmti-10">1369
    \GlsXtrRecordCount  1477
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43007" >1370
    \GlsXtrRecordCounter  1478
    +class="cmti-10">1371
    \glsxtrrecordtriggervalue  1479
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43020" >1372
    \glsxtrregularfont  1480
    +class="cmti-10">1373
    \glsxtrresourcefile  1481
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-35017" >1374
    \glsxtrresourceinit  1482
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-42003" >1375
    \glsxtrrestorepostpunc  1483
    +class="cmti-10">1376
    \glsxtrRevertMarks  1484
    +class="cmti-10">1377
    \glsxtrRevertTocMarks  1485
    +class="cmti-10">1378
    \glsxtrscsuffix  1486
    +class="cmti-10">1379
    \glsxtrseealsolabels  1487
    +class="cmti-10">1380
    \glsxtrseelist  1488
    +class="cmti-10">1381
    \GlsXtrSetActualChar  1489
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33049" >1382
    \glsxtrsetaliasnoindex  1490
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-48014" >1383
    \GlsXtrSetAltModifier  1491
    +class="cmti-10">1384
    \glsxtrsetcategory  1492
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29185" >1385
    \glsxtrsetcategoryforall  1493
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29187" >1386
    \GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts  1494
    +class="cmti-10">1387
    \GlsXtrSetEncapChar  1495
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33052" >1388
    \GlsXtrSetEscChar  1496
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33051" >1389
    \GlsXtrSetField  1497
    +class="cmti-10">1390
    \glsxtrsetfieldifexists  1498
    +class="cmti-10">1391
    +\glsxtrsetglossarylabel  1392
    \glsxtrsetgrouptitle  1499
    +class="cmti-10">1393
    \GlsXtrSetLevelChar  1500
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33050" >1394
    \glsxtrsetpopts  1501
    +class="cmti-10">1395
    \GlsXtrSetRecordCountAttribute  1502
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43016" >1396
    \glsxtrSetWidest  1503
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-38023" >1397
    \glsxtrSetWidestFallback  1504
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-38028" >1398
    \Glsxtrshort  1505, 1399, 1506
    +class="cmti-10">1400
    \glsxtrshort  1507
    +class="cmti-10">1401
    \glsxtrshortdescname  1508
    +class="cmti-10">1402
    \glsxtrshorthyphenlong  1509
    -\glsxtrshortlongdescname  1510
    +class="cmti-10">1403
    +\glsxtrshortlongdescname  1404
    \glsxtrshortlongname  1511, 1405, 1512
    +class="cmti-10">1406
    \glsxtrshortlonguserdescname  1513
    +class="cmti-10">1407
    \glsxtrshortnolongname  1514
    +class="cmti-10">1408
    \GLSxtrshortpl  1515
    +class="cmti-10">1409
    \Glsxtrshortpl  1516
    +class="cmti-10">1410
    \glsxtrshortpl  1517
    +class="cmti-10">1411
    \glsxtrsmsuffix  1518
    +class="cmti-10">1412
    \glsxtrspacerules  1519
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41043" >1413
    \GlsXtrStandaloneEntryName  1520
    +class="cmti-10">1414
    \GlsXtrStandaloneEntryOther  1521
    +class="cmti-10">1415
    \GlsXtrStandaloneGlossaryType  1522
    +class="cmti-10">1416
    \GlsXtrStartUnsetBuffering  1523
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10013" >1417
    \GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering  1524
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-10014" >1418
    \glsxtrSubScriptDigitrules  1525
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41058" >1419
    \Glsxtrsubsequentfmt  1526
    +class="cmti-10">1420
    \glsxtrsubsequentfmt  1527
    +class="cmti-10">1421
    \Glsxtrsubsequentplfmt  1528
    +class="cmti-10">1422
    \glsxtrsubsequentplfmt  1529
    +class="cmti-10">1423
    \glsxtrSuperScriptDigitrules  1530
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41059" >1424
    \glsxtrtagfont  1531
    +class="cmti-10">1425
    \GlsXtrTheLinkCounter  1532
    +class="cmti-10">1426
    \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount  1533
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43006" >1427
    \glsxtrunsrtdo  1534
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46031" >1428
    \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts  1535
    +class="cmti-10">1429
    \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup  1536
    +class="cmti-10">1430
    \GLSxtrusefield  1537
    +class="cmti-10">1431
    \Glsxtrusefield  1538
    +class="cmti-10">1432
    \glsxtrusefield  1539
    +class="cmti-10">1433
    \glsxtruserfield  1540
    +class="cmti-10">1434
    \glsxtruserparen  1541
    +class="cmti-10">1435
    \glsxtrusersuffix  1542, 1436, 1543
    +class="cmti-10">1437
    \glsxtrusesee  1544
    +class="cmti-10">1438
    \glsxtruseseealso  1545
    +class="cmti-10">1439
    \glsxtruseseeformat  1546, 1440, 1547
    +class="cmti-10">1441
    \GlsXtrWarnDeprecatedAbbrStyle  1548
    +class="cmti-10">1442
    \GlsXtrWarning  1549
    +class="cmti-10">1443
    \glsxtrword  1550
    +class="cmti-10">1444
    \glsxtrwordsep  1551
    +class="cmti-10">1445
    \glsxtrwrglossmark  1552
    +class="cmti-10">1446

    H hyperref package  1553, 1554, 1555, 1556, 1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, 1562, 1563, 1564, 1565, 1566, 1567, 1568, 1569, 1570, 1571, 1572, 1573, 1574, 1575, 1576, 1577
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4089" >1447, 1448, 1449, 1450, 1451, 1452, 1453, 1454, 1455, 1456, 1457, 1458, 1459, 1460, 1461, 1462, 1463, 1464, 1465, 1466, 1467, 1468, 1469, 1470, 1471

    I -\ifglsxtrinitwrglossbefore  1578
    +\ifglsxtrinitwrglossbefore  1472
    inputenc package  1579
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-37012" >1473

    L link-text  1580, 1581, 1582, 1583, 1584, 1585, 1586, 1587, 1588, 1589, 1590, 1591, 1592, 1593, 1594, 1595, 1596, 1597, 1598, 1599
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8001" >1474, 1475, 1476, 1477, 1478, 1479, 1480, 1481, 1482, 1483, 1484, 1485, 1486, 1487, 1488, 1489, 1490, 1491, 1492, 1493
    location list  1600, 1601, 1602, 1603, 1604
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8078" >1494, 1495, 1496, 1497, 1498
    \longnewglossaryentry  1605
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5035" >1499

    M makeglossaries  1606, 1607, 1608, 1609, 1610
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3027" >1500, 1501, 1502, 1503, 1504
    \makeglossaries  1611
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5052" >1505
    makeglossaries-lite  1612, 1613
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5058" >1506, 1507
    makeglossaries-lite  1614, 1615
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5059" >1508, 1509
    makeindex  1616, 1617, 1618, 1619, 1620, 1621, 1622, 1623, 1624, 1625, 1626, 1627, 1628, 1629, 1630, 1631, 1632, 1633, 1634, 1635
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3022" >1510, 1511, 1512, 1513, 1514, 1515, 1516, 1517, 1518, 1519, 1520, 1521, 1522, 1523, 1524, 1525, 1526, 1527, 1528, 1529
    makeindex  1636, 1637, 1638, 1639, 1640
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6044" >1530, 1531, 1532, 1533, 1534
    memoir class  1641
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3021" >1535
    mfirstuc package  1642, 1643, 1644
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4" >1536, 1537, 1538

    N \newabbreviation  1645
    +class="cmti-10">1539
    \newabbreviationstyle  1646
    +class="cmti-10">1540
    \newacronym  1647
    +class="cmti-10">1541
    \newglossaryentry options
        access  1648, 1649
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29088" >1542, 1543
        alias  1650, 1651, 1652, 1653, 1654, 1655
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5028" >1544, 1545, 1546, 1547, 1548, 1549
        category  1656, 1657, 1658, 1659, 1660, 1661
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5027" >1550, 1551, 1552, 1553, 1554, 1555
        counter  1662
    -    desc  1663, 1664
    -    descplural  1665, 1666
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6035" >1556
        description  1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671, 1672, 1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677, 1678, 1679, 1680, 1681, 1682, 1683, 1684, 1685, 1686, 1687, 1688
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5002" >1557, 1558, 1559, 1560, 1561, 1562, 1563, 1564, 1565, 1566, 1567, 1568, 1569, 1570, 1571, 1572, 1573, 1574, 1575, 1576, 1577, 1578, 1579, 1580
        descriptionplural  1689, 1690, 1691, 1692
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5036" >1581, 1582, 1583, 1584, 1585, 1586
        first  1693, 1694, 1695, 1696, 1697, 1698, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1702, 1703, 1704, 1705
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8013" >1587, 1588, 1589, 1590, 1591, 1592, 1593, 1594, 1595, 1596, 1597, 1598, 1599
        firstaccess  1706
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29098" >1600
        firstplural  1707, 1708, 1709, 1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714, 1715, 1716
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8014" >1601, 1602, 1603, 1604, 1605, 1606, 1607, 1608, 1609, 1610
        group  1717, 1718, 1719, 1720, 1721
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-37011" >1611, 1612, 1613, 1614, 1615
        location  1722, 1723, 1724, 1725
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14023" >1616, 1617, 1618, 1619
        loclist  1726, 1727, 1728, 1729
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-40014" >1620, 1621, 1622, 1623
        long  1730, 1731, 1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737, 1738
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-11026" >1624, 1625, 1626, 1627, 1628, 1629, 1630, 1631, 1632
        longplural  1739, 1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-11010" >1633, 1634, 1635, 1636, 1637, 1638
        name  1745, 1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 1751, 1752, 1753, 1754, 1755, 1756, 1757, 1758, 1759, 1760, 1761, 1762, 1763, 1764, 1765, 1766, 1767, 1768, 1769, 1770, 1771, 1772, 1773, 1774, 1775, 1776, 1777, 1778, 1779, 1780, 1781, 1782, 1783, 1784, 1785, 1786, 1787, 1788, 1789, 1790, 1791, 1792, 1793, 1794, 1795, 1796, 1797
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5007" >1639, 1640, 1641, 1642, 1643, 1644, 1645, 1646, 1647, 1648, 1649, 1650, 1651, 1652, 1653, 1654, 1655, 1656, 1657, 1658, 1659, 1660, 1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665, 1666, 1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671, 1672, 1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677, 1678, 1679, 1680, 1681, 1682, 1683, 1684, 1685, 1686, 1687, 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691
        nameshortaccess  1798, 1799
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29094" >1692, 1693
        parent  1800, 1801, 1802
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19075" >1694, 1695, 1696
        plural  1803, 1804, 1805, 1806, 1807, 1808, 1809, 1810, 1811, 1812, 1813, 1814, 1815
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8017" >1697, 1698, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1702, 1703, 1704, 1705, 1706, 1707, 1708, 1709
        prefix  1816
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5023" >1710
        see  1817, 1818, 1819, 1820, 1821, 1822, 1823, 1824, 1825, 1826, 1827, 1828, 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832, 1833, 1834, 1835, 1836, 1837, 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, 1843
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4054" >1711, 1712, 1713, 1714, 1715, 1716, 1717, 1718, 1719, 1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725, 1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731, 1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737
        seealso  1844, 1845, 1846, 1847, 1848, 1849, 1850, 1851, 1852, 1853
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4055" >1738, 1739, 1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745, 1746, 1747
        short  1854, 1855, 1856, 1857, 1858, 1859, 1860, 1861, 1862, 1863, 1864, 1865, 1866, 1867, 1868, 1869
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7041" >1748, 1749, 1750, 1751, 1752, 1753, 1754, 1755, 1756, 1757, 1758, 1759, 1760, 1761, 1762, 1763
        shortaccess  1870, 1871, 1872, 1873, 1874, 1875
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29084" >1764, 1765, 1766, 1767, 1768, 1769
        shortplural  1876, 1877, 1878, 1879, 1880, 1881, 1882, 1883, 1884, 1885, 1886, 1887, 1888, 1889, 1890
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-11011" >1770, 1771, 1772, 1773, 1774, 1775, 1776, 1777, 1778, 1779, 1780, 1781, 1782, 1783, 1784
        shortpluralaccess  1891, 1892, 1893, 1894
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29101" >1785, 1786, 1787, 1788
        sort  1895, 1896, 1897, 1898, 1899, 1900, 1901, 1902, 1903, 1904, 1905, 1906, 1907, 1908, 1909, 1910, 1911, 1912, 1913, 1914
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4173" >1789, 1790, 1791, 1792, 1793, 1794, 1795, 1796, 1797, 1798, 1799, 1800, 1801, 1802, 1803, 1804, 1805, 1806, 1807, 1808
        symbol  1915, 1916, 1917, 1918
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-45032" >1809, 1810, 1811, 1812
        symbolplural  1919, 1920
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-51034" >1813, 1814
        text  1921, 1922, 1923, 1924, 1925, 1926, 1927, 1928, 1929, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1933, 1934
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5009" >1815, 1816, 1817, 1818, 1819, 1820, 1821, 1822, 1823, 1824, 1825, 1826, 1827, 1828
        textaccess  1935
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29095" >1829
        type  1936, 1937, 1938, 1939
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-13046" >1830, 1831, 1832, 1833
        user1  1940, 1941, 1942
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24080" >1834, 1835, 1836
    number list  1943, 1944, 1945, 1946, 1947, 1948, 1949, 1950, 1951, 1952, 1953, 1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1958, 1959, 1960, 1961, 1962, 1963, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968, 1969, 1970, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4027" >1837, 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, 1843, 1844, 1845, 1846, 1847, 1848, 1849, 1850, 1851, 1852, 1853, 1854, 1855, 1856, 1857, 1858, 1859, 1860, 1861, 1862, 1863, 1864, 1865, 1866, 1867, 1868, 1869, 1870

    P package options:
        abbreviations  1977, 1978, 1979, 1980, 1981
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4188" >1871, 1872, 1873, 1874, 1875
        accsupp  1982, 1983, 1984, 1985, 1986
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4033" >1876, 1877, 1878, 1879, 1880
        acronym  1987
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4196" >1881
        acronymlists  1988
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4200" >1882
        automake  1989, 1990
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5060" >1883, 1884
        autoseeindex  1991, 1992
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4063" >1885, 1886
            false  1993, 1994
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4056" >1887, 1888
        counter
            chapter  1995
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4091" >1889
            equation  1996
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4094" >1890
            section  1997
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4092" >1891
            wrglossary  1998
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4127" >1892
        debug  1999
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4002" >1893
            all  2000, 2001
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4005" >1894, 1895
            showtargets  2002, 2003
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4003" >1896, 1897
            showwrgloss  2004, 2005, 2006
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4004" >1898, 1899, 1900
            true  2007
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4007" >1901
        docdef  2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4153" >1902, 1903, 1904, 1905
            restricted  2012, 2013, 2014, 2015
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4166" >1906, 1907, 1908, 1909
            true  2016, 2017
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4184" >1910, 1911
        docdefs  2018, 2019, 2020
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-34003" >1912, 1913, 1914
            true  2021
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4165" >1915
        entrycounter  2022, 2023
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-44002" >1916, 1917
        equations  2024, 2025
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4108" >1918, 1919
            true  2026
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4095" >1920
        floats  2027
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4115" >1921
        hyperfirst
            false  2028
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-29030" >1922
        index  2029, 2030
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5049" >1923, 1924
        indexcounter  2031, 2032, 2033, 2034
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4090" >1925, 1926, 1927, 1928
        indexcrossrefs  2035, 2036, 2037, 2038
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4053" >1929, 1930, 1931, 1932
            false  2039
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4062" >1933
        indexonlyfirst  2040, 2041, 2042, 2043
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6004" >1934, 1935, 1936, 1937
        makeindex  2044
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-40016" >1938
        nogroupskip  2045
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19014" >1939
        nomain  2046
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3032" >1940
        nomissingglstext  2047
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4187" >1941
        nonumberlist  2048, 2049, 2050, 2051, 2052
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7048" >1942, 1943, 1944, 1945, 1946
        nopostdot  2053, 2054, 2055, 2056
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4022" >1947, 1948, 1949, 1950
            false  2057, 2058, 2059
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3004" >1951, 1952, 1953
            true  2060
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3003" >1954
        noredefwarn
            false  2061
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3009" >1955
            true  2062
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3006" >1956
        notree  2063
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19057" >1957
        numbers  2064, 2065, 2066
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4204" >1958, 1959, 1960
        postdot  2067, 2068, 2069
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3005" >1961, 1962, 1963
        postpunc  2070, 2071, 2072
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4018" >1964, 1965, 1966
            comma  2073
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4019" >1967
            dot  2074
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4020" >1968
            none  2075
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4021" >1969
        record  2076, 2077, 2078, 2079, 2080, 2081, 2082, 2083, 2084, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2088
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4061" >1970, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980, 1981, 1982
            alsoindex  2089, 2090, 2091, 2092, 2093, 2094, 2095
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4009" >1983, 1984, 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989
            nameref  2096, 2097
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-40001" >1990, 1991
            off  2098, 2099
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5055" >1992, 1993
            only  2100, 2101, 2102, 2103, 2104, 2105, 2106, 2107, 2108, 2109, 2110
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4066" >1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004
        section
            chapter  2111
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14040" >2005
        seeautonumberlist  2112
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7049" >2006
        seenoindex  2113
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7016" >2007
            ignore  2114, 2115
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7018" >2008, 2009
            warn  2116
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46020" >2010
        shortcuts  2117, 2118
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4206" >2011, 2012
            abbr  2119, 2120
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4212" >2013, 2014
            abbreviation  2121, 2122
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-23001" >2015, 2016
            abbreviations  2123, 2124
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4211" >2017, 2018
            ac  2125, 2126, 2127, 2128, 2129, 2130
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4209" >2019, 2020, 2021, 2022, 2023, 2024
            acro  2131, 2132
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4208" >2025, 2026
            acronyms  2133, 2134
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4207" >2027, 2028
            all  2135, 2136
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4222" >2029, 2030
            false  2137
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4228" >2031
            none  2138
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4227" >2032
            other  2139, 2140
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4213" >2033, 2034
            true  2141
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4223" >2035
        sort
            none  2142, 2143
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4086" >2036, 2037
        stylemods  2144, 2145, 2146, 2147, 2148
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4042" >2038, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042
            all  2149
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4045" >2043
            default  2150
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4044" >2044
        subentrycounter  2151, 2152
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-44003" >2045, 2046
        symbols  2153, 2154, 2155
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4201" >2047, 2048, 2049
        toc
            false  2156
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3002" >2050
            true  2157
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3001" >2051
        translate
            babel  2158
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3011" >2052
            true  2159
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3013" >2053
        undefaction  2160, 2161
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4046" >2054, 2055
            error  2162, 2163, 2164
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4047" >2056, 2057, 2058
            warn  2165, 2166, 2167, 2168, 2169, 2170, 2171, 2172, 2173
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4048" >2059, 2060, 2061, 2062, 2063, 2064, 2065, 2066, 2067
        xindy  2174, 2175
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7068" >2068, 2069
    page (counter)  2176, 2177, 2178, 2179, 2180, 2181
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4093" >2070, 2071, 2072, 2073, 2074, 2075
    polyglossia package  2182, 2183
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-45069" >2076, 2077
    \pretoglossarypreamble  2184
    +class="cmti-10">2078
    \printabbreviations  2185
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4189" >2079
    \printglossary options
        label  2080
    +    nogroupskip  2186
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-19015" >2081
        prefix  2187
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5022" >2082
        target  2188, 2189
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5020" >2083, 2084
        targetnameprefix  2190
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-5021" >2085
        title  2191
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-53006" >2086
    \printnoidxglossary options
        sort  2192
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46023" >2087
    \printunsrtglossaries  2193
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46024" >2088
    \printunsrtglossary  2194
    +class="cmti-10">2089
    \printunsrtglossary*  2195
    +class="cmti-10">2090
    \printunsrtglossaryentryprocesshook  2196
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46027" >2091
    \printunsrtglossaryhandler  2197
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46030" >2092
    \printunsrtglossarypredoglossary  2198
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46029" >2093
    \printunsrtglossaryskipentry  2199
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46028" >2094
    \printunsrtglossaryunit  2200
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46042" >2095
    \printunsrtglossaryunitsetup  2201
    -\provideignoredglossary  2202
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-46043" >2096
    +\provideignoredglossary  2097

    R relsizes package  2203
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-24048" >2098
    \RestoreAcronyms  2204
    +class="cmti-10">2099
    \rGLS  2205
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43013" >2100
    \rGls  2206
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43011" >2101
    \rgls  2207
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43009" >2102
    \rGLSformat  2208
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43029" >2103
    \rGlsformat  2209
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43027" >2104
    \rglsformat  2210
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43025" >2105
    \rGLSpl  2211
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43014" >2106
    \rGlspl  2212
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43012" >2107
    \rglspl  2213
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43010" >2108
    \rGLSplformat  2214
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43030" >2109
    \rGlsplformat  2215
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43028" >2110
    \rglsplformat  2216
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-43026" >2111

    S \setabbreviationstyle  2217
    +class="cmti-10">2112
    slantsc package  2218
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-28021" >2113
    soul package  2219, 2220
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6024" >2114, 2115
    style package  2221
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-14005" >2116
    subentrycounter package  2222
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-47021" >2117

    T texindy  2223
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-33007" >2118
    textcase package  2224
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-7" >2119
    tracklang package  2225, 2226, 2227, 2228, 2229, 2230, 2231, 2232, 2233, 2234
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3" >2120, 2121, 2122, 2123, 2124, 2125, 2126, 2127, 2128, 2129
    translator package  2235
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3012" >2130

    U upgreek package  2236, 2237, 2238, 2239
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-41029" >2131, 2132, 2133, 2134

    W wrglossary (counter)  2240, 2241, 2242, 2243, 2244
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-4128" >2135, 2136, 2137, 2138, 2139

    X xfor package  2245, 2246, 2247
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-8" >2140, 2141, 2142
    \xglssetwidest  2248
    -\xglsupdatewidest  2249
    +class="cmti-10">2143
    +\xglsupdatewidest  2144
    \xGlsXtrSetField  2250
    +class="cmti-10">2145
    xindy  2251, 2252, 2253, 2254, 2255, 2256, 2257, 2258, 2259, 2260, 2261, 2262, 2263, 2264, 2265, 2266, 2267
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-3023" >2146, 2147, 2148, 2149, 2150, 2151, 2152, 2153, 2154, 2155, 2156, 2157, 2158, 2159, 2160, 2161, 2162
    xindy  2268
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6047" >2163
    xkeyval package  2269
    +href="glossaries-extra-manual.html#dx1-6" >2164

    1.14.21 was originally intended as the last release of glossaries to incorporate new features, but a few new minor features slipped in with some bug fixes in v4.21.

    -

    2.1The descriptionplural key is a throwback to the base package’s original acronym mechanism before the introduction of the long and short keys, where the long form was stored in the description + id="dx1-5046"> field and the short form was stored in the symbol field.

    -

    3.1For compatibility with earlier versions, \glsabbrvscfont \glsxtrscfont is now deprecated. Likewise for similar commands.

    -

    9.1Version 1.11 only allowed one use of \GlsXtrLoadResources per document.

    -

    9.2v1.08 assumed filename.glstex extension was enforced by version 1.11.

    -

    10.1Pre version 1.28 used \csedef#1={\protect\ttfamily#1}|main}} \DeleteShortVerb{\|} \MakeShortVerb{"} - \title{glossaries-extra.sty v1.38: + \title{glossaries-extra.sty v1.39: an extension to the glossaries package} \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt] Dickimaw Books\\ \url{http://www.dickimaw-books.com/}} - \date{2018-12-01} + \date{2019-03-22} \maketitle \begin{abstract} @@ -1234,6 +1233,17 @@ any hyperlinks (such as those created with \cs{gls}). actually want to locally change \cs{glolinkprefix}, you can use the \gloskey{prefix} key instead. You need to use the matching \gloskey[glslink]{prefix} key in commands like \cs{gls}. + +\item +\gloskey[printglossary]{label}\texttt{=}\marg{label}. Labels +the glossary with \texttt{\cs{label}\marg{label}} and also +defines \cs{@currentlabelname} to the glossary's TOC title +(to provide text for \cs{nameref}). You can also set the +label before the glossary using: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrsetglossarylabel] +\cs{glsxtrsetglossarylabel}\marg{label} +\end{definition} +but take care of duplicate labels if it's not scoped. \end{itemize} The \cs{newglossaryentry} command has three new keys: @@ -3178,6 +3188,16 @@ location list for sub-entries is given by \end{definition} which defaults to \cs{glsxtrbookindexprelocation}\marg{label}. +The actual location list is encapsulated with: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrbookindexlocation] +\cs{glsxtrbookindexlocation}\marg{label}\marg{location list} +\end{definition} +for top-level entries and +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrbookindexsublocation] +\cs{glsxtrbookindexsublocation}\marg{label}\marg{location list} +\end{definition} +for sub-entries. These both just do \meta{location list} by default. + The separator used between a top-level parent and child entry is given by \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep] @@ -6772,7 +6792,7 @@ behave in a similar way to the \gls{firstuse} of \cs{gls} or \cs{glspl}) now honour this attribute (but not the package-wide \pkgopt[false]{hyperfirst} option, which matches the behaviour of \sty{glossaries}). If you -want commands these \cs{glsfirst} etc commands to ignore the +want commands like \cs{glsfirst} to ignore the \catattr{nohyperfirst} attribute then just redefine \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsxtrchecknohyperfirst] \cs{glsxtrchecknohyperfirst}\marg{label} @@ -8174,7 +8194,7 @@ don't use any commands in the \meta{label}, even if they expand to just text. \end{important} -\chapter{bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases} +\chapter{\appfmt{bib2gls}: Managing Reference Databases} \label{sec:bib2gls} There is a new command line application called @@ -10449,16 +10469,12 @@ You can test if a field value equals a string using \end{definition} If the entry exists and has the given field set to the given text then this does \meta{true} otherwise it does -\meta{false}. This is just a shortcut that uses: -\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsXtrIfFieldCmpStr}] -\cs{GlsXtrIfFieldCmpStr}\marg{field}\marg{label}\marg{comparison}\marg{text}\marg{true}\marg{false} -\end{definition} -This in turn is just a shortcut that uses \cs{glsxtrifhasfield} +\meta{false}. This uses \cs{glsxtrifhasfield} to test if the field exists and then compares the replacement text of \cs{glscurrentfieldvalue} with \meta{text} using -\sty{etoolbox}'s \cs{ifdefstring}. The \meta{comparison} argument -must be one of \texttt{=} (equality), \texttt{<} (less -than) or \texttt{>} (greater than). +\sty{etoolbox}'s \cs{ifdefstring}. Version 1.39 introduced +a starred form of this command, which uses the starred form +of \cs{glsxtrifhasfield}. As from version 1.31, there's a similar command: \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsXtrIfFieldEqXpStr}] @@ -10471,6 +10487,8 @@ use: \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsXtrIfXpFieldEqXpStr}] \cs{GlsXtrIfXpFieldEqXpStr}\marg{field}\marg{label}\marg{text}\marg{true}\marg{false} \end{definition} +Again, version 1.39 introduced a starred form of these commands, +which use the starred form of \cs{glsxtrifhasfield}. As from v1.31, if a field represents a numeric (integer) value, you can use the following two numeric tests. If the field is set, it must @@ -10478,7 +10496,9 @@ expand to an integer. You may use \cs{glscurrentfieldvalue} within \meta{true} or \meta{false} to access the actual value. Both \meta{true} and \meta{false} are scoped. If the field is undefined or empty, the value is assumed to be 0, and \cs{glscurrentfieldvalue} is set -accordingly. +accordingly. As from version 1.39, these numeric tests have +starred versions. The unstarred versions add implicit grouping. +The starred versions don't. To test if the value is non-zero: \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsXtrIfFieldNonZero}] @@ -10490,7 +10510,14 @@ number using: \cs{GlsXtrIfFieldEqNum}\marg{field}\marg{label}\marg{n}\marg{true}\marg{false} \end{definition} This does \meta{true} if the field value equals \meta{n} -(using \cs{ifnum} for the comparison) otherwise it does \meta{false}. +(using \cs{ifnum} for the comparison) otherwise it does +\meta{false}. For a more general numeric comparison you +can use: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\GlsXtrIfFieldCmpNum}] +\cs{GlsXtrIfFieldCmpNum}\marg{field}\marg{label}\marg{comparison}\marg{n}\marg{true}\marg{false} +\end{definition} +where \meta{comparison} is one of \texttt{=}, \texttt{<} or +\texttt{>}. The \styfmt{glossaries} package provides \ics{glsfieldfetch} which can be used to fetch the value of the given field and store it in a @@ -11403,23 +11430,23 @@ with the first letter converted to upper case. \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsaccessdesc] \cs{glsaccessdesc}\marg{label} \end{definition} -This displays the value of the \gloskey{desc} field. +This displays the value of the \gloskey{description} field. \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Glsaccessdesc] \cs{Glsaccessdesc}\marg{label} \end{definition} -This displays the value of the \gloskey{desc} field +This displays the value of the \gloskey{description} field with the first letter converted to upper case. \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsaccessdescplural] \cs{glsaccessdescplural}\marg{label} \end{definition} -This displays the value of the \gloskey{descplural} field. +This displays the value of the \gloskey{descriptionplural} field. \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\Glsaccessdescplural] \cs{Glsaccessdescplural}\marg{label} \end{definition} -This displays the value of the \gloskey{descplural} field +This displays the value of the \gloskey{descriptionplural} field with the first letter converted to upper case. \begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro\glsaccessshort] diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf index 9da553d1538..3e09ec200f5 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf index a6f5cd9b112..e8321a3e30d 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf index 5d1e72e220e..27e02b3b229 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf index 66727b92b77..006a940b660 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf index ce0da6361cf..56e29f76cd7 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf index 402bf6d38c9..e9598ed41e4 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf index a2320cf808f..b5003e828ec 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf index 9a25ed587a4..4c532d10193 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf index dc9de92fa09..4d208c5b6bb 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf index 37a456056ff..9082275ff9f 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf index 7609593be9b..7d5bd628a9d 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf index 845e4ee8b8e..18894499541 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf index 3ab7f351b33..18f91f44043 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf index b738e355591..0e1fc3575f5 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf index 30b35524342..706f0b3f432 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf index aa7fe540eab..27f5a0fa012 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf index 0ac0fa3c05a..291fdaab6c3 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf index ad57a0d1ca2..279f48d939d 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf index 6cc8c06ba42..d9f77fbd14b 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf index 193b0401fc2..286f2340f69 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf index e77f6ac14eb..8961600f7b6 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf index afc9e8ec9b1..8edcfb0398a 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-linkcount.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-linkcount.pdf index a0dd6ac6604..71ebc4f7550 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-linkcount.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-linkcount.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf index 1266a9e8323..f46d6e4d438 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf index 9e1755f8e27..2a2a8cebfdc 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf index 19a6c7a0928..114e8300b70 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf index 15c50e1c2da..d9b7fc6f81c 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf index 781d8689f9f..9d2ad0999d8 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf index c3f0ebb4c98..90517f1ea24 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf index 8acb7c02a7d..a8209b5e33b 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf index c503d84681e..6431616bee1 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf index 5c24af3724d..b58fa1de8ac 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf index 264af0ab814..255fe6c2516 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf index 2a8dee137be..94f8d4e4e2b 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf index 502252f1dd4..7cf93d77fe9 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf index 7b2d9254a05..62e6474101c 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf index b0395ffd45c..0158cd751d0 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.glstex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.glstex index f0457093b40..43852d7a6b3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.glstex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.glstex @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ \providecommand{\bibglsaliassep}{, } \appto\glossarypreamble{% - \providecommand{\bibglslocsuffix}[1]{\@.}% + \providecommand{\bibglslocsuffix}[1]{}% } \providecommand*{\bibglsflattenedhomograph}[2]{#1} \providecommand{\bibglsnewentry}[4]{% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.pdf index bed382e69d2..b517d19ea63 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex index 877454a8b85..eee5c3937fa 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.glstex @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ }% } \appto\glossarypreamble{% - \providecommand{\bibglslocsuffix}[1]{\@.}% + \providecommand{\bibglslocsuffix}[1]{}% } \providecommand*{\bibglsflattenedhomograph}[2]{#1} \providecommand{\bibglsnewentry}[4]{% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf index bbd03f8a636..183454d5459 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf index 785b2e2c1b5..9e87478f520 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf index 003002fc843..ec94a75e3b0 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf index 5092e818fc1..e9b99bc62da 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf index 8e251af1495..05cfb5771c0 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf index 3e6713da35a..a2f4c75ef7a 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf index b7f835aa55e..39c7578195b 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf index 307cde82c02..9bd1f2a9916 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf index 3eef66be2a0..c5b1e7f6b0d 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf index fa2e7870626..669b506a678 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf differ -- cgit v1.2.3